Bo Shen, Girish Ghatikhar, Chun Chun Ni, and Junqiao Dudley. Addressing Energy
Demand Through Demand Response. (Berkeley National Laboratory, June 2012).
(Sections 1 to 4 only)
Define demand response (DR) and understand how DR works to curtail shortages
on a power grid.
Understand how government policy and market deregulation have been instrumental
Understand how bilateral DR programs like cost recovery and demand-side manage-
Understand the potential impact that regulatory changes, renewable generation, and
Identify available features of electricity market design that address resource adequacy.
Understand how price spikes can impact energy-only power markets like Alberta.
Agreements (PPAs) and understand the impact that expiring PPAs have had on
generating capacity in the Alberta electricity market.
Explain the effect that greenhouse gas (GHG) reduction legislation will have on the
power market in Alberta and the methods currently employed to meet GHG target levels.
Describe the challenges associated with integrating wind generation into the power
grid, including the challenges of long-term resource adequacy and the impact wind
power can have on price curves.
2014
3.
Identify the Market Price Cap and Market Floor Price and understand their use in
electricity transactions.
Describe the scheduling of generators for a given hour under NEM rules and calculate
the market price.
4.
Explain the use of hedge contracts and how these transactions are settled.
Nord Pool Spot. The Nordic Electricity Exchange and Model for a Liberalized
Electricity Market.
Describe the role and duties of the Transmission System Operator (TSO) in a deregulated market.
Summarize the process a TSO uses to manage supply and demand on the electric grid.
5.
Hogan, Lovells, Lee & Lee. Singapore Energy Market (Schedule 1: Summary of Singapore
Electricity Market Deregulation and Wholesale Market Operations).
Understand Singapores creation of artificial LNG prices and the rationale for
Describe the financial flows and contract settlement in both the wholesale and
Understand the types of offers made by a generator, how these offers are accepted,
this policy.
retail markets.
market prices established and offers cleared by the market.
2014
6.
P. E. Baker, Prof. C. Mitchell and Dr. B. Woodman. Electricity Market Design for a
Low-carbon Future. (Sections 1 to 6 only)
Explain the impact of wind power on electricity price cost curves, including the
Define the balancing market and understand the relationship between wind power
Define feed-in tariffs and understand their use and the effect on the market.
Discuss the need to provide market pricing signals to address grid congestion.
Identify the safety risks associated with nuclear power generation, and describe the
methodologies and features used to assess and mitigate these risks.
Understand the causes, impact, and safety implications of the Three Mile Island,
Chernobyl, and Fukushima Daiichi incidents.
Understand the economics of nuclear power generation and compare the economics
to other types of electricity generation.
8.
Understand factors that impact the efficiency of a hydropower plant, and compare
the efficiency of hydropower turbines over a range of discharge levels.
2014
Understand the challenges associated with planning electric power systems that
include wind energy, including the integration of wind power to the grid.
Define capacity credits and compare the capacity credit of wind power to hydrocarbon-based power.
Explain how incremental wind power capacity impacts price formation, volatility, and
balancing costs in an electricity market.
Understand the factors that impact the economics of wind power generation, including
the capacity factor, the levelized cost of energy, and the effect of government policies.
9.
Larry Parker (U.S. Congressional Research). Climate Change and the EU-Emissions
Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020.
Understand the ETS system; assess the greenhouse gas reduction commitment under
Understand how an auction system can address the issue of windfall profits that often
Identify key changes in Phase III of the ETS and understand how carbon allowances
are phased out for non-power producing industries under Phase III.
Describe the EU ETS provisions that will support industries in energy intensive,
trade-exposed areas.
10. Chris Groobey, John Pierce, Michael Faber and Greg Broome. Project Finance Primer for
Renewable Energy and Clean Tech Projects.
Describe project finance, and explain the structure of a typical project finance agreement.
Understand the importance of power purchase agreements (PPAs) in securing
project finance.
Compare different loan structures which can be used to raise project debt for a
renewable project.
Explain how project revenues are distributed to stakeholders (i.e. the project "waterfall").
Describe key U.S. government incentive structures for renewable energy projects,
including production tax credits (PTCs), investment tax credits (ITCs), and accelerated
depreciation.
LBNL-5580E
June 2012
This work was supported by AZURE INTERNATIONAL, CESP and Energy Foundation
through the U.S. Department of Energy under Contract No. DE-AC02-05CH11231.
Disclaimer
This document was prepared as an account of work sponsored by the United States Government. While
this document is believed to contain correct information, neither the United States Government nor any
agency thereof, nor The Regents of the University of California, nor any of their employees, makes any
warranty, express or implied, or assumes any legal responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, or
usefulness of any information, apparatus, product, or process disclosed, or represents that its use would
not infringe privately owned rights. Reference herein to any specific commercial product, process, or
service by its trade name, trademark, manufacturer, or otherwise, does not necessarily constitute or
imply its endorsement, recommendation, or favoring by the United States Government or any agency
thereof, or The Regents of the University of California. The views and opinions of authors expressed
herein do not necessarily state or reflect those of the United States Government or any agency thereof,
or The Regents of the University of California.
Ernest Orlando Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory is an equal opportunity employer.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................................................................1
1.1.
1.2.
2.2.
2.3.
3.1.2
3.2.
5.
Lack of Sufficient Incentives from Standard and TOU Pricing: Experience with Interruptible Tariffs ...................... 19
3.2.2
Cost and RisksHow Load Aggregators have Removed Traditional Barriers to DR Participation ........................... 20
3.2.3
3.2.4
4.2.
4.3.
6.
3.2.1
3.3.
4.
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.1.6
5.1.7
List of Acronyms
AESO
AMI
AMP
Auto-DR
BRA
C&I
CAP
CEC
CPP
CSPs
DECC
DLC
DOE
DPCR5
DR
DRAS
DRRC
DSM
EE
EEPS
EILS
EISA 2007
EMCS
EPACT
ERCOT
FCM
FERC
FRCC
HVAC
I/C
IA
IESO
IOUs
Interruptible/curtailable
IT
information technology
LMP
M&V
MRO
NOCs
demand response
incremental auctions
independent electricity system operator
investor-owned utilities
NPCC
OPA
PG&E
PPA
PTR
RFC
RPM
RTDR
RTEG
RTO
RTP
SCE
SERC
SPP
SRM
STOR
TOU
TVA
WECC
WEM
ReliabilityFirst Corporation
reliability pricing model
real time demand response
real time emergency generation
regional transmission organization
real-time pricing
Southern California Edison
time-of-use
Tennessee Valley Authority
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. Definition of Demand Response
Demand response (DR) is a load management tool which provides a cost-effective alternative to
traditional supply-side solutions to address the growing demand during times of peak electrical load.
According to the US Department of Energy (DOE), demand response reflects changes in electric usage
by end-use customers from their normal consumption patterns in response to changes in the price of
electricity over time, or to incentive payments designed to induce lower electricity use at times of high
wholesale market prices or when system reliability is jeopardized. 1 The California Energy Commission
(CEC) defines DR as a reduction in customers electricity consumption over a given time interval relative
to what would otherwise occur in response to a price signal, other financial incentives, or a reliability
signal. 2 This latter definition is perhaps most reflective of how DR is understood and implemented
today in countries such as the US, Canada, and Australia where DR is primarily a dispatchable resource
responding to signals from utilities, grid operators, and/or load aggregators (or DR providers).
U.S. Department of Energy (February 2006), Benefits of Demand Response in Electricity Markets and Recommendations for
Achieving Them: A Report to the United States Congress Pursuant to Section 1252 of The Energy Policy Act of 2005, pp. 11-12.
(http://eetd.lbl.gov/ea/ems/reports/congress-1252d.pdf).
2
http://www.energy.ca.gov/2011_energypolicy/documents/2011-07-06_workshop/background/Metrics_July_IEPR_DR_v1.pdf.
providing 5.5 MW of reserve capacity is average system line losses during DR events were
determined to be roughly 10 percent.3
In addition, because DR is often procured on a forward basis, it may not only offset the operation of
power plants but also their very construction. In this manner, the environmental benefits of DR extend
to the avoided emissions associated with the construction of the materials for the power plant itself (i.e.
cement, steel, etc.), as well as the potential ecological impact that may have resulted should the unit
have been constructed.
The use of DR for non- peak-shaving purposes such as for ancillary services, also comes with significant
environmental benefits, despite the very short duration dispatches of such resources. In many systems,
ancillary services (also known as reserves), are primarily provided by plants in running operating mode,
as there may be an insufficient number of quick-start generating units able to start, synchronize, and
export power to the grid in the requisite period of time. These plants tend to be fueled by diesel or oil,
which add to local and regional pollution. Increased use of quick-response DR can reduce the need for
power plants to run in operating mode, as well as potentially lead to a more efficient overall use of
resources within the system.
Economic benefits
The economic benefits of DR oftentimes may be more significant than the environmental benefits.
While there is a clear environmental benefit to avoiding or reducing power plant operation, the targeted
usage of DR will not save the same amount of energy as permanent load reductions that come from
energy efficiency measures. As peak periods are relatively infrequent, so too tends to be the use of DR.
Yet, the infrequent spikes in demand have a significant economic impact: in many systems, 10% (or
more) of costs are incurred to meet demands which occur less than 1% of the time.4 Reducing this peak
demand through DR programs means that the capacity requirements which drive investments in
generation, transmission, and distribution assets can also be proportionally reduced. The US-based
energy consultancy the Brattle Group, in its 2007 paper The Power of Five Percent, found that a 5%
reduction in peak demand would have resulted in avoided generation and T&D capacity costs of $2.7
billion per year.5
In addition, the use of DR during peak periods can result in significant savings in terms of energy
expenditure. In wholesale markets, spot energy prices during peak periods can skyrocket due to
increased demand. Similarly, energy prices in vertically integrated, non-wholesale market systems can
also increase during peak periods as less efficient units (i.e. with a higher heat rate) are utilized in order
to meet the rising demand. As retail energy rates tend to not reflect the true cost of energy during peak
periods, the expensive utilization of generation during these times is socialized among all customers. By
reducing the need to purchase high-priced power, all customers in a system are positively impacted. The
3
Synapse Energy Economics, Modeling Demand Response and Air Emissions in New England, September 4, 2003. Page 16.
EnerNOC, Inc. Analysis of US and Australian Electricity System Data.; Brattle Group, The Power of Five Percent, May 16, 2007
5
Brattle Group, The Power of Five Percent, May 16, 2007.
4
aforementioned Brattle report also identified energy savings on the order of $300 million per year from
the same 5% reduction in the peak demand of the US as a whole. Figure 1 further illustrates the point
that the avoided capacity costs far outweigh the avoided energy and avoided T&D costs.
Id.
35,000
25.0%
15.0%
25,000
10.0%
5.0%
20,000
0.0%
15,000
-5.0%
-10.0%
10,000
20.0%
30,000
-15.0%
5,000
-20.0%
-25.0%
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
Energy Efficiency
Load Management
U.S. Energy Information Administration (November 23, 2010), Demand-Side Management Actual Peak Load Reduction by
Program Category. (http://205.254.135.24/cneaf/electricity/epa/epat9p1.html)
8
US Energy Information Agency. 2009.
100.0%
90.0%
80.0%
(Unit: %)
70.0%
60.0%
50.0%
40.0%
30.0%
20.0%
10.0%
0.0%
1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009
Energy Efficiency
Load Management
Goldman, Charles, M. Reid, R. Levy, and A. Silverstein (January 2010), Coordination of Energy Efficiency and Demand Response,
Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, LBNL-3044E.
(http://eetd.lbl.gov/ea/ems/reports/lbnl-3044e.pdf)
10
Peak load reductions are categorized as potential or actual. Potential peak load reductions are the amount of load available
for curtailment through load control programs such as direct load control, interruptible load control, other load management,
or other DSM programs. Actual peak load reductions are the amount of reduction that is achieved from load control programs
that are put into force at the same time as peak load and the amount of reductions that result from energy efficiency programs
at the time of peak load.
Incorporating Building codes and appliance standards: Building codes and appliance efficiency
standards can incorporate demand response and energy efficiency functions into the design of
buildings, infrastructure, and power-consuming appliances/equipments. Integrating those codes
and standards can lead to significant reduction in the costs to customers of integrating demand
response and energy efficiency strategies and measures.
11
Id.
Cappers, Peter, C. Goldman, and D. Kathan (2009), Demand Response in U.S. Electricity Markets: Empirical Evidence,
Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, LBNL-2124E.
(http://eetd.lbl.gov/ea/ems/reports/lbnl-2124e.pdf).
12
13
The role of government policy in the establishment of these opportunities has been an essential driver
to the growth of the DR industry in the US. The foundation of competitive power markets in the US can
be traced to the Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPAct) and Order 888 from the Federal Energy Regulatory
Commission (FERC). EPAct began the process of electric industry deregulation and opened up the
opportunity for independent power generators to participate in wholesale markets, which FERC Order
888 furthered by requiring fair access and market treatment to transmission systems. While the
aforementioned legislation and Order were primarily focused on increasing competition among
generators, the concepts laid the groundwork for demand response to enter wholesale markets when
such resources could meet the same technical requirements as their supply-side counterparts. The
Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPACT) further codified that a key objective of US national energy policy was
to eliminate unnecessary barriers to wholesale market demand response participation in energy,
capacity, and ancillary services markets by customers and load aggregators,16 at either the retail or
wholesale level.17
While demand response began participating at scale in wholesale power markets in the early 2000s
particularly in emergency capacity programs many market barriers remained. Fortunately, in October
2008, FERC issued Order 719, which focused on the operation of the countrys wholesale electric
markets. A major component of Order 719 was eliminating barriers to the participation of demand
response in wholesale markets operated by wholesale market operators. Order 719 permitted load
aggregators to bid demand response directly into organized markets, unless the relevant laws of the
local electric retail regulatory authority prohibit such activity.
Demand response integration into US wholesale power markets was further bolstered with the March
2011 issuance of FERC Order 745. Order 745 requires that demand response resources are paid the
Locational Marginal Price (LMP), or the wholesale market price for energy. By codifying the ability for DR
to be compensated in the same fashion as generation resources for services provided to the energy
markets, Order 745 advances the cause of equal treatment between generation and demand side
resources.
In the US, DR is primarily seen in the wholesale capacity markets, most notably in the PJM
Interconnection and ISO-New England. DR in these markets is procured in a competitive process that
places demand side resources on equal footing with generation, creating an opportunity for costeffective DR that can easily enter the market (should technical requirements be able to be met). In
addition, in both markets, capacity DR is dispatched only during the very critical peak or emergency
periods, making end-user participation relatively simple (compared to other markets to be profiled in
this paper that are solely for balancing resources). Examples of both markets are provided below.
The PJM Interconnection
16
Load aggregation is the process by which individual energy users band together in an alliance to secure more competitive
prices than they might otherwise receive working independently. Oftentimes, load aggregator companies are formed to
represent the interests of these groups of customers.
17
Cappers, Peter, C. Goldman, and D. Kathan (2009).
purposes, the trigger for usage in ISO-NE is even more defined. ISO-NE treats DR provided by
curtailment and on-site generation as distinct resources, labeling the former Real Time Demand
Response (RTDR) and the latter Real Time Emergency Generation (RTEG). RTDR may be called by ISO-NE
only when the system reaches an emergency level known as Operating Procedure 4 Action 9 (OP4
Action 9). RTEG, on the other hand, cannot be dispatched until a further level of emergency has been
reached, OP4 Action 12. For customers that utilize both load curtailment and on-site generation to
provide DR capacity, they (or their DR provider), must be able to call those distinct loads separately in
order to comply with ISO-NE requirements. Today, approximately 2,000 MW, or 8% of the resources in
the capacity market, are dispatchable demand response. This figure grows to 3,400 MW, or 10% of the
ISO-NE system, in 2014/15.
Demand response resources can also provide energy to the ISO-NE market through the Real-Time Price
Response and Day-Ahead Load Response Programs. As with energy market participation in PJM, these
programs are relatively unpopular compared to the capacity market, as they require much more
frequent participation and have comparatively lower economic benefit. In both markets, sites that
participate in the energy programs tend to be among the most flexible participants in the capacity
markets who are looking for an additional economic opportunity, rather than the energy program
serving as the sole method of DR participation in the market. While ISO-NE formerly had a pilot program
testing the ability for DR to provide ancillary services the Demand Response Reserve Pilot (DRRP) it
no longer has an active mechanism for DR to provide operating or spinning reserves. DR participation in
these markets is now under active consideration, in part due to the aforementioned FERC Order 719.
UNITED KINGDOM
National Grid Short Term Operating Reserves (STOR) Market
Demand response resources also enjoy wholesale market access in the United Kingdom, albeit in a much
more limited context. Market-based opportunities for demand-side resources in the UK are currently
restricted to ancillary service markets, primarily the Short Term Operating Reserves Market. While
others exist, the parameters result in low levels of participation and or a small addressable market.18 DR
cannot access the nations wholesale energy market and unlike PJM and ISO-NE, there is no capacity
market in the UK. That said, the government, spearheaded by the Department of Energy and Climate
Change (DECC), is pushing forward legislation to launch one in the coming years and which will also
allow for demand side participation.
STOR is essentially a supply and demand balancing service that meets the need of the grid as demand
changes and as traditional power plants come online and ramp up and down, similar in many ways to
the Sycnhronized Reserve Market (SRM) in the PJM Interconnection. While not a capacity market per se,
cleared resource receive an availability payment for each hour they are in the market and available to be
dispatched. Utilization (energy) payments are also given for the actual load reduction provided. Both
features are also present in the aforementioned SRM. As a balancing market, STOR is called much more
18
For example, the Fast Reserves (FR) program has a 50 MW minimum requirement for participation.
10
frequently than the capacity programs in PJM and ISO-NE which are used primarily to address
emergency conditions. STOR participants, on average, must be prepared to respond to a dispatch every
week. Such frequent participation requires the employment of different curtailment strategies than
those that are found in capacity programs designed to shave consumption only during infrequent, peak
periods.
AUSTRALIA
Independent Market Operator Wholesale Electricity Market (WEM)
Another successful example of DR participation in wholesale markets can be found in the South West
Interconnected System of Western Australia, run by the Independent Market Operator (IMO). There are
two wholesale markets in Australia; the Whosesale Electricity Market (WEM) in Western Australia, and
the National Electricity Market (NEM) in the eastern states (except for the Northern Territory). The NEM
is an energy-only market and has very low levels of DR participation for the reasons mentioned earlier,
whereas the WEM is a capacity market similar in many ways to ISO-NE and PJM, and with a significant
penetration of DR. In the most recent Reserve Capacity Cycle, more than 8% of the capacity procured
came from demand-side resources.19
The IMO-administered WEM procures system resources through the Reserve Capacity Mechanism, in
which capacity can be traded bilaterally to the IMO directly, or to retailers. Unlike in PJM and ISO-NE
where capacity prices are the result of competitive offers, the IMO sets a price for all capacity based on
the avoided cost of a marginal new peaking unit, specifically a 160 MW open cycle gas turbine. Auctions
are only triggered if the bilateral trading mechanism secures insufficient capacity.20 As in the previously
discussed capacity markets of the US, DR and generation receives the same exact market payment.
As with PJM and ISO-NE, DR is assumed to have different levels of dispatch capability than traditional
supply-side resources. The RCM has 4 Availability Classes; Generation must all list itself as Class 1, or
available for more than 96 hours a year; DR meanwhile can offer at between 24-96 hours of dispatch.
One important distinction about DR in WA is that unlike PJM and ISO-NE; DR in the WEM can be
dispatched when it is deemed to be economic and is not dependent on emergency conditions. The
system operator is required to first utilize the plants of the former state-owned generation company,
but afterwards all dispatch is determined by the market energy price offered by the resource.
Unlike its counterparts in the US, DR in WA is limited to participation in the wholesale capacity market.
While a wholesale energy market also exists in WA, the STEM, DR resources do not have access to the
market. Meanwhile, a competitive balancing market is only just now being designed, and access for DR
is expected once the market is fully operational in the coming years.
19
The Reserve Capacity Cycle (RCC) is the process that is used in Australia to procure DR resources as part of the Reserve
Capacity Mechanism.
20
Note that to date this situation has never been experienced so no auctions have been called.
11
3.1.2 Bilateral Programs with Vertically Integrated Utilities and Network Operators
Access to existing wholesale markets are just one mechanism for creating and leveraging demand
response resources. In recent years, much growth in the industry has been found in bilateral programs
with vertically integrated utilities in traditionally regulated environments, and with network (T&D)
operators located within a liberalized market structure. These bilateral programs are most often used as
a way to avoid or defer investments in generation and/or T&D infrastructure, and tend to look similar in
structure to a power purchase agreement (PPA) that a utility might sign with an independent power
producer. These utility programs are likely better proxies for how the implementation of nextgeneration demand response could manifest itself in China, given the lack of a wholesale market.
There are a number of enabling policies that have encouraged the development of bilateral DR
programs throughout North America, the UK and Australia. These policies include:
Cost recovery and DSM funds
Loading orders and similar regulations
Peak demand mandates and energy efficiency portfolio standards
Cost Recovery and DSM Funds
Whether in the US, the UK, or Australia, vertically integrated utilities and distribution network operators
are regulated monopolies whose revenues are dependent on government policy and regulation. As such,
12
it is essential to understand the regulatory environments in which these utilities operate in order to
understand how regulatory policies have both contributed to, and hindered, the growth of demand
response.
Perhaps the most basic and essential enabling policy is a cost-recovery mechanisms. Under a costrecovery mechanism, a utility can recover prudently-incurred costs of DR and EE investments on a
dollar-for-dollar basis, typically through a rider or customer surcharge. Cost recovery is designed to
make a utility whole on its DR and EE investments. However, there are challenges with this approach.
First, cost recovery alone will not address the lost margin revenue the utility will face due to reduced
energy sales from DR and EE programs. Second, cost recovery does not factor in opportunity costs: DR
and EE investments displace supply-side investments for which the utility can earn a profit. Given these
opportunity costs, absent a statutory or regulatory mandate, program cost recovery alone will generally
not attract utility interest in DR and EE programs. However, in some jurisdictions, utilities are
authorized to recover additional costs associated with the lost revenue due to the energy efficiency
measures. There are also provisions for earning a fair rate of return on the DSM investment, typically at
levels that are equivalent to allowable returns on power generation assets.
Loading Orders and Similar Regulations
Loading orders are governmental proclamations that define the priority order in which resources are to
be developed. To underscore the importance of energy efficiency and demand response in Californias
future energy picture, the state government developed the Energy Action Plan established a loading
order of preferred resources, placing energy efficiency and demand response as the states highestpriority procurement resource, and set aggressive long-term goals for energy efficiency and demand
response resources. In addition, energy efficiency and demand response strategies were implemented
to address greenhouse gas emission reduction targets specified by AB32, a law adopted in California to
create regulatory policy mechanisms to combat global warming. As a result of these policies,
Californias energy efficiency and demand response efforts have proven to be very successful. California
leads the nation in term of energy saved. The state invests nearly $3 billion per year in energy efficiency
and demand response programs that target electricity and natural gas customers to install high
efficiency equipment, take measures to reduce their peak demands, and establish time-sensitive price
structures that are more in line with the actual cost of providing the electricity. Resources such as
renewable generation, distributed generation, and traditional generation are considered as the second
and third priorities, respectively in the loading order, and should only be considered once all energy
efficiency and demand response resources are exhausted.
In Massachusetts, a law known as the Green Communities Act was passed in 2008 and implemented
shortly thereafter. The law requires the states utilities to procure all available energy efficiency
resources that cost less than traditional energy sources do. The law in effect prioritizes energy efficiency
as being at the top of the loading order, ahead of renewable energy, and more traditional forms of
generation. Among the major provisions is a requirement for utilities to invest in energy efficiency when
it is less expensive than buying power. Previously companies purchased more power when demand
13
increased. The effect of the law is that the state is seeing significant investments in energy efficiency,
leading toward the ultimate goal of reducing the states use of fossil fuels in buildings by 10% and overall
greenhouse gas emissions by 20% in the year 2020.
Peak Demand Mandates, Energy Efficiency Portfolio Standards
Peak demand mandates and energy efficiency portfolio standards have recently emerged as another
mechanism to encourage DR outside of market-based opportunities. Perhaps most well known is a
mandate in the state of Pennsylvania, the so-called Act 129 legislation, signed into law in October 2008,
which requires all electric distribution companies to achieve peak demand reduction targets of 4.5% and
energy efficiency reductions of 4% by 2015. While the legislation does not expressly encourage DR over
other types of peak reduction such as energy efficiency and or solar PV, Pennsylvania utilities appear to
have determined C&I DR was the most cost effective way to reach compliance and several large deals
with aggregators have already been publicly announced.
Other states with peak demand mandates that are similar to Pennsylvania include New York, Colorado,
Michigan and Ohio. In New York, the Public Service Commission established an Energy Efficiency
Portfolio Standard (EEPS) which ordered the states utilities to achieve a 15% reduction in forecast
electricity usage by the year 2015. The states utilities are implementing aggressive EE and DR programs
in order to meet that goal, which specifies that each of the states utilities realize specific MWh and peak
MW reduction amounts by 2015. In Colorado, the Climate Action Plan (CAP) sets carbon reduction goals
for the state and proclaims that energy efficiency programs are the most important responses to the
carbon-reduction challenge. In response, the Colorado Public Utilities Commission has ordered the
states utilities to implement EE and DR programs to meet that goal. Michigan and Ohio have similar
statutory mandates to lower energy usage and peak demand.
Parity of Treatment
Traditional utility regulation favors supply-side resources over DR and EE resources. First, utilities earn a
rate of return on investments in generation, transmission and distribution infrastructure. The absence of
a parallel incentive for DR and EE investments creates a bias against demand-side resources. This has
been described in the economic literature as the Averch-Johnson Effect. That is, where a firms profits
are linked to its capital investment, as is the case with utilities under traditional regulatory structures,
there is an embedded incentive for the firm to increase its capital outlay in a manner that does not
necessarily maximize producer and consumer surplus. Stated another way, traditional regulatory
frameworks create a disincentive for utilities to meet resource needs using approaches that are less
capital intensive. Thus, faced with otherwise equivalent alternatives of building a power plant that
contributes to profitability or making investments in DR and EE that allow for cost-recovery only, a utility
would generally prefer to build a power plant (or T&D).
The government of the United Kingdom recently recognized and addressed this very challenge. In the
2010-2015 Distribution Price Control Review 5 (DPCR5), Ofgem the national electricity and gas
regulator instituted the so-called Equalisation Incentive which establishes parity in the treatment of
14
capital and operating expenditures by distribution utilities. Thus, any utility acting in its own rational
economic interest will clearly pursue the most cost-effective way to meet network needs and reliability
requirements, whether that is through traditional investments in infrastructure or through non-network
alternatives like DSR. As a result of this new regulation, one local distribution network operator
Electricity North West has already deployed a commercial scale DR program in which an aggregator is
deploying DR on specific circuits in order to defer investments in substations. Other distribution network
operators, such as UK Power Networks, are also conducting pilot projects using DR for distribution relief
as they hope to prepare themselves to launch commercial-scale programs under this new regulatory
framework.
Example Utility DR Programs
There are several examples of bilateral DR programs. In California, Pacific Gas and Electric (PG&E)
implements the Aggregator Managed Portfolio (AMP) program. AMP is a non-tariff program that
consists of bilateral contracts with aggregators to provide PG&E with price-responsive demand response.
The program can be called at PG&Es discretion. Each aggregator is responsible for designing and
implementing their own demand response program, including customer acquisition, marketing, sales,
retention, support, event notification and payments. To participate, customers must enroll through a
load aggregator. The customer in turn authorizes the aggregator to act on their behalf with respect to
all aspects of AMP, including receipt of notification of an event, receipt of incentive payments and/or
penalties. Southern California Edison (SCE) operates the Demand Response Contracts (DRC) program.
SCE has contracted with several aggregator companies to provide SCE with price-responsive and/or
demand response events that SCE may call at its discretion. Each aggregator designs their own programs,
and offers demand response program structures and options that may not be directly available through
SCE. Customers may select an aggregator with services that best meet their business needs.
More common are arrangements where a utility contracts with a single DR load aggregator for a
program in their territory (or a single provider per customer class). For example, EnerNOC, a Bostonbased load aggregator has a program in place with the Tennessee Valley Authority (TVA) in the
southeastern US, the largest public power company in the country. TVA procured a long-term, 560 MW
resource from EnerNOC which it is required to deliver in line with contract requirements over the 10year contract length. There are many other load aggregator companies operating in the various
electricity markets throughout North America. As with the aforementioned DR programs in California,
the load aggregator is responsible for all roles from customer acquisition through resource dispatch and
settlement.
As with similar DR programs, TVA has purchased a guaranteed firm resource. In addition to identifying
and enabling DR capacity in line with contract milestones, the load aggregator must also meet
performance standards when dispatched by TVA. Should the load aggregator fail to do either, financial
penalties against the aggregator may be assessed. In this manner, TVA can depend on its DR-based
virtual power plant in the same way its system planners and operators can trust a traditional
generation resource. Figure 4 provides a summary of the TVA bi-lateral program parameters.
15
Program Size
Advanced Notification
Dispatch Trigger
Availability Window
Maximum Cumulative Dispatches
Term Length
Up to 560 MW
30 minutes
TVAs discretion
April October: 12:00-20:00, Mon-Fri
November March: 5:00-13:00, Mon-Fri
40 hours per annum
10 years
16
the price structure with significant changes in energy use, reducing their electricity bills if they
adjust the timing of their electricity usage to take advantage of lower-priced periods and/or
avoid consuming when prices are higher. Customers load use modifications are entirely
voluntary (Table 1)
Incentive-based demand response programs are established by utilities, load-serving entities, or
a regional grid operator. These programs give customers load-reduction incentives that are
separate from, or additional to, their retail electricity rate, which may be fixed (based on
average costs) or time-varying. The load reductions are needed and requested either when the
grid operator thinks reliability conditions are compromised or when prices are too high. Most
demand response programs specify a method for establishing customers baseline energy
consumption level, so observers can measure and verify the magnitude of their load response.
Some demand response programs penalize customers that enroll but fail to respond or fulfill
their contractual commitments when events are declared (Table 1).
17
Incentive-Based
(Contractually Mandatory)
Direct load control: a program by which the
program operator remotely shuts down or cycles
a customers electrical equipment (e.g., air
conditioner, water heater) on short notice. Direct
load control programs are primary offered to
residential or small commercial customers.
Interruptible/curtailable (I/C) service: curtailment
options integrated into retail tariffs that provide a
rate discount or bill credit for agreeing to reduce
load during system contingencies. Penalties
maybe assessed for failure to curtail. Interruptible
programs have traditionally been offered only to
the largest industrial (or commercial) customers.
Demand Bidding/Buyback Program: customers
offer bids to curtail based on wholesale electricity
market prices or an equivalent. Mainly offered to
large customers (e.g., one megawatt [MW] and
over).
Emergency Demand Response Programs: programs
that provide incentive payments to customers for
load reductions during periods when reserve
shortfall arise. (e.g. ERCOT EILS)
Capacity Market Programs: customers offer load
curtailments as system capacity to replace
conventional generation or delivery resources.
Customers typically receive day-of notice of events.
Incentives usually consist of up-front reservation
payments, and face penalties for failure to curtail
when called upon to do so. (e.g. PJM ELRP, IMO WA)
Ancillary Services Market Program: customers bid
load curtailments in ISO/RTO markets as operating
reserves. If their bids are accepted, they paid the
market price for committing to be on standby. If
their load curtailments are needed, they are called
by the ISO/RTO, and may be paid the spot market
energy price. (e.g. PJM SRM, UK STOR)
In addition to federal regulation as described in Section 3.1 and economic benefits described in Section
3.2, numbers of the U.S. utilities have taken action to expand their retail demand response programs.
One incentive factor for many of them has been concern about peak load growth and rising energy
prices.22
22
U.S. Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (December 2008), Assessment of Demand Response and Advanced Metering,
Washington D.C.
(http://www.ferc.gov/legal/staff-reports/12-08-demand-response.pdf).
18
3.2.1. Lack of Sufficient Incentives from Standard and TOU Pricing: Experience with
Interruptible Tariffs
Many utilities have offered a variety of traditional DR programs for many years. These legacy programs
are typically referred to as load management programs. There are three types of legacy load
management programs: direct load control (DLC), time-of-use (TOU) rates, and interruptible contracts.
Each of these programs use some form of incentive to encourage customers to participate. However,
the amount of the incentives or the nature of the incentives has not been sufficient to bring about
meaningful levels of demand reductions.
DLC programs allow the utility to directly control customer end-uses during certain periods when the
electrical system is under strain. The customer end-uses are directly controlled by the utility and when
events are called, those loads are either shut down, cycled on and off, or moved to a lower consumption
periods. Residential DLC programs often target air conditioners or electrical water heaters. Nonresidential DLC programs include air conditioner systems, lighting and in some regions irrigation control.
There are a number of challenges with DLC programs. First, customers tend to become frustrated with
effects of the service interruptions and oftentimes will leave the program if they are called too
frequently. Second, the incentives offered by the utilities have been insufficient to encourage their
sustained participation.
TOU rates are tariff schedules that are typically offered to residential and small business customers on a
voluntary basis and are mandatory for the largest commercial and industrial customers. The TOU rates
are structured to charge lower rates during a utilitys off-peak and partial-peak periods and higher rates
during seasonal and daily peak demand periods. By charging more during the peak period, when
incremental costs are highest, TOU rates send accurate marginal-cost price signals to customers. TOU
rates encourage customers to shift energy use away from peak periods to partial-peak or off-peak
periods and enable customers to lower their electricity bills. There are two common challenges with
TOU rates. First, the utilities have often set the TOU peak periods to be for long periods at a time, thus
limiting customers abilities to shift their loads to the lower price off-peak periods. Second, the TOU rate
programs tend to be static in nature in that the peak and off-peak prices do not change regardless of
system conditions and the true costs required to deliver electricity to customers. Because of the static
nature of the TOU rates, they cannot be counted on for meeting the peak demand needs of the utility.
In addition, the utilities often design these tariffs to be revenue neutral. That is, the price differentials
between on-peak and off-peak are intended to not change the utilitys overall revenue. This goal
oftentimes is inconsistent with a goal of maximizing customer participation in order to have meaningful
peak demand reductions as a result of the TOU tariff.
Interruptible tariffs are contractual arrangements set up between the utility and large non-residential
customers. Customers agree to reduce their electrical consumption to a pre-specified level, or by a prespecified amount, during system reliability problems in return for an incentive payment or a similar rate
19
discount. Customers are given the incentive regardless of whether reliability events are called. In the
past, these programs were developed mostly for customer retention as the utilities assured customers
that reliability events were so rare and would never be called. However, as reliability problems are
becoming more acute, utilities are calling more interruptible events. As a result, many customers are
opting to negotiate an exit to their contractual obligations for these programs as they cannot tolerate
the volume interruptions to their businesses.
3.2.2. Cost and RisksHow Load Aggregators have Removed Traditional Barriers to DR
Participation
Complicated tariff structures and insufficient incentives are just a few of the challenges utilities face
when trying to garner customer interest in traditional, non-aggregator-based DR programs. Equally
important are the costs and risks customers must bear in order to participate.
While the costs for metering and load control equipment may not always be borne by the customer in
these situations, the exposure to performance penalties remains essentially a constant. Without an
aggregator to guarantee the load response, utilities have no choice but to penalize customers if they
dont fully comply with a dispatch in order to ensure proper response. However, C&I loads are
inherently volatile and customers may not always be able to participate and consequently customers
may need to be willing to face a strong likelihood of penalties if they seek to participate.
Using load aggregators is one proven approach to removing many of these traditional barriers to DR
participation. It is typical that the load aggregator pays all costs for the installation of metering and load
control equipment, making participation for the customer a no-cost proposition. More importantly,
because load aggregators are measured on the total load reduction their entire portfolio of sites
provides, and not on a site-by-site basis, they are able to pool resources in a way that ensures that
contract performance requirements can be met. In the event that performance penalties are assessed
on the aggregator, many will still refrain from passing these onto the customer. Figure 5 illustrates this
concept.
20
Load
Aggregator
Utility/TSO
of providing electricity during those times, and lower during off-peak periods, when it is cheaper to
provide electricity. Dynamic pricing incentivizes customers to lower their usage during peak times,
particularly during the most critical hours of the year when peak demands spike and the cost of
acquiring electricity tends to be the highest. Dynamic pricing can take many forms. The most
sophisticated form of dynamic pricing is real-time pricing (RTP). RTP programs are where prices are set
by the utility in near real-time to match the market conditions for available power. Customers must be
able to accommodate whatever price is given, which means that they take a significant risk that if prices
spike they will either accept the higher price or be capable to rapidly reduce their consumption levels to
avoid the high prices. Because of the complexities of RTP programs, most of the examples are in the
pilot stages. Once sophisticated metering infrastructures are put into place and customers have the
necessary building automation systems, it is likely that there will be more RTP programs coming on line
in the future.
Critical peak pricing (CPP) is a less complex form of dynamic pricing. CPP programs are designed such
that the prices for the top 60 to 100 hours are defined ahead of time, but the actual times in which
these prices are in effect is not known until the day before the DR event or sometimes on the same day
as the DR event. The price differentials are intended to be quite steep (oftentimes set at three to fivetimes the peak price) to encourage the customer to reduce or shift their loads during the critical peak
times. CPP programs are offered to all customer types from residential to large commercial and
industrial. A variant of CPP is peak time rebates (PTR). In PTR programs, a standard rate is applied
during all hours but customers can earn a rebate if they reduce their consumption during the critical
peak hours. PTR programs are most applicable to residential customers.
22
side-focused perspective have not been modified: utility revenue is still tied to the amount of kWh sold,
and the amount of capital they invest in generation and/or network infrastructure.
In many regions, utilities are only allowed to recover their DSM expenditures, but cannot earn a rate of
return in the same manner as they would for supply-side investments. Because of this unequal
treatment, some jurisdictions require their utilities to first pursue DSM programs before they can build
generation assets to ensure solutions that may be cost-effective, but not financially beneficial, are
considered. In other areas, utilities are mandated to reduce the peak demands (and energy
consumption) or face penalties such as in Pennsylvania where there is no financial driver for the
utility to do anything other than build more and more infrastructure.
It is within this environment that the UKs equalisation incentive, is significant as it demonstrates a
way to create true parity of treatment outside of a wholesale market context. While wholesale
generation is competitive in the UK, distribution network operation is not they are regulated
monopolies in the same manner as vertically-integrated utilities in traditionally-regulated markets.
Moreover, in traditionally regulated areas, such a mechanism could be applied to all investments so that
generation (or alternatives to it) were also covered. In many ways, it is the concept of the equalisation
incentive that is most important, and not its exact methodology. A multitude of regulatory mechanisms
could likely be developed that would result in equal financial treatment between supply-side and
demand-side investments, and it is important to not prescribe specific methodologies that may be
better suited for one system than another.
This global survey demonstrates that good program designs are crucial to the success of demand
response, perhaps more so than the existence of a formal market structures. Regardless of how DR
programs or opportunities are engendered, programs must have the essential elements outlined in this
paper in order to be sustainable, whether they are in liberalized markets or operated by verticallyintegrated utilities.
In the wholesale capacity markets profiled in this paper, the programs found in the investor-owned
utilities of California, as well as the program for the public utility TVA, clear similarities are evident. All
such programs and markets are capacity-based, in which demand response resources are paid an
ongoing payment for being available to provide capacity. In addition, all these examples are mainly
targeted at the infrequent, yet expensive, top peak hours of the year. While there is indeed the ability
for DR to provide more frequent response, such as in ancillary service markets, these general peakshaving or emergency-prevention programs are suitable for the widest number of participants and can
therefore lead to the highest levels of customer penetration.
Lastly, the inclusion of demand response load aggregators is another key recipe for success. In wholesale
markets, often only the largest industrial customers can participate directly and aggregators are a
mechanism for small and medium sized C&I customers to participate as well. Yet, even in such
conditions, it is common for customers that could otherwise directly access the market do so instead
through aggregators for the risk-mitigation benefits discussed in this paper. And in both the wholesale
markets and among the regulated utility environments that are indeed more similar to the landscape in
23
China, we see aggregators play two other key roles that contribute to the success of DR. From the utility
or system operator perspective is the ability to provide guaranteed capacity. Once reliability can be
ensured, system planners and operators are subsequently able to depend on the DR resource and
reduce the usage of, or construction of, supply-side infrastructure. Put another way, without these
guarantees, there would be limited ability for investments in demand response that lead to
opportunities for participation among end-users. Equally if not more important is the behind-the-meter
expertise that aggregators offer. With specialized staff and technology able to implement repeatable
curtailment strategies that do not negatively impact commercial business operations, aggregators can
both identify and leverage more capacity, and achieve higher levels of customer participation.
24
4.
Demand Response enabling technology solutions are dependent on the level of automation a particular
facility participating in DR program is capable of. Understanding the functional capabilities of building
control systems, including the underlying technologies and software capabilities as installed, is essential
to identify and quantify a specific facilitys potential to participate in Automated Demand Response
(Auto-DR) and to maximize load reduction savings without affecting day-to-day business or operations.
The three key ways a DR program can be implemented are:
1)
2)
3)
Manual DR: This involves manually turning off or changing comfort set points, lights, or
processes or each equipment, switch, or controller.
Semi-Automated DR: This involves automation of HVAC or one or several processes or systems
within a facility using Energy Management Control Systems (EMCS) or centralized control
system, with the remainder of the facility under manual operations.
Fully Automated DR: This involves automation of an entire facility, with integration of end use
loads into an EMCS and centrally managed with no human intervention.
Regardless of the type, technology plays an important role in the reliable operation of demand response.
common for these new smart meters to read data every half-hour or hour, and then backhaul the
consumption data once a day. Such infrequent and delayed measurements, while appropriate for AMR
purposes, do not provide the needed functionality for DR aggregators whom need to ensure delivery
standards are met in real time. In this manner, the installation of additional or specialized metering
equipment is likely required even where AMI is present.
Load Control
Load control hardware is another essential component of modern-day, technology-enabled DR
deployments and is often part of the same advanced metering kit that is installed on customer premises.
Many customer types require some level of automation in order to be able to respond to a dispatch
signal. A grocery store, for example, will typically not have an energy or facilities manager on staff able
to initiate curtailment measures. Even if personnel was present, without automation, they would likely
be unable to manually enact common strategies for this customer segment, including HVAC cycling,
partial lighting curtailment, and anti-sweat heater (condensation) control. In other situations, it is the
program requirements that require load control in order to comply with the response time. Ancillary
service programs, and some bilateral utility programs, can have response times of ten minutes, or less.
In fact, frequency responsive DR programs can have even shorter response times. For example, the
Alberta Energy System Operator (AESO) just launched a DR program with a 200-millisecond response
time. With such requirements, automation and load control is an absolute necessity. Yet even in
traditional peak management programs, remote load control is increasingly being utilized for customer
convenience and enhanced resource reliability.
The aforementioned metering/gateway devices installed are often the foundation for initiating load
control as they feature two-way communication. Such devices may toggle relays attached to specific
circuits, send scripts to Building Energy Management Systems (BEMS) to begin pre-defined curtailment
actions, or attach directly to industrial control equipment.
Dispatch, Monitoring and Management
In order to successfully leverage the metering and load control hardware described above, DR providers
commonly deploy Network Operation Centers (NOCs) to utilize the aforementioned foundation
technologies. It is from these NOCs that load aggregators can initiate automatic dispatch notifications to
participating customers, remotely control customer loads and generation, monitor performance in order
to ensure performance compliance, and coordinate technicians in the field.
Centralized control centers also allow DR to comply with telemetry requirements in a cost-effective way.
Some grid operators require resource in some of their markets (e.g. PJM Synchronized Reserves,
National Grid STOR) to be directly integrated into their respective control rooms with remote terminal
units, or other similar equipment. Such generation-grade hardware is expensive, and would be costprohibitive to deploy at individual customer sites.
26
23
http://collaborate.nist.gov/twiki-sggrid/bin/view/SmartGrid/OpenADR.
Piette, M.A., G. Ghatikar, S. Kiliccote, E. Koch, D. Hennage, P. Palensky, and C. McParland. 2009. Open Automated Demand
Response Communications Specification (Version 1.0). California Energy Commission, PIER Program. CEC-500-2009-063 and
LBNL-1779E.
25
The OpenADR Primer, White paper by the OpenADR Alliance (http://www.openadr.org/).
24
27
During a Demand Response event, the utility or RTO/ISO provides information to the DRAS about what
has changed and on what schedule, such as start and stop times. A typical change would specify one or
more of the following:
Price signals: This would include a price multipler, a price relative, or an absoulte price
Reliability signals: This would include the load amount to be shed (difference, load level, or setpoint that a load should go to).
Levels: These are simple representations of the price and reliability signals such as NORMAL,
MODERATE, and HIGH.
28
The standard also specifies considerable additional information that can be exchanged related to DR and
Distributed Energy Resources (DER) events, including event name and identification, event status,
operating mode, various enumerations (a fixed set of values characterizing the event), reliability and
emergency signals, renewable generation status, market participation.
4.3. Smart Meter and Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI) and OpenADR
As the use of OpenADR for commercial and industrial facilities has gained significant traction in
California and other parts of the U.S., the Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI) and smart home
technologies are currently being implemented on a large-scale basis in residences. The AMI system wide
implementation in California residences by the utilities together with development of the supporting
26
http://www.openadr.org/.
29
technologies has provided opportunity for wide range of system operation and customer management
applications, including communicating DR information through the AMI communication channels. The
AMI communication is not open and accessible outside the utility network. AMI infrastructure can
include smart meter, which is a revenue-qualified device from which charges can be derived. Other
means of measuring power may be used, but they would generally not be qualified for revenue use from
the residence point-of-view, the advanced meter contains valuable information about current and past
power usage. This advanced infrastructure is however, not needed in most DR programs. While the
traditional electrical meters only measure total consumption and as such provide no information of
when the energy is consumed, an interval meter can usually record consumption of electricity in
intervals of an hour or less and communicate that information at least daily back to the utility for
monitoring and billing purposes. In some DR programs, an interval meter is all that is needed for a
customer to be qualified to participate.
LBNL is working with the utilities and other stakeholders to provide an external non-AMI based
OpenADR interface to the residential technologies and home automation networks (HAN). These
interfaces coexist with the AMI infrastructure that the utilities plan to use for their metering and billing
purposes. Figure 7 shows these interfaces where OpenADR can be used as a means of communication
directly with the residential gateway or the end-use devices such as the appliances:27
27
28
30
April 2011
Johannes P. Pfeifenberger
Kathleen Spees
Prepared for
Copyright 2011 The Brattle Group, Inc. This material may be cited subject to inclusion of this copyright notice.
Reproduction or modification of materials is prohibited without written permission from the authors.
Acknowledgements
The authors would like to thank the AESO staff for their cooperation and responsiveness to our
many questions and requests. We would also like to acknowledge the research and analytical
contributions of Lucas Bressan and Robert Carlton. Opinions expressed in this report, as well as
any errors or omissions, are the authors alone.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I.
II.
Background ........................................................................................................................4
A. Market Designs to Address Resource Adequacy ........................................................ 4
1. Energy-Only Markets............................................................................................ 5
2. Market Designs Based on Administrative Capacity Payments............................. 7
3. Market Designs with Resource Adequacy Requirements ..................................... 9
B. AESOs Energy-Only Market Design ........................................................................ 9
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
Bibliography .................................................................................................................................68
List of Acronyms ..........................................................................................................................75
Appendices ....................................................................................................................................77
A. Generator Operating Margins versus Fixed Costs .................................................. A-1
B. Method For Projecting Operating Margins ............................................................. B-1
C. Projection of Generator Operating Margins versus Fixed Costs ............................ C-1
I.
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
The Alberta Electric System Operator (AESO) asked The Brattle Group to review long-term
challenges to resource adequacy in Albertas electricity market and assess the following four
questions:
1. Is the market design sustainable in its current state?
2. Is the energy-only market design sustainable with minor changes?
3. Are major changes required to maintain resource adequacy?
4. What long-term adequacy metrics can be used as milestones for change?
The challenges that Alberta will face over the coming decade include: (1) the potential
introduction of new environmental regulations that could force aging plants to retire or incur
significant capital expenditures; (2) the expiration of power purchase arrangements, which may
trigger accelerated retirement partly due to decommission cost recovery regulations; (3) the
addition of wind generation capacity, which suppresses energy prices and increases price
volatility; (4) expanded interconnections with neighboring markets, which has the potential to
reduce reliability in Alberta if they lead to the province becoming dependent on interties for
resource adequacy, and (5) the continued long-term outlook of low natural gas and power prices,
which result in low operating margins and limits investment cost recovery particularly for coal
and hydro plants.
Individually, each of these challenges may impose a manageable downward pressure on reserve
margins and consequently upward pressure on market prices, ultimately resulting in relatively
stable levels of market prices and reliability. However, the combined impact of these factors
might create a resource adequacy challenge for the Alberta electricity market large enough to
result in unacceptably low levels of reliability or higher, more volatile power prices. The overall
challenge is amplified to the extent that the market will be exposed to all of these pressures
simultaneously over a relatively short period of time.
Most electricity markets around the world face a similar set of challenges, although some of
these challenges are unique to Alberta. For example, most US electricity markets do not rely on
market mechanisms to determine the desired level of reliability, but instead impose resource
adequacy standards that ensure a specific reserve margin. By doing so, reserve capacity becomes
valuable and power plants can earn revenues through bilateral or centralized capacity markets.
Other power markets offer regulated capacity payments to encourage investment. In contrast, no
similar capacity-related revenue sources are available to power plants or demand-side resources
in Alberta. Rather, investment costs need to be recovered solely through revenue earned in
Albertas energy and ancillary service markets. Note that these energy revenues may also be
hedged through short-term and long-term bilaterally contracted sales, although the prices agreed
upon in these contracts will be ultimately informed and driven by energy spot prices from the
centralized wholesale market. This energy-only market design creates significant uncertainties
about whether the market will maintain resource adequacy in the presence of the identified
challenges. In fact, some other energy-only markets, such as in Great Britain, are in the midst of
significant market redesign efforts to address these challenges.
We find that the identified challenges will come about gradually and increase the rate of plant
retirements and investment needs. However, with the possible exception of accelerated
1
retirements related to decommissioning cost recovery, the identified challenges should not result
in substantial simultaneous retirements of existing plants. The rate of plant retirement will most
likely average 220 MW per year over the next two decades, which is 1.5 times the 150 MW of
annual retirements experienced during the last decade. Considering both these retirements as
well as the anticipated load growth of 3.2% per year and an associated reserve margin
requirement increase, this would require the addition of 740 MW per year over the next 20 years.
This is almost twice the rate of historic generation additions, which averaged 380 MW over the
past decade.
We conclude that the current market design should be able to support this higher and
consequently more challenging rate of generation additions. Our analysis shows that the Alberta
market design is generally well-functioning, with energy and ancillary service prices that have
been relatively low when reserve margins were high, but that have increased enough to attract
new plant additions when system-wide reserve margins declined.
We also find that the Alberta market design will likely be able to retain existing resources and
attract new entry without dramatic price increases or a significant reduction in resource
adequacy. Our projections of future energy and ancillary service prices based on recentlyexperienced market conditions show that only modest increases in market prices, consistent with
projected increases in natural gas and carbon emission costs, should be sufficient to avoid
premature retirement of existing resources and, importantly, support investments in new
generation. We find that projected future market prices based on current fundamentals strongly
favor a shift in the resource mix from coal generation to natural-gas-fired power plants, which
are more flexible and have lower capital costs. The entry of additional wind turbines and coal
plants with carbon capture and storage may be supported by government policies and through the
value of green attributes.
As a result, and perhaps contrary to our initial expectations, we currently see no compelling need
for major changes in Albertas electricity market design. However, the outlook for resource
adequacy remains uncertain and sensitive to changes in market fundamentals and continued
evolution of the identified challenges, which must not be underestimated. It also needs to be
recognized that an energy-only market design will not be able to guarantee that a certain
reserve margin will be maintained. In fact, in a small system such as Albertas, the lack of
coordination between the retirement and online dates of individual units can cause transitional
reliability concerns and price spikes, as has been highlighted by the recently announced,
unexpected potential early retirements of Sundance 1 and 2.
Overall, we offer the following recommendations.
The AESO should carefully monitor market fundamentals in light of the identified
challenges. In addition to the already ongoing monitoring of resource adequacy metrics
based on a 24-month outlook, we recommend monitoring: (1) trends in market heat rates
and the long-term outlook for technology-specific operating margins; (2) retirement
schedules and associated system reserve margins; (3) market price impacts of wind
generation as more wind power plants come on line; and (4) the impact of interties as
they are expanded and market rules related to the use of these interties evolve.
Alberta policy makers should consider relaxing or revising the existing decommissioning
cost recovery rule to reduce the risk of large simultaneous plant retirements in 2020 when
most of the existing purchase power arrangements expire. More generally, policy makers
2
should avoid introducing regulations that could result in large simultaneous retirements,
which are difficult to manage in any market or regulated environment.
We recommend that the AESO consider increasing the current price cap from
$1,000/MWh to the lower end of estimates for the value of lost load, which tend to be
in the range of approximately $3,000/MWh. We also recommend reducing the price
floor below zero to a level where generators, including wind plants, would have an
incentive to shut down when it is economic to do so. These adjustments would also
allow for economically efficient prices during reliability events, stimulate demandresponse, facilitate entry of resources at lower average annual market prices, and make
the level of the price cap more consistent with those in other energy-only markets, such
as Texas and Australia.
Coincidentally with increasing its price cap, the AESO should consider revising its
mechanism for setting administrative prices under emergency conditions when out-ofmarket reliability actions become necessary. Under these conditions, prices should be set
to reflect the marginal cost of any out-of-market actions.
The AESO should carefully consider the long-term resource adequacy implications of its
efforts to refine the Alberta market design, which include: (1) the integration of
additional wind generation; (2) refining ancillary service markets and market designs for
demand response; and (3) the expansion of interconnections with neighboring systems.
Overall we conclude that Albertas energy-only market is generally well-functioning and
sustainable, although its efficiency and effectiveness can be improved with some design changes.
However, we caution that the current positive outlook cannot guarantee resource adequacy longterm for the simple reason that Albertas market design, like other energy-only markets, does not
include a resource adequacy requirement. For this reason the AESO must continue to monitor
potential challenges to resource adequacy over time.
II.
BACKGROUND
The Alberta Electric System Operator (AESO) asked The Brattle Group to review long-term
challenges to resource adequacy in Albertas electricity market and assess the sustainability of
the current energy-only market design from a long-term resource adequacy perspective. This
report assesses the possible impact of these challenges to the long-term sustainability of
Albertas energy-only market and explores options that may help reduce the risk of highly
undesirable outcomes. In this context, our report explores four questions:
1. Is the market design sustainable in its current state?
2. Is the energy-only market design sustainable with minor changes?
3. Are major changes required to maintain resource adequacy?
4. What long-term adequacy metrics can be used as milestones for change?
Our evaluation defines a sustainable market design as one that will provide long-term resource
adequacy through pricing signals that are sufficient to attract and retain capacity when needed.
A sustainable design can provide an efficient level of reliability without reliance on out-ofmarket or backstop mechanisms. The scope of our analysis does not include challenges
related to transmission planning, system operations, and short-term market design initiatives.
A. M ARKET D ESIGNS TO A DDRESS R ESOURCE A DEQUACY
Albertas energy-only market design lies within a spectrum of resource adequacy constructs that
have been implemented in North America and around the world, as summarized in Table 1.
Table 1 describes four different electricity market design approaches: (1) energy-only markets,
which are usually accompanied by a set of ancillary services markets, but without an explicit
resource adequacy requirement; (2) markets in which resource adequacy is ensured through
administratively determined capacity payments made directly to suppliers; (3) markets with
explicit resource adequacy requirements that mandate the procurement of reserve capacity by
retail suppliers on a short-term basis (e.g., for the next peak season); and (4) market designs that
mandate procurement of reserve capacity by retail suppliers on a forward basis (e.g., one to
several years prior to the year when the capacity is needed).
Table 1
Spectrum of Approaches to Resource Adequacy1
Type of
Centralized
Capacity
Market
None
Energy-Only
Markets
With Capacity
Payments or
PPAs
Short-Term
Forward
AESO, Australias
NEM, ERCOT,
Great Britain,
NordPool
Argentina, Chile,
Colombia, Peru,
Spain, South
Korea, Ontario
SPP, former
power pools
(NYPP, PJM,
NEPOOL)
CAISO
Voluntary
Midwest ISO
Mandatory
NYISO, former
PJM, Australias
SWIS
The three rows of Table 1 show that in market designs with a resource adequacy requirement for
retail suppliers, the procurement of reserve capacity may be based on bilateral contracting or
self-supply without a centralized capacity market administered by Independent System Operators
(ISO) (row 1), or they may include ISO-administered capacity markets that are either
voluntary (row 2) or mandatory (row 3).
1. Energy-Only Markets
In an energy-only market like Alberta, there is no mandated and no guaranteed level of resource
adequacy. Instead, the amount of capacity in the system is determined by the aggregate effect of
market-based private investment decisions, which are made in response to the prices and
revenues available from the energy and ancillary services markets or through bilateral
contracting with retail suppliers.2,3 Energy-only markets are usually characterized by moderate
2
3
Table 1 is based on a report prepared by The Brattle Group for PJM (see Pfeifenberger, et al. (2009)). The
table refers to the following markets according to their short names: California ISO (CAISO), Southwest
Power Pool (SPP), Electric Reliability Council of Texas (ERCOT), Alberta Electric System Operator
(AESO), Australias National Electricity Market (NEM), Australias South West Interconnected
System (SWIS), PJM Interconnection (PJM), ISO New England (ISO-NE), New York Power Pool
(NYPP), New England Power Pool (NEPOOL), and New York Independent System Operator
(NYISO).
For a full discussion of the theoretical basis for pure energy-only markets, see Hogan (2005) and Joskow
and Tirole (2004).
In many energy-only markets, there often are market interventions through the system operator or
government entities in the case of insufficient resources. Such out-of-market interventions can take the
form of backstop procurement mechanisms, government-built generation, or out-of-market cost recovery
such as government-supported long-term power purchase arrangements.
These out-of-market
interventions damage the function of the energy-only market by artificially suppressing energy-market
levels of energy prices punctuated by occasional severe price spikes. This is because sufficient
resources are available most of the time, and competitive market forces depress prices towards
the production cost of the most expensive unit dispatched. These prices near marginal
production costs are below the price levels needed for full investment cost recovery for marginal
resources. However, there will also be occasional conditions in which supplies become scarce
and energy prices increase (or even spike) to include a scarcity premium that provides
generators with the operating margins needed to recover their investment and other fixed costs.
These occasional price spikes must be large enough and frequent enough to allow the full
recovery of fixed operations and maintenance and investment costs if capacity resources are to
be attracted to and retained in the market. Revenues received from the ancillary services
markets, which tend to track with prices in the energy market, also help determine when and
which types of new capacity investments are attractive.
While such scarcity-based price spikes are inherent to the design of energy-only markets, they
can impose economic impacts on retail customers that create political challenges to maintaining
the market design. However, retail suppliers have the option to hedge against the economic
impact of this price volatility, a practice that is widespread in some energy-only markets, such as
Australias National Electricity Market (NEM).4 For buyers and sellers that are fully hedged
with long-term contracts for power, the hourly energy price has no effect other than as a
settlement tool, or as a benchmark helping to determine a reasonable price for a new long-term
contract.
Occasional high scarcity prices also motivate demand reductions through price-responsive
demand (PRD) and interruptible retail services. The price during a scarcity event must rise
until supply and demand are balanced. If that happens, the scarcity price represents an
economically efficient and accurate representation of the value customers place on consuming
peak power and avoiding interruptions in service. Energy suppliers, likewise, have an efficient
price signal indicating whether or not to invest in capacity without any administrativelydetermined resource adequacy standard. The ability to rely on customers to choose their own
desired level of reliability through the marketplace, rather than relying on administrative
determinations, is one of the (at least theoretical) advantages of energy-only markets.
Demand can adequately adjust to balance the system during supply shortages only if: (1) a large
enough fraction of the load is exposed to and is responsive to market prices; and (2) prices are
allowed to rise to the high value that customers place on reliability. In most real-world energyonly markets, there is not yet sufficient price response or interruptible load to realize the
theoretical model of how the market should behave under scarcity conditions. Instead, during a
scarcity event, the system administrator may have to rely on out-of-market actions such as
expensive off-system power purchases, voluntary emergency load shedding contracts, or resort
to involuntary load curtailments. In some markets, the actions of the system operator to increase
prices and tend to be self-perpetuating. A well-functioning energy-only market should not require such
interventions. See Pfeifenberger, et al. (2009), pp. 19-38. Albertas backstop reliability mechanism,
instituted as part of its Long-Term Adequacy Rules, allows the market operator to intervene to procure
sufficient capacity when the 2-year supply outlook is insufficient to maintain a reliability threshold, see
AESO (2008).
See AER (2007), Ch. 3.
supply through out-of-market actions during emergency events can actually have the undesirable
effect of artificially suppressing the market price. Finally, in the extreme event of firm load
shed, the market price has to be set to an administratively-determined level because the market
clearing price is an undefined quantity during a rationing event. In Alberta the price is set at the
price cap under such conditions.
The theoretically efficient price during emergency operations is the marginal cost of the next
emergency procedure. For example, if voluntary curtailments are required, the pool price should
be set equal to the per-MWh cost of the most expensive load-shed contract called upon during
the emergency.5 If involuntary curtailments of firm load are required, the most efficient price
during the rationing event is the estimated price that the average interrupted customer would
have been willing to pay to avoid interruption. This price level is referred to as the Value of Lost
Load (VOLL).6 Estimates of VOLL vary widely depending partly on the makeup of the
customer base and partly on uncertainty in estimation methods, but usually are at least in the
range of $3,000-$10,000/MWh.7,8 Administrative scarcity pricing at the VOLL crudely
approximates a demand curve for energy.9 More advanced administrative scarcity pricing
schemes, as used by the Midwest ISO for example, gradually increase the price toward the
VOLL as the necessity of involuntary curtailments becomes more likely.10
When the potential for exercise of generator market power is a concern, administrative scarcity
pricing can also allow the system operator to maintain a generator bid cap below the VOLLbased price cap, without undermining efficiently high prices during scarcity events. For
example, prices can increase to the generator bid cap as the supply stack runs out. At even
higher levels of scarcity, a combination of high-priced demand bids (which can be higher than
the generator bid cap) and administrative scarcity pricing can tie the prevailing market price
directly to the marginal cost of demand interruptions or the marginal cost of out-of-market
emergency operations.
2. Market Designs Based on Administrative Capacity Payments
Some energy market designs mitigate or otherwise suppress market prices to levels far below the
VOLL, such that they do not include a sufficient scarcity premium. As a result, suppliers are
generally unable to recover their fixed costs solely through energy and ancillary services
6
7
8
10
For example, if the load-shed contract for a 1 MW reduction costs $10,000/year and stipulates an expected
5 hours of curtailment per year, then the hourly system-wide price for any hour when the contract is
enacted should be $2,000/MWh.
See Joskow and Tirole (2004) and Hogan (2005).
See Centolella and Ott (2009) and Midwest ISO (2006).
Note that some sectors of industry, such as mining, place an extremely high value on lost load, exceeding
$50,000/MWh, see Midwest ISO (2006). However, a system-wide estimate of average VOLL does not
need to include the full VOLL of these customers if they exceed the cost of private investments in back-up
generation.
Note that if there actually were sufficient levels of demand response and interruptibility in the market, the
outcome during a scarcity event would be much more efficient because customers would self-select
reductions from low-value uses of power. Under involuntary curtailments, high and low value
applications for power are indiscriminately interrupted.
See Hogan (2005) and Newell, et al. (2010), Section IV.A.4.
markets, resulting in missing money relative to what is needed to attract and retain sufficient
capacity to meet reliability targets.11 In a market design with administrative capacity payments
as shown in Table 1, the system operator makes direct payments to suppliers or signs PPAs with
suppliers of capacity. The system administrator then recovers the costs associated with these
capacity payments via an uplift charge assessed to customers.12
There has been great variation in the determination of administrative capacity payments and the
designation of eligible suppliers. The most widely-used capacity payment design is similar to
the one first implemented in Chile in 1982.13 This was an availability-based compensation
mechanism under which any supplier bidding into the energy market would receive a capacity
payment whether or not the unit was dispatched. These capacity payments would be set such
that, over the course of the year, they would cover the annual investment costs of a peaking unit
as long as the plant demonstrated sufficient availability during months of peak demand or
capacity shortage.14
The major criticism of capacity payment systems is that they rely on administrative judgment
rather than market forces.15 In a capacity payment system, the system administrator is
extensively involved in determining the size of the payments that will be made and the type of
capacity resources that would be eligible. However, the quantity that will be supplied in
response of such payments can remain uncertain, which can lead to excess capacity or reliability
levels that remain below targets despite the administrative payments.
Maintaining target levels of resource adequacy by making administratively-set capacity
payments available only to new resources is sometimes viewed as a more cost-effective
solution than providing capacity payments to all resources. However, attempts to limit payments
only to new resources, while implemented in some places such as Spain, will not likely result in
lower costs in the long run, particularly in cases where re-investing in existing facilities would
have been lower in cost than building new facilities. Such an approach also generally risks
higher long-term costs because capacity payments are generally not made available to low-cost
capacity supply from demand-side resources, capacity uprates, or postponed retirements.
Finally, the cost of these payments is not generally reflected in market prices during peak load
conditions, which means that efficient levels of demand-response cannot be achieved even in the
absence of other barriers to demand-response.
11
12
13
14
15
For additional discussion and explanation of the meaning of missing money and how baseload,
intermediate, and peaking capacity is affected, see Hogan (2005), pp. 2-7.
See Adib, et al. (2008), pp. 336-337.
See Batlle (2007), p. 4547; Larsen (2004); Rudnick (2002).
In Chile, the peak demand months are May-September; in Colombia, the payments are made during the
dry season of December-April when hydro capacity is limited, see p. 161, Rudnick (2002). Sometimes the
capacity payments are differentiated depending on the type of resource, for example, in order to incent
investments in thermal capacity after a period of drought and associated electric shortages, Colombia
introduced increased capacity payments for thermal units. However, the units would have to make at least
some energy margins to be profitable overall, see Larsen, (2004).
For example, both the South Korean and Colombian systems have been criticized for lack of transparency
and predictability. See Park (2007), pp. 5821-22; Larsen, et al. (2004), p. 1772.
16
17
18
Member utilities in SPP are mandated to fulfill the 12% capacity margin. The RTO oversees but does not
enforce this provision, with overall resource adequacy and enforcement handled by state regulators. See
NERC (2008), p. 222; SPP (2009), pp. 2.2-2.4.
See Midwest ISO (2009).
See PJM (2009); NYISO (2009).
reliability. In the 1990s, Alberta began a deregulation initiative to create competition in the
electric sector. In 1996, Alberta introduced a power pool, creating the wholesale energy market,
and over 1998-2001 Alberta deregulated its electric generation fleet.19 With these reforms,
Alberta transitioned to an energy-only market in which new generation investments would not be
mandated by regulators but rather would be attracted by market incentives. After the first few
years of experience with the energy-only market, the Alberta Department of Energy initiated a
market design review to determine whether major market modifications were required for longterm adequacy, including the option of imposing adequacy obligations on retail suppliers. The
review concluded that such a redesign was not necessary at the time, noting that the market had
attracted more than 3,500 MW of competitive new generation between 1998 and 2005.20
However, the review did recommend an initiative toward the long-term adequacy (LTA) rules.
Albertas energy-only market design is implemented along with a set of ancillary services
markets including operating reserves to ensure sufficient operating flexibility. The energy and
ancillary markets are also accompanied by a dispatch down service (DDS) settlement
mechanism to mitigate against energy price distortions from out-of-market transmission must run
(TMR) dispatch. Like other energy-only markets such as those in Great Britain, Scandinavia,
Texas, and Australia, Albertas electricity market design does not offer capacity payments and
does not have a mandated resource adequacy requirement.
Also similarly to other market designs, Alberta has out-of-market backstop mechanisms for
providing reliability when in-market signals have failed to provide sufficient supply for
reliability. One backstop mechanism is the option to sign TMR contracts with generation units
that are needed for locational resource adequacy or voltage stability although they are
uneconomic to operate as market-based assets. The LTA rule sets out another set of backstop
mechanisms that may be implemented if the two-year supply outlook appears insufficient to
maintain a reliability threshold. In this case AESO can engage in out-of-market reliability
contracts for load shedding, back-up generation, or the temporary installation of emergency
portable generation.21 The need to rely on out-of-market backstop reliability contracts such as
these could be a strong indicator of problems in the market design, which may not be providing
sufficient price signals for supply investments. Out-of-market reliability contracts can also add
to the reliability problem by suppressing market prices during periods of scarce supply, unless
they are managed carefully.
Like other energy-only markets, Alberta takes a carefully restrained approach to mitigation of
market power, allowing energy prices to spike sufficiently in response scarcity events to attract
and retain generation and demand response investments.22 This differs from the more heavyhanded price mitigation in U.S. and other electricity markets with resource adequacy standards,
which mitigate energy market prices to much lower levels but supplement suppliers cost
recovery with a capacity market or capacity payments.
19
20
21
22
10
However, Albertas energy-only market design and market fundamentals also differ from other
energy-only markets in a number of respects. Albertas market price limits are more restrictive
than in other markets, with a price floor at zero and a $1,000/MWh price cap that is far below
reasonable estimates of VOLL.23 The relatively low price cap along with a high load factor and
other features likely combine to limit the potential for demand response (DR), which may only
choose to respond at much higher energy prices.24 Albertas centralized market is an ex-post real
time market, with no day-ahead market, hour-ahead market, or centralized generation unit
commitment.
Importantly, Alberta is a relatively small market which naturally limits the number of market
participants and the extent to which competitive locational submarkets could be maintained. The
Alberta energy-only market is also surrounded by non-market-based regions with resource
adequacy requirements, which creates some unusual challenges at the market seams. Finally,
provincial regulations, the upcoming expiration of power purchase arrangements (PPA), and
high dependence on coal under a potential federal coal retirement mandate all create challenges
unique to Alberta. These unique factors also limit the extent to which experience in other
markets can be directly applied in our analysis.
III. LONG-TERM SYSTEM ADEQUACY CHALLENGES FACED IN ALBERTA
Like other electric markets around the world, Alberta faces a series of challenges to resource
adequacy over the coming decades. Existing generators will face retirement pressures from a
number of directions, including the potential federal coal retirement mandate, Albertas carbon
and air quality emissions standards, the expiration of PPAs for most of the coal generation fleet,
and reduced operating margins caused by low electric prices. Low electric prices are driven by
the economic turndown, low natural gas prices, the growth of wind power, and the potential
expansion of interties with neighboring power markets where generators do not need to rely only
on energy market revenues to recover investment costs. In particular, the growth of wind power
and increased intertie capacity may reduce energy prices without substantially contributing to
dependable capacity available for resource adequacy. We describe each of these challenges here,
document the scale of impact that these challenges may have on the Alberta market, and discuss
the potential resource adequacy implications.
A. L OW N ATURAL G AS AND E LECTRIC P RICES
The price of natural gas directly impacts the production cost and offer prices of gas generators in
the wholesale electricity market. Because natural gas generators are the price-setting suppliers in
many hours, the price of natural gas also has a strong impact on the market clearing price for
23
24
For example, Australias NEM currently has a price floor of -$1001/MWh (-$1000 AUD/MWh) and a
price cap at their estimated VOLL of $12,512/MWh ($12,500 AUD/MWh). See AEMC (2010).
Exchange rate of 1.0009 CAD/AUD is the December, 2010 monthly average exchange rate from FRB
(2011).
For a comprehensive review of these issues, see our review of market design for DR in AESO,
Pfeifenberger and Hajos (2011).
11
electric energy.25 The close relationship between natural gas and electricity prices can be seen in
Figure 1. The figure shows historic spot and futures prices for gas at Alberta Energy Company
(AECO) C Hub, along with the AESO electricity prices over the same period. While the
relationship is not one-for-one, the impact of natural gas prices on electric energy prices can be
seen clearly during several periods of high gas prices, including early 2003, late 2005, and early
2008.26
Figure 1
Monthly Electric and Gas Prices in Alberta
$200
Historic Future
Gas
$12
$180
Electric
(Left Axis)
(Right Axis)
$160
$10
$140
$120
$8
$100
$6
$80
$60
$4
$14
$40
$2
$20
$0
Jan-16
Jan-15
Jan-14
Jan-13
Jan-12
Jan-11
Jan-10
Jan-09
Jan-08
Jan-07
Jan-06
Jan-05
Jan-04
Jan-03
Jan-02
Jan-01
Jan-00
$0
More recently, the combination of economic downturn and rapid increases in shale gas
production have resulted in lower prices for natural gas and electricity.27 AECO C Hub prices
dropped to $3.82/GJ in 2009-10 from an average of $6.14/GJ for 2003 through 2008. Coincident
with this drop in natural gas prices, electric prices have also dropped to $50.86/MWh for 20092010 from an average of $70.83/MWh for 2003 through 2008. Given the changed fundamentals
of the natural gas industry due to shale gas developments, these low gas prices are expected to
25
26
27
For example, in 2009, gas and cogen units submitted price-setting bids in 40% of hours while coal units
submitted price-setting bids in 60% of all hours. Note that this means that gas-based generators have a
disproportionately large impact on the average price. See AESO (2010e), p. 6.
Note however, that gas prices are not the only or necessarily the dominant reason for many of the observed
variations in electric prices. For example, the Alberta energy price spike in May 2010 was caused by
transmission outages. Note also that while monthly energy and gas prices have a relatively strong
correlation, hourly energy prices have a relatively weaker relationship to gas prices, with most of the
volatility explained by short-term fluctuations in supply and demand.
See, for example, Saur and Wallace (2011).
12
continue for the foreseeable future, as also indicated by the futures market for gas for the next
several years. AECO C gas prices will make only a modest recovery to approximately $4.90/GJ
by 2015 as shown in Figure 1.
These low gas and electric prices have already greatly reduced the operating margins of existing
and potential new generators as discussed in Section V.A.6. The impact is particularly
pronounced for baseload coal generators that have low operating costs but high fixed costs.
These generators require higher operating margins to cover the capital costs of new coal units
and fixed costs of existing baseload coal units. Given the additional environmental challenges
that coal generators face, and associated environmental upgrades that may be required to keep
existing units operating, these low energy margins may not only deter new entry but also force
some existing units to retire early. The likely impact that these low gas and electric prices have
had on existing coal generators in Alberta are discussed further in Section V.A.6.
B. E XPIRATION OF P OWER P URCHASE A RRANGEMENTS
As part of the transition to a competitive wholesale electricity market, 7,600 MW or
approximately 78% of the Alberta electric generating fleet were placed under PPAs in 2001.28
These PPAs were introduced to assure that generation assets built under the previous regulated,
rate-of-return regime would be able to recover their costs, while still allowing for a transition to a
competitive wholesale market. Under the terms of these PPAs, the original generation suppliers
retained ownership of the facilities but were provided with PPAs that ensured full cost recovery
through the remainder of the assets lifetime. The buyer of the PPA was obligated to make the
agreed-upon payments to the asset owner and, in return, gained the right to schedule sales and
collect revenues from the wholesale market.29 These PPAs expire over the 2003-2020 period.
Rights to 4,460 MW of PPAs covering thermal capacity were sold at a competitive auction in
August 2000, with auction proceeds returned to retail customers. An additional 2,350 MW of
thermal capacity failed to sell in the auction and 790 MW of hydroelectric capacity were not
placed in the auction.30 These unsold PPAs were transferred to the Balancing Pool, an entity
created by the Alberta government in 1998, which manages these assets as the PPA buyer and
returns any net revenues to retail customers in Alberta.31
A potential resource adequacy challenge is created by the possibility that a substantial proportion
of the units currently operating under PPAs may retire after the PPAs expire. For example, some
asset owners may be operating facilities that are recovering their fixed costs under the terms of
the PPA even though those units would not be economically viable without the PPA payments.
Additionally, asset owners need to make continuous investments into their facilities over time to
28
29
30
31
List of units originally under PPA and their MW ratings are from Appendix D, AESO (2006), AESO
(2010c), and Balancing Pool (2004), p. 9. Percentage is based on a total installed fleet of 9,400 MW in
2000 and a hydro derate to 67% of installed capacity value. List of units online in 2000 and MW ratings
from Ventyx (2010) and AESO (2010c).
See AESO (2006), pp. 12-13, 58-60.
List of units sold at auction and their MW ratings are from AESO (2006), Appendix D; AESO (2010c);
and Balancing Pool (2004), p. 9.
See Balancing Pool (2009), p. i.
13
maintain the assets and extend the operating lives of the plants beyond PPA termination. They
may, however, choose not to make these investments if they do not expect to be able to recoup
the costs once the PPAs expire. Finally, by December 31, 2018 asset owners need to determine
whether or not to decommission the facility within one year of PPA expiration to be eligible for
payment of decommissioning costs.32 The payment of these decommissioning costs may be a
major factor in the retirement decision for units with large environmental liabilities such as ash
or asbestos cleanup, particularly if these units would expect to operate only a few years beyond
PPA expiration in any case. For these reasons, the expiration of PPAs is an important factor to
consider when assessing long-term resource adequacy in the Alberta electricity market.
Figure 2 shows the historic and future PPA expiration dates and generating capacities by unit
type. The figure also shows the PPA capacity that has already retired. The experience to date
shows that generation retirement after PPA expiration is a possibility. In fact, among coal units
with already expired PPAs, 540 MW out of 680 MW have since retired, and among natural gasfired steam turbines (STs) all 840 MW have since retired.33 The figure shows some delayed
retirement dates for some of the capacity with expired PPAs in light green and light purple for
past years. However, several of these retirements may have been delayed not because they were
economically viable, but rather because they were awarded temporary (non-market-based) TMR
contracts by the AESO to avoid local reliability problems that would have been introduced by
their retirement.34 Finally, the figure also shows the potential early retirement and PPA
termination of the Sundance 1 and 2 units, which reportedly developed mechanical problems so
substantial that they may not be resolved to fulfill the PPA term.35
A key problem introduced by the scheduled PPA expirations is the fact that a large proportion of
them occur at the same time. Of the 5,400 MW of capacity currently still operating under PPAs,
4,300 MW of coal and 780 MW of hydro PPAs will expire on December 31, 2020.36 This large
quantity of simultaneous PPA expirations represents 41% of the currently-available generation
fleet, and may represent 28% of the fleet in 2020.37
Fortunately, the simultaneous retirement of all of these units after their PPAs expire in 2020 is
unlikely. As discussed further in Section V.A.6, these units generally earn sufficient returns in
32
33
34
35
36
37
Units that apply to the Alberta Utilities Commission (AUC) for retirement within one year of PPA
expiration are entitled to receive payments for any decommissioning costs unrecovered from the PPA or
from consumers prior to PPA commencement. See Balancing Pool (2009), pp. 39-40; Alberta
Government (2007b), Section 7; and Alberta Government (2003), Section 5.
Retirement dates from Ventyx (2010) and AESO (2010c).
For example, the Rainbow gas CTs and Rossdale gas STs received substantial non-market TMR contract
payments that may have contributed to their delayed retirement dates, AESO (2010c).
See TransAlta (2011).
Future PPA expiration dates from AESO (2010c). Current PPA capacity number is after the potential
early Sundance 1 and 2 retirement and PPA termination.
Dependable capacity value of hydro and wind units derated to 67% and 0% of installed capacity
respectively. Calculation is based on a current effective installed capacity of 11,730 MW and an estimated
2020 installed capacity of 17,440 assuming that future capacity will be large enough to meet projected
peak load and a 15% reserve margin. List of units online in 2010 and MW ratings from Ventyx (2010)
and AESO (2010c). The AESO projection of 2020/21 winter peak Alberta Internal Load is 15,162, see
AESO (2010a).
14
the energy market to cover their ongoing fixed costs even at relatively low market prices.
Therefore, unless faced with significant investment needs or near-term decommissioning costs,
most units will have sufficient economic incentive to continue operating beyond the PPA
expiration for the remainder of the economic life of the plant.
Figure 2
Historic and Future PPA Expirations by Unit Type
8
Historic
Future
Hydro
Gas CT
6
5
4
3
Coal
2
Sundance 1 & 2
Retire Prior to PPA Expiration
Gas ST
Gas ST (Now Retired)
2022
2021
2020
2019
2018
2017
2016
2015
2014
2013
2012
2011
2010
2009
2008
2007
2006
2005
2004
2003
2002
2001
2000
An additional challenge is that a substantial portion of these coal units likely will be forced into
retirement within a few years after 2020 regardless of the PPA expiration. These retirements will
be driven by a combination of factors discussed below, chiefly the pending federal coal
retirement mandate, large capital expenditures that might be required to life-extend an aging unit,
or capital investments that may be required for environmental upgrades. If these units would be
forced into retirement within a few years of PPA expiration, there is an increased risk that the
owners will opt to accelerate retirement by a few years in order to recover decommissioning
costs.38 For example, the federal coal retirement mandate would force 1,170 MW into retirement
over the 2020-25 period if enacted, which could lead to large simultaneous retirements if these
facilities were to accelerate retirement to recover decommissioning costs.
38
See Balancing Pool (2009), pp. 39-40; Alberta Government (2007b), Section 7.
15
Overall, these factors combine to introduce a substantial risk of a step change of an unusually
large number of retirements in 2020 and 2021. If these retirements were phased in on a more
gradual basis, it would be less challenging for market-based investments to replace the units
without introducing temporary reliability problems. A large step change in the number of
retirements may be too abrupt for the market to absorb without administrative intervention. The
number of retirements in 2020 thus should be monitored and the decommissioning cost rule
stipulated in the Power Purchase Arrangements Regulation may have to be reexamined and
relaxed to spread retirements over several years.39 The AESOs forward-looking supply
adequacy review, which summarizes suppliers announced retirement and online dates, will also
be a helpful mitigation factor. However, the AESO cannot modify announced retirements
without a resource adequacy requirement or market interventions.
C. A LBERTA AND F EDERAL C ARBON L EGISLATION
Both Alberta and the Canadian federal government have greenhouse gas (GHG) reduction
goals that could substantially affect plant retirement, resource adequacy, and the operation of the
energy-only market over the next 20 years. The Federal GHG reduction target is a 17%
reduction below 2005 levels by 2020. This compares to a less ambitious Alberta reduction target
of 21% above 2005 levels. Albertas major carbon policy initiatives are $2 billion in investments
in carbon capture and storage (CCS) technology and the Specified Gas Emitters Regulation.
Both of these efforts as well as the implications of the overall GHG strategy are discussed below.
Federal policy on GHG has yet to be codified, although the recently proposed strict carbon
emissions standard for coal would effectively require either a CCS retrofit or retirement, and
could significantly impact resource adequacy in Alberta as discussed in Subsection III.C.2.
1. Alberta Carbon Policy
The government of Alberta has a Climate Change Strategy for reducing GHG emissions in the
province as a whole, which will require large contributions from the electricity sector. The two
current initiatives that may have the largest impact on the wholesale electricity market are the
carbon capture and sequestration objectives and the Specified Gas Emitters Regulation
a. Alberta Climate Change Strategy
In January 2008, Alberta Environment published its climate change strategy, laying out a policy
framework for reducing GHG emissions in the province.40 The strategy sets a GHG reduction
target of 15% below a business-as-usual (BAU) case by 2020, and 50% below BAU by 2050.
This is equivalent to 21% above 2005 CO2-equivalent (CO2e) output levels in 2020 and 14%
below 2005 levels by 2050.41 Alberta Environments strategy includes a 139 MT CO2e
39
40
41
See Alberta Government (2007b), Section 7. Note that AESO does not have authority to revise the
decommissioning cost recovery rule, which may need to be reviewed by the Department of Energy and the
Alberta Utilities Commission.
See Alberta Environment (2008).
The unit for measuring GHG emissions used by the Alberta government and in this report is tonnes of
CO2e. Under this unit non-CO2 greenhouse gases are converted into the equivalent global warming
potential of CO2. For the electric sector, the non-CO2 emissions covered are methane (CH4) and nitrous
oxide (N2O), which typically contribute approximately 0.6% of the total CO2e emissions for coal
16
reduction (70% of total reductions) through CCS, a 37 MT reduction (19%) through greening
energy production, and a 24 MT reduction (12%) through conservation and energy efficiency as
shown in Figure 3.42,43
Figure 3
Alberta Climate Strategy GHG Reductions Plan
450
MegaTonnes of CO 2 e &
400
450
Business as Usual
400
350
350
50 MT
300
250
200
139 MT
200 MT
300
37 MT
250
24 MT
200
Alberta Plan
150
150
100
100
50
50
0
2005 2010
0
2020
2030
2040
2050
A large fraction of these emissions reductions will be achieved within the electric sector, which
accounted for 44.1% of Albertas registered GHG emissions as of 2008 as shown in Table 2,
although only approximately 21% of total emissions as shown in Figure 3.44 Table 2 shows that
the utilities sector contributes more registered emissions than any other sector.45 The high
42
43
44
45
generators and 1.0% for gas generators. Calculation based on emissions rates from Alberta Environment
(2010a).
Id., pp. 23-24. Year 2020 50 MT reduction was explicitly reported, but percentage numbers are estimated
from a graphic representation.
One MT is equivalent to one million tonnes or one megatonne.
Total Alberta 2008 emissions of approximately 243 MT from visual inspection of figure in Alberta
Environment (2008), pp. 23-24. Total reported and unreported 2008 electric sector emissions were
approximately 51.4 MT as explained in footnote 45.
While the utilities sector is almost totally comprised of electric generation plants, emissions from each
sector are not strictly separated in all cases. In particular for cogeneration units, the electric-related
emissions and industrial process emissions are generally reported together and may be included under
either utilities or under another industry such as oil sands mining or petroleum refining. See Alberta
Environment (2010a). In an independent calculation of the sector GHG emissions based on AESO data
and separating out the cogen emissions attributable to electricity generation, the electric sector emissions
17
registered proportion from electricity is partly because more than 99% of the GHG emissions in
the electricity sector are from large point sources emitting more than 100 kT/yr, while sources
from some other sectors, such as transportation, are from diffuse sources and therefore are not
covered under the current reporting rules.46 Including unregistered emissions, the electric sector
accounted for only approximately 21% of Albertas total GHG output in 2008 as shown in
Figure 3.
Table 2
Alberta Registered GHG Emissions by Sector, 2008
Sector
Number of
Total Sector Percent of
Reporting
Total
Emissions, kT
Facilities
Chemical Manufacturing
Coal Mining
Conventional Oil and Gas Extraction
Mineral Manufacturing
Oil Sands In Situ Extraction
Oil Sands Mining and Upgrading
Paper Manufacturing
Petroleum Refineries
Pipeline Transportation
Utilities
Waste Management
Total
15
3
29
6
13
5
4
3
4
26
1
10,270
497
6,845
2,403
10,927
23,848
478
3,862
2,797
48,903
90
9.3%
0.4%
6.2%
2.2%
9.9%
21.5%
0.4%
3.5%
2.5%
44.1%
0.1%
109
110,921
100%
Meeting these targets of 15% CO2e reductions below BAU by 2020 and 50% below BAU by
2050 will have a large impact on Albertas generation fleet and its energy-only market. Many of
the impacts can only be inferred, however, because the measures that will be enacted to meet
these goals have not yet been specified. Nevertheless, the most immediate impacts on Alberta
wholesale electricity prices and resource adequacy will come from the 2020 goals, toward which
the electric sector may have to contribute approximately 15 MT of reductions from CCS, 4 MT
from greening production, and 3 MT from efficiency.47 These reduction targets may have the
following impacts:
46
47
were approximately 51.4 MT in 2008, 51.0 MT of which were from units emitting more than 100 kT/yr.
This calculation would put electric sector emissions at 45.9% of all registered emissions in Alberta, AESO
(2010c).
One kT is equivalent to one thousand tonnes or one kilotonne. One MT or megatonne is equal to 1,000 kT
or one million tones.
Based on approximate BAU emissions estimate, see Footnote 42. Assumes that contributions toward CO2e
reductions by category are the same in 2020 as in 2050, or 35 MT CCS, 9 MT greening production, and 6
MT efficiency over all of Alberta. Electric sector reductions are assumed to be achieved in proportion to
18
48
49
the electric sectors share of registered GHG emissions, or 44.1% of the total as shown in Table 2. In
reality, the share of reductions required from the electric sector may be greater than from other sectors.
Percentages assume that efficiency gains in the electric sector will be proportional to its share of the
registered Alberta GHG emissions or 3 MT by 2020. From Table 2, the registered CO2e rate in the electric
sector was 48.9 MT in 2008 over 69,947 GWh of AIL from AESO (2010a). At this same emissions rate of
0.70 kT/GWh, a 3 MT reduction by 2020 would require a 4,291 GWh reduction in AIL by 2020 or 3.9%
of the current projection of 108,638 GWh.
Compound annual growth rates calculated from AESO projected Alberta Internal Load (AIL) energy of
72,459 GWh in 2010 to 113,652 GWh in 2020 and an alternative 2020 load reduced by 2%. AESO
(2010a).
19
Table 3
Large-Scale CCS Projects under Development in Alberta
Project
Description
Online Date
Generation Government
Capacity Awards, $M
2015
300 MW
2012
n/a
2015
n/a
$745 Alberta
$120 Federal
$436 Alberta
$343 Federal
Project Pioneer on Keephills 3 [4] Carbon capture retrofit to coal plant. 2011 Power Output
2015 Carbon Capture
450 MW
$285 Alberta
Annual CO2
Sequestration
1.3 MT
1.2 MT
1 MT
Two of these planned CCS projects are planned for new coal generation facilities with a total
capacity of 750 MW and an expected 2.3 MT of total annual CO2 sequestration. Once energy
consumption of the CCS equipment is accounted for, these projects may contribute
approximately 1.7 MT of net avoided CO2 or 11% of the 2020 GHG reduction target for the
electric sector.50 If the rate of avoided CO2 emissions can be improved on future projects to 81%
below the emissions rate of a new coal plant without CCS, then an additional 2,880 MW of CCSenabled coal generation may have to be built or retrofitted by 2020.51 Combined with the
projects currently under way, the potential 3,630 MW of CCS-enabled coal generation by 2020
compares to an existing coal fleet of approximately 5,780 MW as of 2010. This ambitious CCS
goal represents a massive build-out of capacity that will likely be too aggressive to achieve.
However, if this target is met, CCS-enabled coal will represent two thirds of the current coal fleet
50
51
A fraction of the CO2 sequestered is not counted toward net avoided CO2 emissions. Net avoided CO2
emissions are approximately 72%-76% of captured CO2 emissions for pulverized coal plants because CCS
technology consumes power itself, and therefore decreases the net plant capacity rating for power
deliverable to the grid. See IPCC (2005), Table 8.3a.
Calculation assumes that 15 MT of the 2020 CCS coal must be met in the electric sector, or a fraction
proportional to the currently registered emissions from the utilities sector, of which 1.7 MT will be met by
the two electric projects already funded as described in Table 3. Also assumes that 620 kg CO2/MWh can
be avoided and units would operate at 85% capacity factor. See IPCC (2005), Table 8.3a.
20
and about 21% of the entire Alberta generation fleet by 2020. For comparison, coal currently
accounts for 49% of the generation fleet.52
While this estimate of the required CCS-enabled coal generation is only a rough approximation
of the investment required to meet the Climate Strategy targets, it can be used to infer the scale
of impacts on the AESO electricity market. Large governmental investments in CCS-enabled
coal over the coming decade could boost resource adequacy in Alberta by supporting new
generation additions or possibly enabling the retrofit and refurbishment of coal units that
otherwise would be retired.
These CCS-enabled coal plants may also impact wholesale electricity market prices by operating
as must-run units to achieve high levels of CO2 sequestration. If operating as must-run
generation, they are likely to bid into the wholesale energy market at or near zero, thereby
tending to suppress market prices. During peak hours, this price suppression may not be a
problem, especially if peak prices are allowed to rise to levels that can support new entry.
During off-peak hours, however, this addition of must-run units could potentially increase the
frequency of surplus supply conditions. At these times, wholesale electricity prices can drop to
zero and must-run units will operate at a loss because they are unable to reduce output without
incurring even larger shutdown-related costs. During some low-load conditions, the AESO must
force these units to ramp down or shut down to maintain system stability, regardless of additional
costs. Note that the efficient market price during such events would be negative because
generators would rather pay some amount (up to their shut-down-related costs) than be forced to
reduce output further, as discussed further in Section III.D. The economics of must-run coal,
cogeneration and, increasingly, wind generation already result in occasional surplus supply
conditions. Due to the low dispatch flexibility of CCS plants, the frequency and severity of these
conditions could increase as CCS generation expands.53
c. Specified Gas Emitters Regulation
Albertas Specified Gas Emitters Regulation went into effect July 1, 2007, requiring emissions
reductions from all Alberta facilities outputting more than 100 kT of CO2e annually.54 These
facilities were assigned a GHG emissions intensity reduction target of 12% below their baseline
output established over 2003-2005.55 For electric generators, this target is a requirement to
reduce the quantity of CO2e emitted per MWh produced. In order to comply with the regulation,
facilities have four options:
Improve the efficiency of operations to reduce per-unit output by 12%,
52
53
54
55
Year 2020 percentage assumes installed capacity will be equal to projected Alberta Internal Load of
15,160 MW plus a 15% reserve margin; current effective installed capacity is 11,730 MW assuming that
hydro dependable capacity is 67% of installed capacity and wind dependable capacity is 0%. From AESO
(2010a), AESO (2010c).
For a full analysis of minimum generation conditions in AESO, see AESO (2010b).
See Alberta Government (2007a), pp. 5-7.
A new units baseline is determined from the 3rd year of operations, with the efficiency requirement
ramped up to the full 12% by the 9th year of operations. See Alberta Government (2007a), pp. 7, 17.
21
Figure 4
Alberta GHG Specified Gas Emitters Regulation Compliance by Category
12
10
8
6
Alberta Offsets
4
Performance Credits
Operational Improvements
0
2007
(half year)
2008
2009
These compliance requirements put a cost burden on large GHG emitters participating in the
Alberta market. As of 2009, there were approximately 4,090 MW of natural gas and 6,060 MW
of coal plants subject to this regulation, representing 85% of Albertas generation fleet.57
56
57
22
Covered suppliers are likely to pass these increased production costs through to the wholesale
electricity market in the form of increased offer prices to the extent that their offer prices are
based on their marginal production cost rather than strategic bidding.
To scale the total impact that this regulatory requirement may have on the market, we can
examine a case in which suppliers meet their entire regulated efficiency reduction through
$15/tonne CO2e payments. Table 4 shows the approximate impact that paying full price for
these emissions would have on the production cost for gas and coal units. As the table shows, if
the full $15/tonne compliance cost is paid, then this regulation increases production costs by
approximately 2% for natural gas-fired combustion turbine (CT) and combined cycle (CC)
plants, and by approximately 13% for coal plants.
Table 4
Approximate Production Cost Impact of Alberta CO2 Emissions Regulation
Gas CC
Gas CT
Coal
Assumptions
Fuel Cost, $/GJ
Heat Rate, GJ/MWh
GHG Rate, kg/GJ
CO2e Cost, $/tonne
Fraction of CO2e Output Charged
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
6
7.7
56.6
$15
12%
6
13.2
56.6
$15
12%
1
10.4
103.1
$15
12%
Costs, $/MWh
Fuel
VOM
CO2e
[6]
[7]
[8]
$46.29
$2.22
$0.79
$79.43
$3.84
$1.35
$10.37
$4.93
$1.92
[9]
$48.50
$83.26
$15.30
[10]
$49.29
$84.61
$17.22
[11]
1.6%
1.6%
12.6%
Because the payments apply to only 12% of total plant output, the increase in production costs
associated with this regulatory requirement is quite small, amounting to approximately
$0.80/MWh to $1.90/MWh. The cost impact on natural gas plants is comparable to the impact
of a 2% increase in natural gas prices, a minor impact compared to the daily and monthly
23
volatility of gas prices.58 Given the small scale of this impact, it appears that the Specified Gas
Emitters Regulation is unlikely to substantially impact retirements or resource adequacy. The
cost of emitting CO2e and the portion of the sectors output that is covered by the regulation
would have to be increased substantially before the regulation would have a material impact on
the economics of existing units or the wholesale electricity market.
2. Federal Carbon Policy
Federal GHG reduction goals are substantially more ambitious than Albertas. The Canadian
federal government has committed to reducing GHG output to 17% below 2005 levels by 2020,
compared to the Alberta goal of 21% above 2005 levels by 2020.59 The federal government
announced this regulatory framework for GHG emissions reductions in 2007, but the framework
has not been translated into binding regulation in time to meet the original 2010 reductions goals.
Although the Alberta regulation discussed in Section III.C.1.c remains the only binding GHG
regulation currently affecting Alberta, the more ambitious federal commitment highlights the
possibility of substantial federal mandates.
A federal policy that would have a large impact on Alberta is the coal generation performance
standard proposed by the Minister of the Environment on June 23, 2010, for which draft
regulations may be published in spring 2011.60 The proposed regulation would effectively phase
out all coal generation in Canada without CCS. The proposal would require coal plants to meet a
strict performance standard based on CCS technology, or else retire after the later of its 45th
operating year or PPA expiration. In order to build new coal plants or extend the lives of
existing coal plants, operators would have to meet a GHG emissions performance standard of
approximately 360 to 420 kg of CO2e/MWh, putting it in the range of the emissions rate of a
natural gas-fired CC or a CCS-enabled coal unit with an overall 50% rate of net avoided CO2e.61
The entire Alberta coal fleet would be affected by this regulation, but the impact would be
phased in over the next twenty years, as shown in Figure 5. The figure shows Alberta coal
capacity that would be subject to retirement under the regulation. These retirements add up to an
overall retirement rate of approximately 210 MW per year starting in 2015. This is 1.5 times the
retirement rate observed in Alberta over the past decade.62 The retirements driven by this
58
59
60
61
62
For example, in 2009 daily AECO C gas prices had a standard deviation of 26% of the average annual
value, while monthly gas prices had a standard deviation of 25% of the average. Bloomberg (2010).
See Environment Canada (2010a).
See Environment Canada (2010a-b).
Note that the total rate of avoided CO2e is lower than the rate of captured CO2e because of the efficiency
losses associated with CCS. For comparison, the emissions rate of a typical gas CCs is approximately 344
to 379 kg/MWh and the emission rate for a new coal unit without CCS is approximately 736 to 811
kg/MWh. See IPCC (2005), Table 8.1.
Over 2001 through 2010, the annual retirement rate in AESO has been approximately 150 MW per year.
AESO (2010c). Note that these numbers are different from those reported on page 2. Page 2 reports the
total retirements over 2011-29 projected by AESO in their long-term planning activities, including
Sundance 1 and 2 and some adjustments to assumed retirements timing as informed by factors other than
just the federal coal mandate. The numbers here cover a shorter time span, exclude Sundance 1 and 2, and
include only retirements that would be driven by the federal coal mandate over 2015-29.
24
potential federal mandate, along with retirements that may occur for other reasons, would
noticeably increase the rate of new plant additions required to maintain resource adequacy.
Figure 5
Alberta Coal Units Subject to Proposed Federal Coal CO2 Emissions Standard
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
Sundance 1 & 2
Retire Prior to Mandate
0.5
2029
2028
2027
2026
2025
2024
2023
2022
2021
2020
2019
2018
2017
2016
2015
2014
2013
2012
2011
2010
63
64
25
after the 60th operating year for gas peaking units.65 The allowed emissions rates are set based
on a determination of the best available technology economically achievable (BATEA), which
may improve over time and will therefore result in more strict emissions standards over time.
These emissions standards somewhat increase the costs of building new units by requiring that
new generators have pollution controls. For aging units past their design life, these standards are
likely to require a retrofit installation of emissions controls for the unit to continue operating.
For many units, the costs associated with these upgrades may be too high relative to potential
going-forward operating margins to remain viable. For this reason, these control standards could
force some aging units to retire before these controls would need to be installed.
Figure 6 shows the timeline over which the existing AESO coal and gas fleet will be subjected to
these SO2, NOx, and PM standards. This 50-year coal retirement timeline corresponds to a 5year delay relative to when the federal coal retirement mandate would force coal plants to retire.
For this reason, if the federal coal mandate is enacted, the Alberta air quality standard will have
no incremental effect on coal retirements or resource adequacy. In either case, the standard will
have an incremental impact on natural gas units past their 40th operating year or past the 60th
operating year for peaking units. Overall, these standards could force 1,630 MW of coal and 460
MW of natural gas plant retirements by 2029.66 While the quantity of capacity affected is large,
the resource adequacy impact is likely to be very limited because of the gradual timeline and the
imposition of standards only on older units that are already past their design life.
Albertas Mercury Emissions from Coal-Fired Power Plants Regulation is an additional
emissions standard based on output levels under BATEA.67 However, the mercury standard is
imposed on all existing generators at the same time regardless of the unit age. In order to
comply with the mercury standard, coal generators had to meet the following requirements by
the first of the year:
Continuous monitoring equipment installed by January 1, 2010
70% mercury capture by January 1, 2011
80% mercury capture by January 1, 2013
The mercury standard was implemented with some flexibility that allowed some older units to
avoid installing mercury controls as long as they committed to retiring by unit-specific deadlines
over the 2012-17 timeframe.68 Of these, Sundance 1 and 2 may already be considered retired for
unrelated reasons, but all other coal facilities in Alberta will meet the mercury standard.69 The
recent CASA review contained recommendations for increasing flexibility in meeting the
requirement by allowing credits for early reductions that could later be used at the same facility
65
66
67
68
69
Peaking units are regulated based on an annual total emissions limit that assumes approximately 1500 MW
of operation per year, see CASA (2010), Sections 3 and 6; Alberta Environment (2005).
Note that Sundance 1 and 2 are excluded from this total as they may have already retired, pending
determination of whether repowering will occur.
See Alberta Government (2006).
Specifically, HR Milner would have had to retire by 2012, Battle River 3 and 4 by 2015, and Sundance 1
and 2 by 2017. See Alberta Government (2006), p. 4.
Confirmed via personal communication with Alberta Environment staff director of the mercury program.
Note that Sundance 1 and 2 will retire early in advance of the air quality mandate because of unrelated
large investment costs that would be required for continued operation. See TransAlta (2011).
26
if it had equipment problems.70 Overall, it appears that the mercury standard has been
successfully implemented without imposing any resource adequacy concerns and even without
imposing any incremental retirements.
Figure 6
Capacity Subject to Provincial Air Quality Emissions Standards
3.0
Gas Peakers
Gas
2.5
(Non-Peakers)
2.0
Coal
1.5
1.0
0.5
Sundance 1 & 2
Retire Prior to Air
Quality Mandate
2029
2028
2027
2026
2025
2024
2023
2022
2021
2020
2019
2018
2017
2016
2015
2014
2013
2012
2011
2010
70
Assuming the recommendations are adopted, 50% of the early reductions above 75% capture would earn a
credit starting 2011, while 50% of reductions above 80% would earn a credit starting 2013. These credits
could not be used to delay controls upgrades or transferred to other facilities, but they could be used to
offset excess emissions caused by maintenance or operational issues. All credits would expire by the end
of 2015. See CASA (2010), p. 4.
27
certificates to allow utilities in California to meet the states ambitious renewable energy
standards.71
Figure 7
Historic and Potential Future Wind Capacity Growth
2.5
Historic Projected
2.0
Proposed Additions
1.5
1.0
Permitted Additions
Under Construction
0.5
Historic Additions
Winter 2000/01 Capacity
2017
2016
2015
2014
2013
2012
2011
2010
2009
2008
2007
2006
2005
2004
2003
2002
2001
2000
0.0
Large wind penetration levels can introduce a variety of operational challenges as the system
operator must develop wind forecasting capability and operate the power grid with a highly
intermittent generation resource. The risk of sudden drop-off in wind output increases the need
for additional operating reserves. Unexpectedly high wind output during low load periods can
also create operational challenges by creating minimum generation conditions in which market
prices are zero, baseload generators are operating at minimum output, and the system operator
must order further involuntary generation reductions or shutdowns. These operational challenges
are the subject of ongoing market design effort by AESO and stakeholders to address increasing
wind penetration in the near term and longer term.72
High levels of wind generation can also introduce long-term resource adequacy challenges. Due
to intermittent output levels, wind resources have very little capacity value during peak load
conditions. Albertas capacity factor during peak times is higher than in many other systems,
simply because Albertas peak load and highest wind season both occur in winter. In fact, the
wind capacity factor is about 41% over November-January, which is much higher than the
71
72
28
approximate 29% annual capacity factor..73 However, this capacity factor substantially
overstates the capacity value of wind, because wind is not firm supply and will be unavailable
periodically despite relatively high average monthly output. For example, Midwest ISO studies
have shown that only 8% of a wind turbines nameplate capacity can be reliably counted toward
the overall system installed capacity although the wind fleet has a 27% average capacity factor.74
While not contributing substantially to system adequacy, wind generation does have a large
impact on the energy market because it enters the supply stack at zero (or even negative)
marginal cost. These negative marginal costs can arise if suppressing power output during high
wind conditions causes lost revenues from renewable energy credits (RECs) or if it imposes
additional O&M costs to slow turbine speeds. Wind generation consequently tends to depress
average energy prices and reduce the net revenues received by other generators, making them
more likely to retire and potentially making it less likely that new resources are built. Figure 8
shows the short-term price impact of wind output fluctuations, by separately showing the price
duration curves for high-wind and low-wind hours during 2008-10. The figure shows that lowwind hours with less than 100 MW of wind output had an average price of $77/MWh, while
high-wind hours with more than 400 MW of wind had an average price of $42/MWh. However,
this does not mean that 300 MW of wind can suppress average prices by more than $30/MWh,
because the analysis does not control for factors such as natural gas price changes, time of day,
or the difference between forecasted and realized wind output. Nevertheless, the figure
highlights the importance of monitoring and further analyzing the potential price-suppressing
effects of additional wind investments.
The lower energy prices during high wind events do not mean that energy market prices will
need to be artificially propped up or otherwise revised. In fact, low or even negative hourly
prices during high wind hours correctly represent the short-run marginal cost of supply at those
times, which is the efficient energy price signal at these specific instances in time. In fact,
negative prices would enhance market efficiency by creating an additional incentive for wind
and other suppliers to ramp down or for load to ramp up during high wind events, making
flexibility more valuable. While some market participants may fear that negative prices will
undermine overall incentives for conventional generation investment, we believe that this will
not be the case as long as ancillary services requirements and operational requirements on wind
suppliers are carefully designed. The overall market impact of increased wind integration should
be to increase the value of flexible generation and demand response relative to inflexible
generation.
The immediate-term effect of wind generation-related price suppression may be to replace more
traditional resources that have high capacity value with wind resources that have very little
capacity value, reducing the system reserve margin. The lower system reserve margin, however,
would increase price spikes in response to low-wind conditions. This will tend to increase
average prices and price volatility, but will also prevent further deterioration of reserve margins
by making it more attractive to build flexible generating resources that can take advantage of the
higher prices and price volatility.
73
74
Calculated from hourly wind data and wind installed capacity data from AESO (2010c).
See Midwest ISO (2009), pp. 3, 13.
29
Figure 8
Price Duration Curve at Different Levels of Wind Output
$500
$450
$400
$350
$300
$250
$200
Higher Prices
Wind < 100 MW
$150
$100
All Hours
$50
Lower Prices
Wind > 400 MW
100%
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
10%
0%
$0
Finally, increased wind generation will also increase the need for operating reserves. If
additional reserves requirements are instituted, flexible resources will become, again, more
valuable because of their ability to provide operating reserves. The Alberta generation fleet may
also have some additions from less flexible, new baseload generation sources, such as new
cogeneration for the oil sands industry and coal plants fitted with CCS. This means even if
resource adequacy can be maintained, the added wind generation may create system operations
challenges. This added challenge will require continued close attention to current market design
efforts to facilitate the integration of additional wind resources.75
The quantity of reserves that are currently required are somewhat variable, but the average level
of operating reserves scheduled over 2009 is shown in Table 5. The table also shows the total
fleet capability for supplying operating reserves of each type, based on AESOs qualified
provider list. Note that the total capability for reserves is less than the sum of the capability for
each individual type of reserves because suppliers cannot supply their maximum capability for
more than one type of reserves at a time. Overall, the fleet capability is 6 times the currently
75
30
required level of regulating reserves, 9 times the required spinning reserves, 12 times the
required supplemental reserves, and 4 times the total simultaneously required reserves.
Table 5
Operating Reserves Need and Fleet-Wide Capability
Average Scheduled in 2009
Active
Standby
Total
MW
MW
MW
Fleet-Wide
Capability
MW
Regulating
Spinning
Supplemental
160
243
243
131
106
37
290
350
280
1,785
3,148
3,502
Total
646
274
920
3,780
AESO has examined the potential for mitigating wind variability by increasing regulating
reserves capability, among other options. In a year 2020 scenario with 4,000 MW of installed
wind capacity, the AESO analysis found that an additional 300 MW of regulating reserves could
mitigate approximately half of the Area Control Error (ACE) events, although 2,000 MW of
regulating reserves would be required to resolve 98% of the events.76 An increase in regulating
reserves of this magnitude would be difficult to achieve, since it is higher than the currently
installed capability. However, it is likely within a potential feasible range by the time overall
growth in the generation fleet by 2020 is accounted for. Further, it is likely that much of the
difficulty with wind variability can be mitigated with other options that AESO is considering
including acquiring additional operating reserves from demand response and placing additional
requirements on wind generators.
Finally, if AESO increases reserves requirements, market prices for reserves are also likely to
increase and help attract incremental reserves. If resources that can provide operating reserves
become scarce relative to increasing demand for such reserves, then prices for reserves will tend
to rise relative to the price of energy. This should support the entry by resources that can provide
operating reserves beyond what is reported in Table 5 High reserves prices could even attract
additional reserves supply from the existing fleet as some suppliers may choose to invest in
upgrading their reserves capability, for example, by adding active generation controls (AGC) that
would allow them to supply regulation.
The total system capability for supplying operating reserves can also be increased through the
integration of demand-side resources. This could be achieved through market designs that
reduce barriers that limit the participation by demand-side resource in energy markets and
operating reserves.77
76
77
31
78
79
80
81
82
83
32
priced locations. Because Alberta is typically an exporter at night and an importer during the
day, expanded interconnections may increase off-peak prices while decreasing on-peak prices.84
The combined impact from both effects is likely to be a suppression of Alberta prices overall,
given that Alberta prices are higher on average than are those of its neighbors as shown in Figure
9. Part of the reason for the lower energy prices in neighboring markets is that these other
markets are cost-of-service regulated, meaning that suppliers recover the capacity costs of their
generation through regulated retail rates or through public ownership as in British Columbia
rather than solely through wholesale market prices for energy. Other more distant markets, such
as California, have resource adequacy requirements that allow suppliers to earn capacity
payments through a bilateral market to supplement their energy market revenues.85 As a
consequence, the energy prices of neighboring regions typically reflect only short-term
generation dispatch costs without sufficient contributions to recover investment costs. This is in
contrast to AESO, where suppliers need to recover their investment costs through the wholesale
energy and ancillary service markets.86
Price suppression in Albertas energy-only market through expanded interties is likely to be
magnified by an increase in imports from zero-marginal-cost technologies, such as new wind
generation. For example, the MATL developer has predicted that adding the new transmission
line will allow for the development of a large wind farm at its source in Montana.87 Similarly,
increased intertie capacity with BC Hydro will interconnect Alberta more heavily with a market
that is planned to become a large exporter of green power, likely from wind and hydro, which
could further depress Alberta energy prices because of lower energy prices in British
Columbia.88
These low-marginal-cost imports would directly benefit Alberta customers in the near term.
However, in the long term, the price suppression would reduce the profitability of generation
resources in Alberta, which would make it less likely that new resources would be built while
increasing the likelihood that existing generators would retire prematurely. These impacts could
tend to reduce the reserve margin within Alberta and make the system more dependent on the
interties for resource adequacy.
84
85
86
87
88
33
Figure 9
Monthly On-Peak Energy Prices in Alberta, Northern California, and Mid-Columbia
While expanded interconnections increase the capability for importing power, they do not
guarantee that external supplies will be available for import when they are needed most. This is
because generators in neighboring markets tend to be obligated to supply their local customers
during peak load conditions. If such peak load or emergency conditions occur simultaneously in
Alberta and neighboring markets, Alberta will not be able to import the needed supplies no
matter how much intertie capacity is available and no matter how high the AESO price. It also
means that the resource adequacy value of the increased interties is limited to a probabilistic
value that depends on the extent to which neighboring markets are over-built beyond their own
resource adequacy requirements and the extent to which those markets experience system peak
conditions at times different from Alberta.
In addition, shortage conditions in neighboring markets can introduce supply shortages in
Alberta. Because Alberta generators do not have the obligation to serve Alberta load, they have
the option to export power to neighboring systems even during peak conditions and would
rationally choose to do so any time external power prices are higher.89 The converse is not true,
however. Because generators in neighboring markets will typically not be able to sell power into
89
This impact applies to peak conditions only prior to the initiation of emergency procedures, as AESO will
intervene to curtail exports to zero during peak load conditions. See AESO (2010f).
34
Alberta during emergencies, this means that neighboring markets are largely insulated from any
resource adequacy challenges in Alberta.90
The scale of the impact that shortages in external markets may have on Alberta can be gauged to
some extent by examining the level of correlation that already exists between prices in Alberta
and those in neighboring markets. Figure 9 shows electricity prices in Alberta compared with
electricity prices in Northern California and Mid-Columbia in Washington, the two closest liquid
power trading hubs with transparent market prices. While the figure shows a strong correlation
among the electric prices in the three locations, this is somewhat misleading since a significant
portion of the common price movements starting in 2001 have been driven by changes in the
regional price for natural gas.91
The extreme high prices in the year 2000 affecting all three locations were caused by the
California power crisis.92 These extreme price conditions during 2000 were driven partly by
tight supply conditions and partly by market power abuses. The market power abuses have been
the subject of substantial litigation, investigation, and damages settlements before the Federal
Energy Regulatory Commission (FERC) in the United States, and also have been investigated
for their impact on Alberta by the Market Surveillance Administrator (MSA).93 The
experience does highlight the point that real and even manipulated shortages in neighboring
markets can substantially impact Alberta. Expanding interconnections will further increase
AESOs exposure to the market fundamentals and potential shortages in neighboring markets in
the future. At the same time, as Figure 9 also shows, the price spikes that occurred in the Alberta
energy market since 2006, with proximate causes often related to short-term supply adequacy
problems, had virtually no impact on the market prices in these neighboring regions.
These factors mean that the expansion of interconnections with neighboring markets will require
the AESO to increase the extent to which it monitors for potential shortage conditions, including
assigning a realistically low capacity value to total import capability. It also means that the
AESO should maintain its procedures for limiting exports during scarcity conditions, and not
introduce firm export transmission service without careful consideration of the potential resource
adequacy consequences.94
90
91
92
93
94
If Alberta had the potential to become a large net exporter of power, then increased interties would have
the potential to increase reliability in Alberta by incenting generation build-out in excess of supply needs
to meet export demand. This scenario would only materialize if Alberta had structural potential for lowercost energy market prices over the long run, even after accounting for the capital cost recovery required
through Albertas energy market (compared to Albertas neighbors which award cost recovery outside the
energy market).
Excluding the year 2000, the R2 values of predicting AESO prices from Mid-Columbia and Northern
California power prices are 0.122 and 0.221 respectively, while AESO, Mid-Columbia, and Northern
California power prices have R2 values of 0.227, 0.119, and 0.302 when predicted by gas prices.
Natural gas prices were also high during the year 2000, but no higher than in other years with moderately
high electric prices such as 2005.
While the investigation into the bidding strategies and intertie conduct of Enron Canada Corporation and
Powerex Corporation did not uncover prohibited behaviors, it did result in the revision of rules governing
intertie conduct that would prevent those behaviors in the future. See MSA (2005); FERC (2010).
No similar concern would be introduced by allowing for firm import capability, which would allow for the
possibility that suppliers would have the firm option to sell into Alberta. However, only external suppliers
35
LIST OF ACRONYMS
ACE
AECO
AESO
AEMC
AIES
AIL
ATC
AUC
AUD
Australian Dollars
BATEA
BAU
Business as Usual
CAD
Canadian Dollars
CAISO
CASA
CC
Combined Cycle
CCEM
CCS
CH4
Methane
CO2
Carbon Dioxide
CO2e
CONE
CPUC
CT
Combustion Turbine
DDS
DR
Demand Response
EDC
EIA
ERCOT
FERC
FOM
FRB
GHG
Greenhouse Gas
75
GJ
Gigajoules
GW
Gigawatts
GWh
Gigawatt-hours
IPCC
ISO
ISO-NE
kT
Kilotonnes
MATL
MT
Megatonnes
MW
Megawatts
MWh
Megawatt-hours
MSA
N2O
Nitrous Oxide
NOX
Mono-nitrogen Oxides
NEM
NEPOOL
NERC
NP15
North Path 15
NYPP
O&M
PJM
PM
Particulate Matter
PPA
PRD
Price-Responsive Demand
SO2
Sulfur Dioxide
SPP
SWIS
TMR
VCA
VOLL
76
APPENDICES
77
$250
DDS
Operating Reserves
$200
Energy Margins
$150
$50
Fixed O&M
$0
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
Sources and Notes:
Energy margins represent revenues minus estimated operating costs in energy market. Cost of New Plant includes capital costs and FOM.
Unit-specific volumes and revenues as well as 2010 VOM, CONE, and FOM by unit type are from AESO (2010c).
Gas prices and exchange rates from Bloomberg (2010). Heat rates estimated from Ventyx (2010), AESO (2010c), Alberta Environment (2010a-b).
Historic CONE and FOM numbers are inflated according to the Handy-Whitman Index (converted from USD to CAD) between 2000 and 2009 from
Whitman, et al. (2008) andPJM (2009); and by inflation between 2009 and 2010 from Bank of Canada (2010).
A-1
Figure 33
Historic Gas Cogen Operating Margins vs. Fixed Costs
$250
Operating Reserves
Energy Margins
$200
$150
$50
Fixed O&M
$0
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
Sources and Notes:
Energy margins represent revenues minus estimated operating costs in energy market. Cost of New Plant includes capital costs and FOM.
Unit-specific volumes and revenues as well as 2010 VOM, CONE, and FOM by unit type are from AESO (2010c).
Gas prices and exchange rates from Bloomberg (2010). Heat rates estimated from Ventyx (2010), AESO (2010c), Alberta Environment (2010a-b).
Historic CONE and FOM numbers are inflated according to the Handy-Whitman Index (converted from USD to CAD) between 2000 and 2009 from
Whitman, et al. (2008) andPJM (2009); and by inflation between 2009 and 2010 from Bank of Canada (2010).
Figure 34
Historic Hydro Operating Margins vs. Fixed Costs
$400
Other AS
$350
TMR
$300
Supplemental
Spinning
Cost of New Plant
$250
Regulating
Energy Margins
$200
$150
$100
$50
Fixed O&M
$0
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
Sources and Notes:
Energy margins represent revenues minus estimated operating costs in energy market. Cost of New Plant includes capital costs and FOM.
Unit-specific volumes and revenues as well as 2010 VOM, CONE, and FOM by unit type are from AESO (2010c).
Gas prices and exchange rates from Bloomberg (2010).
Historic CONE and FOM numbers are inflated according to the Handy-Whitman Index (converted from USD to CAD) between 2000 and 2009 from
Whitman, et al. (2008) andPJM (2009); and by inflation between 2009 and 2010 from Bank of Canada (2010).
A-2
Figure 35
Historic Wind Operating Margins vs. Fixed Costs
$250
$200
Energy Margins
$150
$100
$50
Fixed O&M
$0
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
Sources and Notes:
Energy margins represent revenues minus estimated operating costs in energy market. Cost of New Plant includes capital costs and FOM.
Unit-specific volumes and revenues as well as 2010 VOM, CONE, and FOM by unit type are from AESO (2010c).
Gas prices and exchange rates from Bloomberg (2010).
Historic CONE and FOM numbers are inflated according to the Handy-Whitman Index (converted from USD to CAD) between 2000 and 2009 from
Whitman, et al. (2008) andPJM (2009); and by inflation between 2009 and 2010 from Bank of Canada (2010).
Figure 36
Historic Gas CT Operating Margins vs. Fixed Costs (Including TMR Units)
Other AS
$200
$150
TMR
Cost of New Plant
$100
Operating Reserves
$50
Energy Margins
Fixed O&M
$0
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
Sources and Notes:
Energy margins represent revenues minus estimated operating costs in energy market. Cost of New Plant includes capital costs and FOM.
Unit-specific volumes and revenues as well as 2010 VOM, CONE, and FOM by unit type are from AESO (2010c).
Gas prices and exchange rates from Bloomberg (2010). Heat rates estimated from Ventyx (2010), AESO (2010c), Alberta Environment (2010a-b).
Historic CONE and FOM numbers are inflated according to the Handy-Whitman Index (converted from USD to CAD) between 2000 and 2009 from
Whitman, et al. (2008) and PJM (2009); and by inflation between 2009 and 2010 from Bank of Canada (2010).
A-3
Coal
Gas Cogen
Gas CC
Gas CT
Hydro
Wind
b
($/kW-yr)
R2
0.726
0.667
0.748
0.484
0.295
0.287
19.86
-21.68
-42.91
-26.91
-10.81
n/a
0.710
0.817
0.918
0.655
0.440
n/a
Coal
Gas Cogen
Gas CC
Gas CT
Hydro
Wind
b
($/kW-yr)
R2
0.001
0.033
0.031
0.209
0.290
0.000
0.219
-0.076
2.877
2.500
-60.828
0.000
0.030
0.081
0.104
0.167
0.628
n/a
These relationships were developed based on the historic relationship between historic energy
margins and operating reserves revenue calculated from AESO internal data as described in
Section V.A.6 and a theoretical back-cast of perfect dispatch margins. These data are
represented at the unit level for each month from January 2008 through October 2010. Figure 37
through Figure 42 are scatter plots of the data used to determine these linear relationships. Note
that some data points show zero historic energy margins, which is an indication that the unit was
on outage during that month.
B-1
Figure 37
Historic Gas CT Operating Margins vs. Perfect Dispatch Margins
Energy
$800
y = 0.484x
+ -26.91
Energy
R-Squared: 0.7095
$700
100%
100%
$600
$500
$400
$300
$200
$100
Opeating Reserves
$0
OR Revenue ($/kw-yr)
&&
$0
$800
$100
$200
$300
$400
$500
$600
$700
$800
Operating Reserves
$600
y = 0.209x + 2.5
R-Squared: 0.1666
$400
100%
$200
$0
$0
$100
$200
$300
$400
$500
$600
$700
$800
Figure 38
Historic Gas CC Operating Margins vs. Perfect Dispatch Margins
$1,000
Energy
0.484x + 42.914
-26.91
yy==Energy
0.748x
R-Squared: 0.7095
R-Squared:
0.9177
$900
$800
100%
100%
$700
$600
$500
$400
$300
$200
$100
Opeating Reserves
$0
OR Revenue ($/kw-yr)
&&
$0
$1,000
$800
$600
$400
$200
$0
$100
$200
$300
$400
$500
$600
$700
$800
$900
$1,000
Operating Reserves
y = 0.031x + 2.877
R-Squared: 0.104
$0
$100
100%
$200
$300
$400
$500
$600
$700
$800
$900
B-2
$1,000
$1,000
Figure 39
Historic Gas Cogen Operating Margins vs. Perfect Dispatch Margins
Energy
y =Energy
+ -26.91
y 0.484x
= 0.667x
-21.684
$900
100%
100%
R-Squared:
0.7095
R-Squared:
0.8174
$800
$700
$600
$500
$400
$300
$200
$100
Opeating Reserves
$0
OR Revenue ($/kw-yr)
&&
$0
$1,000
$800
$600
$400
$200
$0
$100
$200
$300
$400
$500
$600
$700
$800
$900
$1,000
Operating Reserves
y = 0.033x + -0.076
R-Squared: 0.0805
$0
$100
100%
$200
$300
$400
$500
$600
$700
$800
$900
Figure 40
Historic Coal Operating Margins vs. Perfect Dispatch Margins
Energy
y =Energy
+ -26.91
y0.484x
= 0.726x
+ 19.865
$1,000
100%
100%
R-Squared:
0.7095
R-Squared:
0.7095
$800
$600
$400
$200
Opeating Reserves
$0
OR Revenue ($/kw-yr)
&&
$0
$200
$400
$600
$800
$1,000
Operating Reserves
$1,000
$800
$600
$400
$200
$0
y = 0.001x + 0.219
R-Squared: 0.0302
$0
$200
100%
$400
$600
$800
$1,000
B-3
$1,000
Figure 41
Historic Hydro Operating Margins vs. Perfect Dispatch Margins
$1,200
Energy
0.484x + -26.91
yy==Energy
0.295x
10.806
100%
100%
R-Squared: 0.7095
$1,000
R-Squared: 0.9177
$800
$600
$400
$200
Opeating Reserves
$0
OR Revenue ($/kw-yr)
&&
$0
$1,200
$1,000
$800
$600
$400
$200
$0
$200
$400
$600
$800
$1,000
$1,200
Operating Reserves
y = 0.29x + -60.828
R-Squared: 0.6277
$0
$200
100%
$400
$600
$800
$1,000
$1,200
Figure 42
Historic Wind Operating Margins vs. Perfect Dispatch Margins
$1,000
Energy
yy ==
0.484x
0.287x++-26.91
0
Energy
$900
100%
100%
R-Squared:
R-Squared:0.7095
n/a
$800
$700
$600
$500
$400
$300
$200
$100
Opeating Reserves
$0
OR Revenue ($/kw-yr)
&&
$0
$1,000
$800
$600
$400
$200
$0
$100
$200
$300
$400
$500
$600
$700
$800
$900
$1,000
Operating Reserves
y = 0x + 0
R-Squared: n/a
$0
$100
100%
$200
$300
$400
$500
$600
$700
$800
$900
$1,000
B-4
C-1
Figure 44
Projected Gas Cogen Operating Margins vs. Fixed Costs
Figure 45
Projected Hydro Operating Margins vs. Fixed Costs
C-2
Figure 46
Projected Wind Operating Margins vs. Fixed Costs
C-3
Disclaimer
This document is made available to you on the following basis:
(a) Purpose - This document is provided by the Australian Energy Market Operator Limited
(AEMO) to you for information purposes only. You are not permitted to commercialise it or
any information contained in it.
(b) No Reliance or warranty - This document may be subsequently amended. AEMO does
not warrant or represent that the data or information in this document is accurate, reliable,
complete or current or that it is suitable for particular purposes. You should verify and check
the accuracy, completeness, reliability and suitability of this document for any use to which
you intend to put it and seek independent expert advice before using it, or any information
contained in it.
(c) Limitation of liability - To the extent permitted by law, AEMO and its advisers, consultants
and other contributors to this document (or their respective associated companies,
businesses, partners, directors, officers or employees) shall not be liable for any errors,
omissions, defects or misrepresentations in the information contained in this document, or
for any loss or damage suffered by persons who use or rely on such information (including
by reason of negligence, negligent misstatement or otherwise). If any law prohibits the
exclusion of such liability, AEMOs liability is limited, at AEMOs option, to the re-supply of
the information, provided that this limitation is permitted by law and is fair and reasonable.
2010 - All rights reserved.
ELECTRICITY
3
Ancillary Services
14
Inter-regional Trade
15
Market Forecasts
17
19
Registered Participants
19
20
22
22
Regulatory Arrangements
23
Glossary
24
CONTENTS
1
What is Electricity?
Electricity is a form of energy produced by the flow of
electrons in a substance known as a conductor. The best
conductors are metals such as copper and aluminium,
and are commonly used in electrical wiring.
Energy exists in many forms. Electricity is a secondary
energy source as it is produced by the conversion of other
energy sources like the chemical energy in coal, natural
gas and oil. Other primary sources of energy, like the
sun and wind, are increasingly being used to produce
electricity. A quantity of energy can be changed or
converted, but can never be created or destroyed.
UNITS EXPLAINED
One megawatt (MW)
is equal to one million
watts (W).
A 100 MW generator
will power one million
100 W light globes
simultaneously.
A 600 MW generator
has sufficient capacity
to service 200,000
domestic customers.
Power plant
generates
electricity
Transformer
converts low voltage
electricity to high
voltage for efficient
transport
Distribution lines
carry low voltage
electricity to
consumers
Substation transformer
converts high voltage
electricity to low voltage
for distribution
TRANSPORT OF ELECTRICITY
AGRICULTURE: 0.8%
RESIDENTIAL: 27.7%
BUSINESS: 12%
DOMESTIC: 88%
COMMERCIAL: 22.8%
METALS: 18.3%
Source: Electricity Gas Australia 2010 ESAA
AEMO
GENERATOR
TRANSMISSION NETWORK
SERVICE PROVIDER
DISTRIBUTION NETWORK
SERVICE PROVIDER
SA 6.5%
NSW 38%
VIC 25.1%
QLD 25.4%
Source: ESAA
MARKET CUSTOMER
DISPATCH INSTRUCTIONS
PHYSICAL ELECTRICITY FLOW
FINANCIAL FLOWS
Security of Supply
Supply Reserve
The power system is required to be operated at all
times with a certain level of reserve in order to meet
the required standard of supply reliability across the
NEM. Calculation of the minimum reserve requirements
recognises reserve sharing in a national context.
Load Shedding
In the event that demand in a region exceeds supply
and all other means to satisfy demand have been
implemented, AEMO can instruct network service
providers to shed some customer load. This action is only
taken when there is an urgent need to protect the power
system by reducing demand and returning the system to
balance. Load shedding involves a temporary suspension
of supply to customers in a specific part or region of the
NEM where system security is at risk.
Reserve Trading
When there is sufficient notice of an upcoming shortfall
of supply that threatens to compromise minimum reserve
margins, AEMO may tender for contracts for electricity
supply from sources beyond those factored into AEMOs
usual forecasting processes. At these times, emergency
generators and other generators connected directly to
the distribution network who submit tenders may enter
contracts to boost supply in the NEM so the widespread
supply interruptions that may otherwise have occurred can
be avoided. In the same way, some electricity consumers
may offer for a financial consideration to decrease their
demand at times of supply shortfall so that demand and
supply are brought into balance.
8,984
5,935
6,004
1,158
1,542
3000
TAS
SA
6000
VIC
9000
NSW
Demand
QLD
AVERAGE DEMAND
Supply
10
500
400
C
B
300
$38
$37
$35
200
$28
100
$20
0
4:05
4:10
4:15
4:20
4:25
4:30
GENERATOR:
ONE
TWO
THREE
FOUR
FIVE
Type
Gas and Coal-fired Boilers
Gas Turbine
Water (Hydro)
Renewable (Wind/Solar)
8-48 hours
20 minutes
1 minute
dependent on prevailing
weather
high
high
medium
low
high
high
nil
nil
high
medium-high
nil
nil
Other characteristcs
medium-high
operating cost
CHARACTERISTICS OF GENERATORS
11
Data input
Establishing current
operational status of
generating units
Assessing demand
forecasts
Applying loss factors
Determining system
conditions
12
Dispatch
Issuing dispatch instructions
to generators
13
ANCILLARY SERVICES
Ancillary services are those services used by AEMO
to manage the power system safely, securely and
reliably. Ancillary services maintain key technical
characteristics of the system, including standards
for frequency, voltage, network loading and system
re-start processes.
14
C
ontrol the voltage at different points of the electrical
network to within the prescribed standards; or
Control the power flow on network elements to within
the physical limitations of those elements
Interconnectors
The high-voltage transmission lines that transport
electricity between adjacent NEM regions are called
interconnectors. Interconnectors are used to import
electricity into a region when demand is higher than can
be met by local generators, or when the price of electricity
in an adjoining region is low enough to displace the
local supply.
AEMOs ability to schedule generators to meet demand
using an interconnector to facilitate importing electricity
is sometimes limited by the physical transfer capacity
of the interconnector. When the technical limit of an
interconnectors capacity is reached, the interconnector
is said to be constrained. For example, if prices are
very low in one region and high in an adjacent region,
electricity can be sent from the first to the second region
across an interconnector up to the maximum technical
capacity of the interconnector. AEMOs systems will then
dispatch local generators with the lowest price offers
from within the second region to meet the outstanding
consumer demand.
Regulated Interconnectors
A regulated interconnector is an interconnector that has
passed the ACCC-devised regulatory test and has been
deemed to add net market value to the NEM. Having
passed the test, a regulated interconnector becomes
eligible to receive a fixed annual revenue set by the ACCC
and based on the value of the asset, regardless of actual
usage. The revenue is collected as part of the network
charges included in the accounts of electricity end-users.
At present, regulated interconnectors operate between
all adjacent regions of the NEM, except Tasmania.
INTER-REGIONAL TRADE
QLD
SOUTH PINE
NSW-QLD
(QNI)
SA
NSW-QLD
TERRANORA
TORRENS ISLAND
VIC
VIC-SA
(HEYWOOD)
VIC-NSW
THOMASTOWN
TAS-VIC
(BASSLINK)
GEORGE TOWN
TAS
15
Unregulated Interconnectors
REGION A
REGION A
REFERENCE
NODE
REGION
BOUNDARY
REGION B
REFERENCE
NODE
CUSTOMER 2
CUSTOMER 1
REGION B
INTER-REGIONAL LOSS FACTOR APPLIES
INTRA-REGIONAL LOSS FACTOR APPLIES
Pre-dispatch Forecasting
MARKET FORECASTS
Forecast
Period
Updated/
Published
Short-term
PASA
7 days
2-hourly from
4:00am
Medium-term
PASA
2 years
2:00pm every
Tuesday
24
18
24 HOUR
CLOCK
1 HOUR
12:30PM DEADLINE FOR DAILY BIDS FOR
NEXT TRADING DAY (RE-BIDS CAN BE UP
TO 5 MINUTES PRIOR TO DISPATCH
PRE-DISPATCH FORECAST
PUBLISHED
60
45
1 HOUR
CLOCK
15
5 MINUTE DISPATCH INTERVAL
(288 PER DAY)
PRE-DISPATCH FORECAST
PUBLISHED
17
18
REGISTERED PARTICIPANTS
Scheduled: aggregate
generation capacity of more than
or equal to 30 megawatts.
Semi-scheduled: aggregate
generation capacity of more than
or equal to 30 megawatts where
output is intermittent.
Non-scheduled: aggregate
generation capacity of less than
30 megawatts.
Market Participants
Special Participant
System operators or agents appointed to perform power security
functions. Distribution system operators and controllers or
operators of any portion of the distribution system.
Intending Participant
Must reasonably satisfy AEMO of intention to perform activity that
would entitle it to be a registered participant.
Trader
Party registered to participate in the settlement residue auction.
19
Hedge Contracts
Hedge contracts are typically agreements between
generators and customers that operate independently of
both the market and AEMOs administration. The details
of hedge contracts are not factored into the balancing
of supply and demand, and are not regulated under the
Rules. These contracts can be entered into under either
long-term or short-term arrangements that set an agreed,
or strike, price for electricity traded through the pool. In
this way, hedge contracts are financial instruments that
participants can use to manage the financial risk that
results from potential volatility of the spot price.
The basic form of a hedge contract exists where two
parties agree to exchange cash so that a defined quantity
of electricity over a nominated period is effectively valued
at an agreed strike price. Under such an agreement,
generators pay customers the difference when the spot
price is above the strike price. When the spot price is
below the strike price, customers pay generators the
difference between the spot price and the strike price.
20
$160
SPOT PRICE
$140
$120
$100
PRICE
$80
$60
$40
STRIKE PRICE
(AGREED CONTRACT PRICE)
$20
$0
0400
0800
1200
1600
TIME
2000
0000
SPOT PRICE
$100/MWH
GENERATORS
ARE PAID AT
$100/MWH
REGION BOUNDARY
SETTLEMENT RESIDUE
ACCRUED IN REGION B:
$120-$100=$20
(EXCLUDING LOSS
FACTORS)
CUSTOMERS
BUY AT
$120/MWH
SPOT PRICE
$120/MWH
REGION B
POWER FLOW
21
Large wind generators are typically registered as semischeduled generators (rather than scheduled) because
their energy source is intermittent and their generation
cannot increase on demand. The market is designed to
allow intermittent generators to participate and share the
same power system and the same consumers.
The NEMs base-load generators are scheduled
according to bids, and production from each generating
unit is controlled by operators. The changeability and
unpredictability of wind means that wind generators
cannot be scheduled in the usual way.
REGULATORY ARRANGEMENTS
23
GLOSSARY
Renewable generation
Energy conversion techniques including wind, solar, hydro
and geothermal. The primary commercial sources at this
time are hydro and wind power.
Networks (Transmission)
Transmission lines carry high voltage electricity to
substation transformers where it is changed to low voltage
for distribution.
Hedge contracts
Long term or short term arrangements that set a strike
(agreed) price for electricity traded through the pool.
Networks (Distribution)
Distribution lines carry low voltage electricity to
consumers who access it through the power outlets
in homes, offices and factories.
Interconnectors
The high-voltage transmission lines that transport
electricity between adjacent NEM regions.
Intermittent generators
Where the changeability and unpredictability of the source
(such as wind) means the generators cannot be scheduled
to operate in the same way as conventional generators
(coal, gas or oil).
Load shedding
AEMO can request network service providers to
disconnect some customers when demand in a region
exceeds supply. This action is only taken when there is
an urgent need to reduce demand and return the system
to balance.
Market Price Cap
The maximum price at which generators can bid into
the market.
24
Transformers
Convert the electricity produced at a generation plant
from low to high voltage to enable its efficient transport
on the transmission system. When the electricity arrives at
the location where it is required, a substation transformer
changes the high voltage electricity to low voltage for
distribution to end users.
2
2
TRANSMISSION INFRASTRUCTURE
2
POWER STATION
SUBSTATION
WINDFARM
500 KV TRANSMISSION LINE
330 KV TRANSMISSION LINE
DC
3
2
2 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
REGIONAL BOUNDARIES
REGIONAL REFERENCE NODE
QUEENSLAND
NEW SOUTH WALES
VICTORIA
SOUTH AUSTRALIA
TASMANIA
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 2
2 3
SOUTH PINE
DC
2
2
2
2
DC
2
2
2
TORRENS ISLAND
2
2 2
2
2
2
2
WEST SYDNEY
THOMASTOWN
DC
SYD WEST
2
2
GEORGE TOWN
2
2
25
ELECTRICITY
AEMO GPO Box 2008 Melbourne VIC 3001 Website: www.aemo.com.au
INFORMATION CENTRE Telephone: 1300 361 011
ISBN 0-646-41233-7
1 The market
When the electricity market is liberalized, electricity becomes a commodity like, for
instance, grain or oil. At the outset, there is as in all other markets a wholesale
market and a retail market and there are the three usual players: the producers, the
retailers and the end users.
However, for electricity, a more advanced trading pattern quickly develops. New
players enter the scene: the traders and the brokers (Figure 1).
A trader is a player who owns the electricity during the trading process. For example,
the trader may buy electricity from a producer and subsequently sell it to a retailer.
The trader may also choose to buy electricity from one retailer and sell it to another
retailer and so forth: there are many routes from the producer to the end user.
The brokers play the same part in the electricity market as the estate agent in the
property market. The broker does not own the commodity he acts as an
intermediary.
A retailer may, for example, ask the broker to find a producer who will sell a given
amount of electricity at a given time.
The Nordic electricity exchange Nord Pool Spot covers Denmark, Finland, Sweden,
Norway , Estonia and Lithuania. Nord Pool Spot is an exchange primarily servicing the
players at the wholesale market for electricity. The customers on Nord Pool Spot are
Nord Pool Spot AS, Tel +47 6710 9100, Fax +47 6710 9101, PO Box 121, NO-1325 Lysaker, Norway,
info@nordpoolspot.com, org nr. NO 984 058 098 MVA, www.nordpoolspot.com
2
the producers, retailers, and traders who choose to trade on the electricity
exchange. In addition, large end users trade on the electricity exchange. In this article,
the term the Nord Pool Spot exchange area denotes Denmark, Finland, Sweden,
Norway, Estonia and Lithuania.
2 The Point Tariff System
In Figure 2, the water illustrates the electrical power and the walls of the tanks
illustrate the transmission grid.
The idea of the system of point tariff is that the producers pay a fee to the grid owner
for each kWh they pour into the grid. Correspondingly, the end users pay a fee for
each kWh they draw from grid.
This means for example, that a retailer in Southern Sweden may buy electricity from a
producer in Northern Sweden. Of course, such a deal does not cause the producers
electricity to travel all the way from Northern Sweden to Southern Sweden. The
principle is simply that for each hour somewhere a producer has to pour an amount
of electricity to the grid which corresponds to the amount the retailers customers
have tapped from the grid.
3 The non-commercial players
The roads in the Nordic countries are operated by monopolies: The municipalities,
the counties and the state. For electricity, the grid functions like the roads
transporting the power. Correspondingly, the grid is operated by non-commercial
monopolies (Figure 3). For each local area, there is a local grid operator who handles
the local low-voltage grid (cf. the municipalities and counties operating the local
roads). The high-voltage grid is operated by the transmission system operator (TSO)
just as the motorways are operated by the state.
In addition to owning and operating the high-voltage grid, the TSO is responsible for
the security of supply in its country. Consequently, the TSO rules and controls the
electricity system in his country. Basically, the physical control and maintenance of
Nord Pool Spot AS, Tel +47 6710 9100, Fax +47 6710 9101, PO Box 121, NO-1325 Lysaker, Norway,
info@nordpoolspot.com, org nr. NO 984 058 098 MVA, www.nordpoolspot.com
3
the electricity system is done in the same way, whether you have market
economy or planned economy.
Only the financial organization is changed when we shift from planning economy to
market economy. This is because the laws of nature are the same whether we have
planned economy or market economy.
This also holds for corn flakes: the machine filling the corn flakes into cartons does
not care whether there is market economy or planned economy. It makes no
difference to the physics whether there is planned economy or market economy.
The commercial players are not and cannot be responsible for the security of supply.
If a South Swedish retailer, for example, has bought electricity from a North Swedish
producer, the North Swedish producer cannot guarantee that there will be electricity
in the plug at the retailers customers.
What the commercial players deliver to each other and the end users are only the
prices (and the bills). Hence, the commercial players deliver financial services only.
The commercial players work in the domain which is changed when the electricity
market is liberalized: the financial domain.
Nord Pool Spot AS, Tel +47 6710 9100, Fax +47 6710 9101, PO Box 121, NO-1325 Lysaker, Norway,
info@nordpoolspot.com, org nr. NO 984 058 098 MVA, www.nordpoolspot.com
4
6 Balancing Power
In the wholesale market electricity is bought and sold hourly. Figure 4 illustrates an
example where a retailer buys electricity for one particular hour at one specific date.
The hour during which the power is delivered and consumed is called the hour of
operation.
In the example, the retailer has two contracts of 30 MWh and 70 MWh, respectively:
the retailer expects that his customers will consume 100 MWh during this hour of
operation (1 MWh is 1,000 kWh).
Nord Pool Spot AS, Tel +47 6710 9100, Fax +47 6710 9101, PO Box 121, NO-1325 Lysaker, Norway,
info@nordpoolspot.com, org nr. NO 984 058 098 MVA, www.nordpoolspot.com
6
Figure 5: The retailers purchase of electricity for the hour 1pm 2pm on September 23th 2010
Before the hour of operation, the purchases must be made. After the hour of
operation, the settlement is done (Figure 5). The retailer pays the suppliers for the 30
MWh and the 70 MWh.
Assume that the retailers customers have only used 85 MWh during this hour of
operation. In this case, the retailer has per definition sold the 15 MWh to the TSO. The
TSO pays the retailer for the 15 MWh.
This trade with the TSO creates a balance between the retailers total trading and the
retailers customers consumption. The electricity, which the retailer trades with the
TSO, is therefore called balancing power, or often referred to as regulating power.
If the TSO had to procure up-regulation during this hour, the TSO will pay the retailer
the up-regulating price for the balancing power (i.e. the retailer will get the same
price as the producers, who sold up-regulating power to the TSO during this hour).
Normally, the up-regulating price will be higher than the market price (in this article,
the market price is the day-ahead exchange price for this hour).
If the TSO had to procure down-regulation during this hour, the TSO will pay the
retailer the down-regulating price for the balancing power (i.e. the retailer will get
the same price as the producers, who bought down-regulating power from the TSO
Nord Pool Spot AS, Tel +47 6710 9100, Fax +47 6710 9101, PO Box 121, NO-1325 Lysaker, Norway,
info@nordpoolspot.com, org nr. NO 984 058 098 MVA, www.nordpoolspot.com
7
during this hour). Normally, the down-regulating price will be lower than
the market price.
In a different case, assume the retailers customers have used 110 MWh during this
hour of operation. This is 10 MWh more than the retailer bought before the hour of
operation. In this case, the retailer has to buy the additional 10 MWh from the TSO. In
this situation, the TSO will invoice the retailer for the 10 MWh.
Elspot is Nord Pool Spots day-ahead auction market, where electrical power
is traded.
Players, who want to trade power on the Elspot market, must send their purchase
orders to Nord Pool Spot at the latest at noon the day before the power is delivered to
the grid.
Correspondingly, participants who want to sell power to Elspot must send their sale
offers to Nord Pool Spot at the latest at noon the day before the power is delivered to
the grid (i.e. gate closure is 12.00).
Figure 7: Bid/Offer from one player for the hour 1pm 2pm of tomorrow.
The orders and offers are sent electronically to Nord Pool Spot in Oslo: the
participants send the orders to Nord Pool Spot via the Internet.
Figure 7 shows an example of orders submitted by a retailer for one hour of the
following day. The retailer expects that his customers will consume 50 MWh during
this hour.
This retailer has his own generation facility. Hence, he can choose whether he will
either:
- buy the 50 MWh from the exchange and therefore not produce anything himself.
- buy some of the electricity from the exchange and produce the rest himself.
- produce precisely 50 MWh.
Nord Pool Spot AS, Tel +47 6710 9100, Fax +47 6710 9101, PO Box 121, NO-1325 Lysaker, Norway,
info@nordpoolspot.com, org nr. NO 984 058 098 MVA, www.nordpoolspot.com
9
Nord Pool Spot calculates a price for each hour. Elspot is a day-ahead market, as this
is trading for the following day.
This way of calculating the price is called a double auction, as both the buyers and the
sellers have submitted orders (for many other auction types, only the buyers submit
orders). Hence, Elspot is called a day-ahead auction market (as the word double is
cut out from the type description).
Figure 9 shows the prices during one specific day, July 14th 2006..
Nord Pool Spot AS, Tel +47 6710 9100, Fax +47 6710 9101, PO Box 121, NO-1325 Lysaker, Norway,
info@nordpoolspot.com, org nr. NO 984 058 098 MVA, www.nordpoolspot.com
10
At noon, Nord Pool Spots computer in Oslo starts calculating the day-ahead prices.
Having finished the calculation, Nord Pool Spot publishes the prices. At the same time,
Nord Pool Spot reports to the participants how much electricity they have bought or
sold for each hour of the following day. These reports on buying and selling are also
sent to the TSOs in the Nord Pool Spot area. The TSOs use this information, when they
later calculate the balancing power for each player.
There is a standard Elspot trading fee in EUR/MWh which is paid by both buyers and
sellers.
9 Bidding areas
Actually, chapter 6 describes how the so-called System Price is calculated. The System
Price is the theoretical, common price we would have in the Nordic area if there were
no grid bottlenecks.
Due to the bottlenecks, the Nord Pool Spot exchange area is divided into a number of
bidding areas. For example, when a producer in Eastern Denmark sends his orders to
Nord Pool Spot, he must specify that these orders are submitted for delivery in the
bidding area Eastern Denmark.
The TSOs decides the number of bidding areas its boundaries. Eastern Denmark and
Western Denmark are always treated as two different bidding areas. Sweden
constitutes one bidding area until November 2011 when it is to be divided into four
bidding areas. Also, Finland, Estonia and Lithuania constitutes one bidding area while
Norway currently (August 2011) has five bidding areas.
Nord Pool Spot AS, Tel +47 6710 9100, Fax +47 6710 9101, PO Box 121, NO-1325 Lysaker, Norway,
info@nordpoolspot.com, org nr. NO 984 058 098 MVA, www.nordpoolspot.com
11
Nord Pool Spot calculates a price for each bidding area for each hour of the
following day.
Naturally, there are often hours, where neighboring bidding areas have the same
price. Likewise there may also be hours, where the whole exchange area has the same
price: for example, during 2010, the whole exchange area had the same day-ahead
price during 10 % of the hours.
Nord Pool Spot AS, Tel +47 6710 9100, Fax +47 6710 9101, PO Box 121, NO-1325 Lysaker, Norway,
info@nordpoolspot.com, org nr. NO 984 058 098 MVA, www.nordpoolspot.com
12
Nord Pool Spot AS, Tel +47 6710 9100, Fax +47 6710 9101, PO Box 121, NO-1325 Lysaker, Norway,
info@nordpoolspot.com, org nr. NO 984 058 098 MVA, www.nordpoolspot.com
13
0 MW exchange
50 MW exchange
CONGESTION
[NOK/MWh]
200
300
[NOK/MWh]
233.33
283.33
Bidding area
Norway
Sweden
In the implicit auction the available transmission capacity is used to level out price
differences as much as possible.
Nord Pool Spot carries out the day-ahead congestion management on both external
and internal transmission lines between and within Denmark, Norway, Sweden,
Finland, Estonia and Lithuania.
Nord Pool Spot AS, Tel +47 6710 9100, Fax +47 6710 9101, PO Box 121, NO-1325 Lysaker, Norway,
info@nordpoolspot.com, org nr. NO 984 058 098 MVA, www.nordpoolspot.com
14
Figure 12: Market coupling between the Nordic, German and Central Western European exchange
areas.
12 Cross-border trading
Inside the Nord Pool Spot exchange area, all the transmission capacity on the external
transmission lines is handled by Nord Pool Spot through implicit auction during price
calculation.
Two Nordic commercial players situated in different bidding areas cannot trade
electricity with each other. This is because Nord Pool Spot handles all the trading
capacity on the cross-border links, on behalf of the Nordic TSOs.
In order to trade with each other, Nordic players in different bidding areas can use
the financial electricity market (Figure 13). The two players can trade the power on
Nord Pool Spot or with a player situated in their own bidding area (i.e. the power is
traded locally). In addition the two players have a settlement in accordance with the
financial contract.
Nord Pool Spot AS, Tel +47 6710 9100, Fax +47 6710 9101, PO Box 121, NO-1325 Lysaker, Norway,
info@nordpoolspot.com, org nr. NO 984 058 098 MVA, www.nordpoolspot.com
15
Figure 13: The capacity on the Nordic bottlenecks is given to E.E. (Electricity Exchange). How can a
producer P and a retailer R trade, if they are separated by one or more bottleneck(s)? Answer: They
trade the power with E.E. or with another local counterpart. Furthermore, they have a financial
contract.
The idea of this principle is the following: you can always buy or sell electrical power.
For example, you can trade on the electricity exchange. Hence, what is interesting for
the commercial players is only the price. However by means of a financial contract,
the players can lock the price.
13 The financial electricity market
At the financial electricity market you cannot trade one single kWh. As mentioned
above, the financial market is used for price hedging and risk management.
Figure 14 illustrates how a financial contract works. The example illustrates a
financial contract of the type called a futures contract.
In the example, a retailer and a supplier have entered into a futures contract with a
volume of 4 MWh and a hedge price of 65 EUR/kWh. In the example, the contracts
so-called delivery period is a specific month (for instance, it may be June 2014).
Nord Pool Spot AS, Tel +47 6710 9100, Fax +47 6710 9101, PO Box 121, NO-1325 Lysaker, Norway,
info@nordpoolspot.com, org nr. NO 984 058 098 MVA, www.nordpoolspot.com
16
Figure 14: Producer and retailer sign a future contract with hedge price 65 EUR/MWh; If, for instance,
the average system price in the month concerned turns out to be 66 EUR/MWh; The producer pays the
retailer 1 EUR/MWh * 4 MWh. If, for instance, the average system price in the month concerned turns
out to be 63 EUR/MWh; the retailer pays the producer 2 EUR/MWh * 4 MWh. In the example, the
parties have cleared the contract. Hence, the settlement runs via clearing house.
The parties have a mutual insurance (and a mutual obligation). Suppose the average
system price for the month in question turns out to be 66 EUR/MWh. A high price on
the wholesale market is obviously disadvantageous for the retailer. However in this
situation, the supplier will compensate the retailer. The supplier pays the retailer
1 EUR/MWh * 4 MWh = 4 EUR.
Suppose instead the average system price for the month in question turns out to be
63 EUR/MWh. A low price on the wholesale market is obviously disadvantageous for
the supplier. In this situation, the retailer will compensate the supplier. The retailer
pays the supplier
2 EUR/MWh * 4 MWh = 8 EUR.
The contract is therefore settled by comparing the hedge price of the contract with
the average system price for the period in question. The difference in price is
multiplied by the contracts volume. Eventually, this amount of money is transferred
between the parties.
It is important to note that the parties of a financial contract are not delivering
physical power with each other. Only money is exchanged between them (therefore,
the name financial electricity market). However, in addition, the retailer may
submit a purchase order with an unspecified price to Elspot. The retailer can notify
Elspot that he will buy 5 MWh each hour during the month irrespective of the price.
With a purchase of 5 MWh each hour during the whole month, the retailer will in total
have bought 3600 MWh by the end of a 30-days month:
5 MWh/h * 24 h * 30 days = 3600 MWh.
Nord Pool Spot AS, Tel +47 6710 9100, Fax +47 6710 9101, PO Box 121, NO-1325 Lysaker, Norway,
info@nordpoolspot.com, org nr. NO 984 058 098 MVA, www.nordpoolspot.com
17
The retailer does not need to worry about the price. If it is higher than 65 EUR/MWh,
he will be compensated. On the other hand, if the price is lower than 65 EUR/MWh,
he has to compensate the opposite party of the futures contract.
The retailer, therefore, has two trade arrangements: a purchase on Elspot and a
futures contract. In total, the two trade arrangements guarantee his price for the
3600 MWh will be 65 EUR/MWh.
14 Clearing of financial contracts
The two parties of a financial contract can choose to clear the contract using a
clearing house. In this case, the clearing house takes care of the settlement of the
contract (Figure 14). Furthermore, the clearing house guarantees the settlement: the
clearing house will ensure that the settlement is carried out, even if one of the parties
cannot fulfill his obligations.
If the parties have entered the contract via a financial electricity exchange, clearing is
mandatory. This is because the trading at the financial exchange is anonymous: the
parties do not know each others identity. Hence, the contract must be cleared, so the
clearing house sits between the parties.
15 Long-term contracts
At Elspot, the commercial players can trade power day-ahead. Now, let us take a look
at the market for long-term contracts.
For example, let us consider a retailer who has sold 100 MWh to an end user at a
price of 67 EUR/MWh for the following year. The retailer now has to make a
corresponding purchase on the wholesale market.
However, the retailer does not need to buy the power immediately. In order to hedge
his position, all the retailer needs now is a futures contract. For example, the retailer
has earned 2 EUR/MWh if he enters into a futures contract with a hedge price of 65
EUR/MWh.
Next year, the retailer can simply buy the power from Elspot or from a local supplier.
Therefore, the financial market is also the market for long-term contracts.
16 The day-ahead price must be reliable
As it appears, the Elspot day-ahead price is used, when the financial contracts are
settled. We say that the day-ahead price is the underlying reference for the financial
contracts.
Nord Pool Spot AS, Tel +47 6710 9100, Fax +47 6710 9101, PO Box 121, NO-1325 Lysaker, Norway,
info@nordpoolspot.com, org nr. NO 984 058 098 MVA, www.nordpoolspot.com
18
Nord Pool Spot AS, Tel +47 6710 9100, Fax +47 6710 9101, PO Box 121, NO-1325 Lysaker, Norway,
info@nordpoolspot.com, org nr. NO 984 058 098 MVA, www.nordpoolspot.com
19
Further information
If you would like further information on any aspect of this client
note, please contact a person mentioned below.
Contact
Alex Wong
Partner
T +65 6302 2557
alex.wong@hllnl.com
Amy Lee
CEO
T +65 6302 2558
amy.lee@hllnl.com
Ming Hui Chock
Senior Associate
T +65 6302 2560
minghui.chock@hllnl.com
Adrian Wong
Senior Associate
T +65 6302 2568
adrian.wong@hllnl.com
Contents
Schedule 1 Summary of Singapore electricity market deregulation and wholesale market operations
Schedule 2 Summary of Singapore gas market deregulation and the Gas Network Code
15
2
1
Full retail contestability has still not been achieved so household and small
consumers retain the Market Support Services Licensee as their default
power retailer.
and East Africa and shale gas in North America), LNG prices
are set to fall in the medium to long term in spite of strong
demand from China and Japan. At the same time, the West
Natuna and South Sumatra gas fields in Indonesia appear to
be depleting at a higher rate than originally envisaged and
this, coupled with pressure on the Indonesia government to
reserve more of its precious resources for domestic
consumption, would likely mean a far less reliable future for
piped natural gas imports.
This has led to BGs 3 Mtpa franchise for aggregating LNG for
Singapore having a strong uptake. With 2.65 Mtpa of LNG
having been taken up by February 2012, the EMA expects the
entire franchise to be fulfilled by 2013 at the latest. This begs
the immediate question of Singapores LNG import policy
beyond BGs franchise. The EMA has sought feedback
3
through a consultation exercise that will aim to determine
whether Singapores future LNG import framework will be
carried out through a regulated sole importer framework
(BG+1) or a multiple aggregator framework (BG+3).
Under the BG+1 framework, the EMA will appoint a Regulated
Sole Importer (RSI) who will import all incremental LNG
beyond BGs 3 Mtpa supply. The EMA will regulate the RSIs
returns as well as its LNG procurement, gas sales prices and
contract terms. A variant of this framework is adopted by
Asian importers like South Korea, Taiwan and Thailand. It is
expected that the appointment will be conducted through a
similar RFP exercise that resulted in BGs appointment.
The BG+3 framework would see up to 4 large LNG importers
serving up to 15 Mtpa of LNG capacity (which is the projected
LNG demand by 2024) in Singapore. Under the government
mandated aggregation variant of this model, importers will be
selected by EMA (either sequentially over time or
concurrently) and awarded LNG import licences through a
competitive RFP process. Each importer would be awarded a
franchise to import a specific amount of LNG. Under the
market-driven aggregation model, competition between
players in the LNG import sector would give rise to natural
aggregation of demand into a few dominant players (e.g. the
formation of a few buyer groups). EMA would set entry
criteria that importers must fulfil to qualify for access to the
LNG terminal.
With the LNG terminal able to support 7 LNG storage tanks
and up to 15Mtpa of LNG demand, the Singapore government
is also open to seeing the LNG terminal being used as a
trans-shipment and trading hub. As of today, a number of
international LNG trading companies (such as Shell, GDF
Suez, ConocoPhillips and BP) have set up LNG trading
offices in Singapore and they will be looking to tap the strong
regional growth of spot and short-term LNG contracts. There
should be no doubt though that the government sees the LNG
3
HISTORICAL BACKGROUND
REGULATORY FRAMEWORK
Electricity Act
Electricity Licenses
generation of electricity;
transmission of electricity;
retail of electricity;
It should be noted that although the MSSL is obtaining supply from the
wholesale market, it is not technically a market participant. However, the
Market Rules provide for MSSL to be treated, for the most part, similarly to
the manner in which market participants are treated. Thus, a MSSL is
subject to most of the same obligations as market participants are under
the Market Rules.
Codes of Practice
The electricity licences require that licensees comply with
relevant Codes of Practice and other standards of
performance that govern their activities. The Codes of
Practice contain detailed rules that govern the electricity
licensees in conducting their activities. The Codes of Practice
developed to date include:
The Transmission Code
The Transmission Code is binding on the Transmission
Licensee, which is SP PowerAssets. It sets out the minimum
conditions that SP PowerAssets must meet in carrying out its
obligations as owner of the Transmission System and to
facilitate non-discriminatory access to the Transmission
System.
Regulated Supply Service Code
The Regulated Supply Service Code is binding on MSSLs,
which is currently SP Services only. It sets out the minimum
conditions that a MSSL must meet in carrying out its
obligations to procure the supply of electricity and provide
market support services to non-contestable consumers under
section 21 of the Electricity Act.
Market Support Services Code
The Market Support Services Code (the MSS Code) is
binding on MSSLs. It sets out the minimum conditions that a
MSSL must meet in carrying out its obligations to provide
market support services to Retail Electricity Licensees
(RELs) and contestable consumers, and facilitate their
access to the wholesale electricity market.
Metering Code
The Metering Code is binding on the Transmission Licensee,
generation licensees and MSSLs, and sets out the minimum
conditions that a metering equipment service provider must
meet in carrying out its obligations to install and maintain
meters. It also sets out the roles and obligations of the meter
reader and meter data manager.
Codes of Practice for RELs
The Codes of Practice for RELs sets out the minimum
standards of behaviour that a REL must observe in retailing to
consumers.
Market Agreements and Contracts
Most market participants in the NEMS are required to enter
into a number of agreements and contracts. These are
generally a consequence of their respective licence
Purpose
Operating Agreement
MSSL Agreement
Connection Agreement
SP PowerAssets, generation
licensees, party wanting DMP
and electricity consumers
Agency Agreement
Source: EMA
The EMA
The EMA was established in April 2001 pursuant to the EMA
Act as an independent regulator overseeing the electricity and
gas industries in Singapore. Under section 3 of the EMA Act,
the EMA is charged with the general administration of the
EMA Act, and its functions and duties include:
The EMC
The EMC is licensed to operate the wholesale electricity
market in the NEMS. The EMCs functions are to:
and
augmentation
of
the
The EMC is a 51:49 joint venture between the EMA and M-Co
(The Marketplace Company) Pte Limited (M-Co Singapore).
M-Co Singapore is a related company of The Marketplace
Company Limited, which developed, implemented and
currently operates the wholesale electricity market in New
Zealand.
PSO
The role of the PSO (a division of EMA) is to ensure the
security of supply of electricity to consumers and to arrange
for the secure operation of the electricity system.
The functions of the PSO include:
on
conditions
on
the
Market Participant
A Market Participant in the NEMS is defined as a person (that
is, an entity or organisation, as well as people) that:
generation licensees;
RELs;
RELs
The retail electricity market does not come under the
jurisdiction of the Market Rules and the EMC. It is created
and regulated under the EMA Act, the electricity licenses and
the Codes of Practice issued by the EMA.
RELs may be market participants who purchase electricity
directly from the wholesale electricity market or purchase
through the MSSL. Since the RELs are permitted to trade in
electricity and are not subject to the same degree of
regulation as the MSSL, they may offer contestable
consumers contracts different from those available from the
MSSL. RELs can bundle energy and other charges into a
single invoice, charge a price other than the Uniform
6
Singapore Energy Price (the USEP) for energy, and offer
additional services to consumers.
Consumers
Consumers are classified as either contestable or noncontestable, depending on their electricity usage.
Contestable consumers are entitled to purchase electricity
from a REL, or directly from the wholesale electricity market,
or indirectly through MSSLs. Non-contestable consumers are
supplied by MSSLs.
Currently, consumers with a monthly usage of 10,000kWh
and above are contestable. The EMA continues to study
when full contestability of all retail consumers will be allowed.
Relationships between the Market Participants
The figure on page 9 shows the financial flows between the
Market Participants in the NEMS.
Competition
10
For all but plants providing regulation, energy actually injected should not
differ greatly from scheduled energy, under normal circumstances.
Although offers modified within the last hour may be subject to scrutiny
from the market surveillance panel.
11
12
10
11
13
USEP
While the generation facilities are paid their nodal price,
buyers from the wholesale electricity market pay a uniform
overall average price so that no customers are disadvantaged
by location. The USEP is calculated from the weighted
average of the nodal prices at all of the exit nodes on the
Transmission System. The nodal energy price at each node
is weighted by the energy withdrawn from that node.
VESTING CONTRACTS
In the transition to the NEMS, the EMA had concerns with the
degree of market power that will exist in the wholesale
electricity market. The EMA has addressed these concerns
using Vesting Contracts without interfering with the structure
of the wholesale electricity market. Vesting Contracts are
contracts for differences (CfDs) vested on the large
incumbent electricity generation companies, for a transitional
period.
In Singapore, the Vesting Contracts take the following form:
14
BILATERAL CONTRACTS
The wholesale market in Singapore is not designed to
eliminate or be immune to price volatility; rather, it is important
to the market that prices move freely. As a result, the design
also recognises the need to allow participants to manage
price risk.
The generation and electricity retail companies can enter into
bilateral contracts, at their discretion, to reduce price
fluctuations.
These contracts are purely financial
arrangements, the most common of which are CfDs.
Under such an arrangement, the contracting parties agree to
a strike price for a given volume of energy. They continue to
buy and sell on the spot market but settle between
themselves any financial difference between the spot and CfD
strike price. When the strike price is higher than the spot
price, the electricity retail companies make a payment to the
electricity generation companies for the difference, and vice
versa.
Bilateral contracts create price certainty for the parties and
limit their exposure to potential volatility in the spot market.
Bilateral contracts are outside the wholesale electricity market
and are not taken into account in the physical dispatch
process, and are not in any way regulated by the Market
Rules. However, the facility exists for the parties to the
bilateral contracts to settle their contracts through the EMCs
settlement system.
UKERC/WP/ESM/2005/004
This paper considers GB electricity market and network regulatory arrangements in the
context of transitioning to a low carbon electricity system. By considering some of the
primary features of a low carbon electricity system and building on themes raised by a
previous UKERC Supply Theme paper (Baker, 2009), the paper attempts to identify what
characteristics an appropriate market and regulatory framework would need to posses.
The paper goes on to consider how existing market arrangements perform in these
areas and the possible need for change.
The aim of the paper is to contribute to the debate on energy market reform that is now
underway. Currently, discussion seems to be focussing primarily on how to ensure
adequate investment in low carbon and, in the medium term, conventional generation to
meet the UKs climate change and security of supply goals. Delivering the necessary
generation capacity is clearly crucial and by reviewing some of the mechanisms that
could be used to encourage investment, this paper attempts to contribute in this area.
However, the paper also addresses other areas where reform may be required but that
have, to date, received less attention; issues such as arrangements to ensure efficient
dispatch and energy balancing, efficient mechanisms to deal with network congestion
and measures necessary to facilitate demand side participation.
The approach taken by the paper is incremental in nature, focussing on how current
market arrangements may need to develop in the coming years, rather than proposing
radical change. It is likely that successfully decarbonising the electricity sector may
ultimately require a fundamentally different market design and that change, particularly
in relation to low-carbon investment, may be required sooner rather than later.
However, the transition to a low carbon electricity system will be gradual and arguably
best served by incremental change in response to demonstrated need.
Contents
1. SUMMARY .......................................................................................................... 3
2. A LOW CARBON ELECTRICITY SECTOR AND ITS IMPLICATIONS FOR MARKET DESIGN .. 4
3. GENERATION INVESTMENT ................................................................................... 5
3.1 THE GENERATION INVESTMENT CHALLENGE ......................................................................5
3.2 IMPACT OF WIND ON ENERGY PRICES ..............................................................................6
3.3 ENERGY-ONLY MARKETS ............................................................................................8
3.4 ENCOURAGING GENERATION INVESTMENT ......................................................................10
3.4.1 Output-based mechanisms. ........................................................................11
3.4.2 Capacity-based mechanisms ......................................................................12
3.5 A SINGLE BUYER .....................................................................................................16
4. ENERGY DISPATCH AND BALANCING IN A LOW CARBON ELECTRICITY SYSTEM ......... 17
4.1 PROBLEMS WITH EXISTING MARKET ARRANGEMENTS. .........................................................17
4.2 SYSTEM RESERVES ...................................................................................................19
4.3 MARKET LIQUIDITY .................................................................................................19
4.4 A SEPARATE MARKET FOR INTERMITTENT GENERATION? .....................................................20
4.5 THE CASE FOR A MORE INTEGRATED APPROACH TO MARKET DESIGN ......................................21
4.6 INTEGRATED MARKETS AND THE NEED FOR PRIORITY DISPATCH ............................................21
4.7 BALANCING MARKET SIGNALS WITH DEPLOYMENT RISKS FOR WIND. .......................................22
5.NETWORK CONGESTION AND APPROPRIATE NETWORK INVESTMENT SIGNALS........... 23
5.1 CONGESTION VOLUME .............................................................................................23
5.2 MINIMISING CONGESTION COSTS .................................................................................25
5.3 TRANSMISSION INVESTMENT SIGNALS ...........................................................................26
6. ENCOURAGING DEMAND-SIDE PARTICIPATION..................................................... 26
6.1 REDUCING CAPACITY AND RESERVE ..............................................................................27
6.2 SETTLEMENT IMPACTS ..............................................................................................27
7. NETWORK REGULATION .................................................................................... 29
7.1 ENSURING EFFICIENT NETWORK UTILISATION...................................................................30
7.2 DELIVERING NETWORK INVESTMENT IN A TIMELY FASHION ..................................................31
7.3 FUNDING NECESSARY NETWORK INVESTMENT ..................................................................32
8. CONCLUSIONS .................................................................................................. 33
8.1 ENCOURAGING GENERATION INVESTMENT ......................................................................34
8.2 ENERGY DISPATCH AND BALANCING .............................................................................36
8.3 DEMAND RESPONSE ................................................................................................38
8.4 NETWORK REGULATION............................................................................................39
1. Summary
The electricity system will have a pivotal role in delivering the UKs climate change
obligations and longer term aspirations. The need to accommodate large amounts of
renewable, mainly intermittent, generation by 2020, replace generation expected to
decommission in the same timescales and the need to effectively decarbonise the
electricity system by 2030 through the introduction of new low-carbon technologies,
represent huge challenges to be overcome. In addition, the need to partially electrify
the heat and transport sectors with the introduction of heat pumps and electric vehicles
will require further investment in generation capacity and could, if not adequately
managed, place additional strains on the electricity infrastructure.
If these challenges are to be met, some aspects of electricity network regulation and
market arrangements will need to change. While the current arrangements have
arguably served us well, delivering secure electricity supplies and driving out
unnecessary cost, they are designed around controllable conventional generation
capacity serving demand that varies in a predictable fashion. Tomorrows electricity
sector will, however, look very different with a more flexible demand base required to
accommodate a low carbon generation fleet that contains large amounts of high capital
cost, intermittent and inflexible capacity.
By considering some of the primary characteristics of a low carbon electricity sector, this
paper attempts to identify things that an appropriate market and regulatory regime will
need to do well. The analysis suggests that the highly disaggregated, energy-only and
illiquid nature of the current market, reinforced by asymmetrical and non cost-reflective
imbalance charges, may not be the most appropriate arrangement for dealing with
intermittent renewable generation. A return to a more integrated market design is
proposed, operating seamlessly down to real time in order to provide the liquidity and
near real time balancing opportunities necessary to accommodate intermittent
generation technologies such as wind. A more integrated electricity market would allow
reserves, energy, and potentially, network requirements, to be optimised
simultaneously.
The introduction of wind and other intermittent generation technologies will cause
energy prices to fall on average, but become far more volatile. This will make financing
both capital intensive low carbon and peaking generation more difficult and, given the
general scepticism over the ability of emissions trading to fully internalise the costs of
carbon, there would seem to be a need for additional measures to support investment.
Options include the extension of existing supplier-based obligations, Feed in Tariffs
(FiTs), capacity obligations or capacity payments. In addition, the more radical option of
creating a central entity to procure both capacity and energy has been suggested.
The need to retain substantial amounts of conventional plant to back-up intermittent
generation can be expected to significantly increase network congestion. The current
market arrangements, where network requirements are only considered one hour before
real time, arguably encourage practices that increase congestion volumes and make the
resolution of that congestion unnecessarily expensive. In addition to incurring
unnecessary costs, which are ultimately borne by electricity customers, the current
arrangements also cause network investment to appear overly attractive. The adoption
of more integrated market arrangements would allow earlier consideration of network
requirements and a more cost effective resolution of network congestion.
The development of a more responsive demand side to accommodate a partially
intermittent and inflexible generation fleet will be facilitated by the introduction of
advanced or smart metering, where domestic and small commercial customers are
metered on a half-hourly basis. This will require fundamental changes to the settlement
processes and it will be necessary to ensure that increased data retrieval, handling and
aggregation requirements do not impose unnecessary burdens on small customers or
impede the development of a more responsive demand base.
Finally, the paper briefly addresses some regulatory issues and makes the case for a
regulatory environment that more effectively supports innovation and equalizes
incentives for network investment and operational alternatives. Regulation will also
need to ensure that network investments necessary to accommodate renewable and low
carbon generation can be delivered in a timely fashion and that those investments can
be adequately financed.
3. Generation investment
3.1 The generation investment challenge
The UK will need to invest heavily in generation capacity over the coming years.
Deploying sufficient renewable and low-carbon generation to meet our climate change
obligations while replacing plant expected to close as a result of E U Large Combustion
Plant and Industrial Emissions Directives, is likely to require some 140 billion of
investment by 2025 (Ernst & Young, 2009). Delivering the necessary investment will be
all the more challenging given that many other countries will be embaking on similar
programmes. It is estimated that global investment in generation could run at around
$550 billion/year until 2030, with investment in Europe running at some 60
billion/year over the same period (E.on, 2009). This international dimension is
particularly relevant given that the UK will be heavily dependent on large European-
based energy companies, operating away from their home markets, to deliver the
investment in generation capacity required. The UK will, therefore, need to maintain a
regulatory and market environment that is attractive to these companies, who clearly
have choices in terms of where they invest.
The following paragraphs in this section consider how the introduction of intermittent
generation technologies such as wind make the investment challenge more difficult and
why the current GB energy only electricity market may not be the most appropriate
design to deliver the investment required to achieve our climate change goals. The
section then moves on to consider the various options available for encouraging
necessary investment, drawing on experience from the UK and overseas.
High wind
/Mwh
Night
Peak
Low wind
MWh
Figure 1. Impact of wind on energy prices
Indeed, as wind penetration increases, spot electricity prices may fall to zero and even
go negative on those occasions when windy conditions coincide with periods of low
demand and wind generators attempt to retain access to operational subsidies 1. The
negative impact of wind generation on wholesale electricity prices has been observed in
countries such as Denmark, Germany and Spain, which have installed large amounts of
wind generation as a proportion of their peak electrical demand (Poyry, 2010). In fact,
the impact of wind energy on electricity prices could be even more pronounced in GB,
due the island nature of the electricity system with little interconnection currently
available to smooth variations in supply.
While the injection of large amounts of zero-marginal cost energy will tend to reduce
average wholesale electricity prices, the intermittent nature of that energy will introduce
some additional, offsetting, costs. Intermittent generation such as wind cannot be relied
upon to be available at any particular point in time and contributes little to security of
supply. Back up resources in the form of flexible conventional generation or
alternatives such as demand response, storage or support from adjacent systems via
interconnection capacity, therefore need to be retained on almost a MW for MW basis 2 in
order to operate when wind output is low. Conventional generation, typically CCGTs,
operating in this role will experience decreasing utilisation as wind capacity builds, but
be expected to operate more flexibly, i.e. starting and stopping more frequently and
being part-loaded in order to provide both upwards and downwards reserve. These
modes of operation will introduce operational inefficiencies and associated costs, which
will need to be spread over a reducing number of running hours.
In addition to the impact of these operational costs, consumers will also need to bear
the costs of retaining conventional back up plant in service and of eventually funding
its replacement. A sustainable electricity system with high levels of intermittent
renewable generation will require far more generating capacity than there is peak
demand to be supplied and the fixed costs of this additional capacity will need to be
supported through more volatile energy prices or, alternatively, mechanisms that reward
capacity explicitly.
Renewable generation receives Renewable Obligation Certificates (ROCs) for each MW of energy
generated. These can be sold on to suppliers to help meet their obligation to purchase energy from
renewable sources, thereby creating an income stream. During periods when the combination of
renewable output and that of inflexible sources such as nuclear exceed demand, it is worth
renewable generation paying suppliers to take energy in order to retain access to the ROC income
stream. In these circumstances the spot price of energy would enter negative territory.
1
Conventional generation is generally held to a have a 95% availability forecast error over peak
demand periods. For wind to have a similar firmness, its capacity would need to be factored down
to approximately 4% of installed capacity.
2
Notable examples of energy only markets are Australia (NEM), ERCPT, Nordpool & Ontario
New Electricity Trading Arrangements (NETA). Introduced to replace the E&W Electricity Pool in
April 2000. The bilateral trading arrangements introduced by NETA were extended to Scotland in
April 2005 with the introduction of the British Electricity Trading & Transmission Arrangements
(BETTA).
4
investment. However, as wind and nuclear capacity builds, conventional capacity will
experience reducing utilisation and marginal prices will increasingly be set by lower
variable cost plant. Conventional plant will therefore require ever higher energy prices
during non-windy periods in order to recover investment costs. Low carbon
technologies such as nuclear can expect to see high load factors, however they will also
be disadvantaged as average energy prices decline but become more volatile.
In a recent study to examine how the GB and All-Ireland electricity markets may might
perform as the capacity of wind and low-carbon plant grows, (Poyry, 2009) suggest that
energy price volatility can be expected to increase dramatically, with pricing peaks of
almost 8000/MWh necessary by 2030 to support the continued availability of peaking
plant. Poyry also conclude that the incidence of extremely high prices will vary
significantly from year to year due to normal variations in weather, introducing
additional uncertainties for potential investors. It is worth noting, however, that the
Poyry studies assumed demand to be insensitive to price. If demand becomes more
price sensitive through the introduction of smart metering however, the future pricing
peaks predicted by Poyry, which exceed by some margin the accepted value that
customers place on maintaining access to supply6, would be considerably reduced.
Furthermore the Poyry studies take no account of the partial electrification of the heat
and transport sectors, a requirement of achieving the UKs climate change goals, which
would inject a large amount of controllable demand and allow further demand
smoothing. Increased interconnection and storage would have a similar effect.
Notwithstanding this mitigation, the increase in zero and low marginal cost generation
will undoubtedly challenge the ability of an energy-only market to deliver adequate
levels of generation investment. There must be a limit to the extent to which price
sensitivity, particularly during periods of cold weather that often coincide with calm
conditions, can be expected to limit electrical demand. Moreover, energy price spikes
will still be necessary to adequately reward low merit and peaking plant and there is a
concern that periods of extreme, if temporary, energy prices may prove to be
unacceptable from a political or regulatory point of view.
Consumers exposed to real time electricity prices seem likely to press for prices to be
capped and, given the year to year variability suggested by Poyry, it might be difficult to
distinguish between justified price spikes and those resulting from an abuse of market
power (Poyry, 2009). There is a danger, therefore, that regulatory or political
interventions may result in measures that prevent energy prices from rising to the levels
necessary to justify investment in new capacity. Indeed, regulatory and political
pressures have resulted in the application of measures to contain wholesale prices in
Defined as the Value of Lost Load or VOLL, currently assumed to be around 4000/MWh.
many electricity markets and, while not currently applied in GB, price caps have been
applied in the past. It is also worth noting that there are other mechanisms at work
within BETTA that tend to attenuate spot prices, for example the use of contracted
reserve contracts by the GBSO as an alternative to accepting more expensive Balancing
Mechanism7 offers to adjust output in real time.
In conclusion therefore, energy only markets can claim to have the virtue of relative
simplicity, with reliability and generation investment set by market participants, rather
than arbitrary rules. However, reliance on scarcity pricing to recover fixed costs
increases investment uncertainties and finance risk. Furthermore, the ability of scarcity
pricing to stimulate adequate investment will be tested to the extreme by the
introduction of zero-marginal cost intermittent generation technologies, with the
consequent decline in average energy prices and increased price uncertainty and
volatility. While studies such as that carried out by Poyry do not, of themselves, make
the case against energy-only markets and the need to reward for generation capacity
explicitly, they do clearly demonstrate the challenges to be faced.
Balancing Mechanism (BM). The BM commences at market closure, one hour before real time.
Generators (or demand) submit bids and offers to vary output (or demand) and these may be
accepted by the GBSO to ensure final energy balancing and that network congestion is resolved.
7
10
Increasing centralisation
Option A
Option B
Option C
Option D
Option E
Greater carbon
price certainty
alone
Support low
carbon in the
current market
Regulate to limit
high carbon
generation
Separate low
carbon market
Single buyer
agency
Minimum carbon
price guarantee at
currently expected
level
Additional
incentives for low
carbon generation
price above carbon
price
Regulate to drive
decarbonisation
Long term
payments to low
carbon generators
to provide revenue
certainty
Conventional plant
trades in
competitive
market framework
Single agency is
the only purchaser
of electricity
generation
existing and new
low and high
carbon- and only
seller of this on to
suppliers
Competitive
market framework
as today
Competitive
market framework
as today
Competitive
market framework
as today
11
reward the cheapest low carbon technologies (BERR, 2008). Price based mechanisms,
such as FiTs, suffer from uncertainty in terms of actual response to the guaranteed price
and, if that price is incorrectly set, can result in over or under supply (Cory, 2009).
Output based mechanisms also have the potential to distort the energy market. As
indicated in 3.2, increasing wind and nuclear capacity will give rise to the possibility of
wind becoming the marginal plant when periods of low demand coincide with high wind
output. During these periods, wind generation will seek to retain access to ROC income,
driving energy prices into negative territory. Some analysis (Strbac, 2008) suggests
that, taking into account the need to carry addition reserves on part-load thermal plant,
up to 25% of wind energy may need to be rejected when wind capacity exceeds 30 GW.
Clearly, this could have a serious impact of the financial viability of wind as well as other
low carbon technologies such as nuclear, which will be dependent on high energy prices
to recover investment costs.
In order to avoid or reduce the prospect of negative prices, measures such as curtailing
ROC or FiT payments during periods of excess low carbon output could be considered.
Some possibility of low and damaging energy prices would remain however and
attention is likely to turn to the deployment of additional storage or interconnection
capacity in order to artificially boost demand. An alternative approach, albeit involving a
degree of central planning, would be to take a more strategic view of the interactions
between nuclear and wind generation and attempt to optimise the capacity mix.
The premium FiTs discussed in EMA Option B, which top up revenues from the
energy market and provide investors with a guaranteed income, have the advantage over
standard FiT designs of keeping generation involved and interested in the energy
market. Dispatchable renewable generation would be able to respond to energy price
signals and therefore be less likely to contribute to negative price problems. However,
intermittent renewable technologies such as wind are not dispatchable in any
meaningful way and are less able to respond to price signals (Poyry, Elementenergy,
2009). By supplementing energy market revenues, premium FiTs therefore could still act
in a similar fashion to the RO, particularly in the case of intermittent technologies, in
encouraging negative biding during periods of excess low carbon output.
12
both security of supply and investment in low carbon technologies, albeit at the cost of
some complexity in design.
3.4.2.1 Capacity obligations on suppliers
There are numerous examples of supplier-based obligations in Europe (often referred to
as Public Service Obligations), the US and elsewhere. In the US, capacity obligations are
a carryover from the old regional power pool structures in which all participating
suppliers, referred to as Load serving Entities or LSEs, were required to acquire
sufficient capacity to serve their peak demand plus a reliability margin set by the pool.
With the restructuring of the US electricity system in the mid-1990s, many of these
arrangements developed into organized capacity markets (see 3.4.2.2); however, some
of the original pooling arrangements remain8, with capacity being traded bilaterally to
meet obligations in response to demand movements or diversity in demand peaks.
Penalties usually apply in the event of an LSE failing to acquire sufficient generation
capacity to satisfy the obligation, although there is concern that there may not
necessarily be time for the Independent System Operator (ISO) 9, to access capacity in the
event of shortages. Capacity obligations can and often do allow demand-side
participation however, allowing relief in shorter timescales. Some jurisdictions, i.e.
California, have addressed this problem by imposing forward obligations to ensure
potential capacity shortages are identified in good time.
As with all capacitybased obligations that flow from an administered reliability
standard, there are concerns that the value of reliability may not be adequately balanced
against the cost of providing that reliability. Concerns have also been raised in the US
about a lack of market liquidity and that the prices paid for capacity are not always
transparent (Brattle Group, 2009).
Addressing the issue of how capacity obligations might be applied in GB, and taking a
cue from the Renewable Obligation, suppliers could be required to purchase capacity
certificates in proportion to their demand or pay a buyout price, with the proceeds
distributed to certificate holders. As the object would be to ensure both security of
supply and decarbonisation, the obligation would need to recognise the carbonintensity of different technologies, possibly through premium payments for low carbon
technologies or selecting successful bids on the basis of low-carbon emissions as well
as bid price (Gottstein, 2010).
For example, Southwest & Southwest Power Pool covering most of the Southern & South-western
states except California and Texas.
8
Independent System Operator (ISO). A not for profit entity, charged with the operation of the
electricity network and who may also administer the electricity market.
9
13
10
14
portfolio. Individual suppliers may, for example, be prepared to shed market share
rather than commit to new capacity in an uncertain world and might favour one
technology over another. An independent System Operator may well take a more holistic
view but would be sourcing capacity on the basis of generation adequacy rather than
market signals. In the context of the current GB market arrangements, it is difficult to
see how investment to satisfy some non-market based adequacy requirement could coexist with investment on a commercial basis. There is a danger therefore, that placing
an obligation on the System Operator to procure capacity, even as provider of last
resort, could deter normal commercial investment.
3.4.2.3 Capacity payments
A limitation of some early capacity-based obligations and markets was a lack of
incentives to ensure real time plant availability. Although financial penalties for nondelivery are now common, these penalties do not always reflect the real value of
availability during times of system stress. Capacity payment designs are considered
more effective in providing real time availability incentives (Oren, 2000).
Capacity payment mechanisms normally involve a payment being made to every
generator that is available to meet demand for each trading period irrespective of
whether or not the generator is actually required to run. Payments, which are normally
funded via an uplift on suppliers, are usually linked to the value of capacity, i.e. when
the supply position is tight payments will be higher. Capacity payment mechanisms are
invariably associated with more integrated scheduling and dispatch arrangements such
as the England & Wales Pool, which operated from privatisation of the GB electricity
sector in 1990 to the introduction of NETA in 2001.
In the case of the England & Wales Electricity Pool, capacity payments were a function of
the loss of load probability (LOLP)11 and the value of lost load (VOLL)12. If the supply
situation became very tight and LOLP approached unity, then capacity payments could
reach very high levels, capped only by the value of VOLL (currently assumed to be
around 4000/MWh). The all-Ireland Single Electricity Market introduced in 2007 also
incorporates a capacity payment mechanism but utilising a softer link to the fluctuating
value of capacity based on the cost of building efficient open cycle gas fired plant.
LOLP is a measure of the likelihood of insufficient generation capacity being available to meet peak
demand, varying from zero when there is no risk to unity when there is certainty.
11
VOLL is an estimate of the maximum price a customer is prepared to pay to maintain access to
electricity supplies. In practice, VOLL will vary between customer groups and on other
circumstances.
12
15
While linking payments to the scarcity value of capacity incentivises additional provision
during periods of system stress, perversely it also provides an incentive on portfolio
generators to withdraw capacity in order to increase those payments. To some extent
this is a criticism that can be levelled at all capacity mechanisms, however the more
granular nature of capacity payments compared with capacity obligations provides
rather more scope for abuse. Problems associated with the withholding of capacity were
a principal driver behind the abandonment of the E&W Electricity Pool and the
development of a bilateral market with incentives to contract forward (Patrick, 2001).
Other criticisms of capacity payments relate the value of VOLL, which is estimated rather
than set by the market, and the usually simplistic methods used for calculating of the
value of LOLP. In combination, these issues are almost certain to result in a mismatch
between the value of capacity payments and that which would arise from a capacity
market.
As is the case with capacity obligations and markets, the application of capacity
payment mechanisms to date has been linked exclusively to maintaining security of
supply. There seems to be no reason however why a capacity payment mechanism
could not be designed to recognise the carbon intensity of generation in order to
address both decarbonisation and security of supply objectives.
16
13Gate
closure 1 hour before real time, the energy markets close and the Balancing Mechanism
commences. Contractual positions at gate closure are compared with outturn in order to determine
imbalance.
17
14Imbalances
that add to the net system imbalance are treated differently than those that reduce net
imbalance. For example, a generator whose imbalance adds to system imbalance is exposed to the
balancing costs incurred by the GBSO. Generators whose imbalances reduce net imbalance
pay/receive prices related to the short term energy prices. This asymmetry encourages parties to self
balance and penalizes inflexible or intermittent generators.
Operational Trading Reports are available at
http://www.elexon.co.uk/search/default.aspx?qs=operational%report
15
18
The GBSO contracts for Short Term Operational Reserve (STORR) via auctions held three times a
year.
17
19
integrated nature of the sector and the high level of internal trading. Liquidity is also
reduced by the continuous nature of trading and the existence of alternative trading
platforms, which tend to disperse trading activity.
This lack of short term market liquidity acts against the interests of both intermittent
generation such as wind and also small independent players, who have a greater need
for balancing in the shorter term. Prompted by these and more general concerns about
market efficiency, Ofgem has consulted on measures to improve market liquidity and
has threatened action by the end of 2010 if the situation has not sufficiently improved
(Ofgem, 2010).
18
Aggregating wind output over a wide geographic area significantly reduces wind output forecast error
together with associated reserve and capacity requirements. See for example
www.nationalgrid.com/.../GBSQSSIntegratedReliabilityAndEconomicsAssessment.pdf
20
21
sequestrated generation is likely to have higher high marginal costs than nonsequestrated plant due to the associated efficiency penalty.
There is a possibility therefore, that an integrated dispatch process may not minimise
carbon emissions if carbon is incorrectly priced. In the transition to a low-carbon
electricity system, the introduction of a more integrated dispatch process would need to
be accompanied by some means of prioritising low carbon generation. Rather than
dispatching generation on the basis of cost, low carbon generation would need to be
dispatched on the basis of carbon emissions, or some function of marginal cost and
carbon emissions, to ensure that overall emissions were minimised. While low carbon
capacity remained at modest levels, there would be little need to differentiate between
individual generators or technology for the purpose of dispatch. However, as capacity
increased, network or energy-related constraints would become more frequent, and
some means of differentiation would be required to ensure that carbon emissions were
minimised at the lowest possible cost. Differentiation between technologies could be
achieved on the basis of emissions, while differentiation within technologies could be
achieved when necessary on the basis of marginal cost or some other measure, such as
transmission losses.
It is interesting to note that there is some experience of non-marginal cost related
generation dispatch in the UK, albeit in a rather different context. The Central Electricity
Generating Board (CEGB ), which operated a highly detailed centralised dispatch
optimisation process, was able to move seamlessly from dispatching on the basis of
marginal cost to a heat rate based dispatch during the frequent fuel emergencies of
the 19770s & 1980s. Dispatching fossil fired generation on the basis of heat rate
rather than marginal cost resulted in a significant reduction in fuel inputs and, as a
consequence, would have reduced carbon emissions/MWh of electrical energy
generated.
22
While these market signals may simply reflect the economic consequences of
intermittency, they could have a negative impact on deployment or at least on the need
for subsidy to maintain the level of deployment required to deliver climate change goals.
The extent to which wind generation is exposed to market signals varies across Europe.
For example GB chooses to draw no distinction on the basis of generation technology,
exposing the full costs of balancing and imposing technical requirements that require
wind to behave as any other generation even though a system approach may result in
lower overall cost. Germany, on the other hand, protects wind generation from the full
rigour of market and technical signals with the costs of integration falling mainly on the
System Operator. A question to be addressed by the UK and indeed all jurisdictions that
intend to connect large amounts of wind or other intermittent renewable generation is,
therefore, how to balance the exposure of that generation to market signals with the
risks to deployment inherent in those signals particularly given the limited ability of
wind to respond.
The margin of generation capacity over demand is expected to rise from historic levels of around
24% to nearer 90% by 2020
20
Congestion arises when potential power flows exceed the capability of network circuits or
boundaries. Congestion is resolved either by adjusting generation patterns to reduce power flows, or
by increasing network capacity either by investment in primary assets or by operational means.
21
23
presented to the GBSO in the form of individual generator dispatch schedules one hour
before real time, at which point the GBSO is required to establish counter-flows via the
Balancing Mechanism (BM) to ensure that actual power flows do not exceed network
capacity. Secondly, the cost of resolving this congestion is recovered via Balancing Use
of System (BUSoS) charges paid by all trading parties on a per kWh basis and there is
therefore no incentive on parties causing that congestion to modify their behaviour.
In fact, it can be argued that market arrangements currently encourage behaviour that
leads increased network congestion. The separation of energy trading and congestion
management into distinct markets prompts generators to consider how best they can
maximise returns. Consider for example a portfolio generating company with a large
installed wind capacity in Scotland and conventional generation assets on both sides of
the cheviot22 network boundary. The company would contract ahead to supply energy
assuming, due to its intermittent nature, a modest contribution from wind. If,
approaching gate closure, it appeared that wind output would be high, the generator
would need to decide what conventional generation to stand down plant on the export
side of the boundary or plant on the import side. If the company stands plant down on
the export side, potential congestion across the boundary is eased but that plant earns
no income. If however, the company stands down conventional plant in E&W, then
congestion across the boundary is increased and the GBSO is likely to accept bids from
Scottish conventional plant to reduce output. As these bids are invariably less than
variable cost of generation, the Scottish plant earns income by not producing or by
producing less. Furthermore, the conventional plant in E&W that was stood down is now
free to offer replacement energy at a significant premium to market prices.
Market rules therefore allow, in fact encourage, companies to maximise income by
acting in a fashion which is detrimental to the efficient operation of the system (LECG
Consulting, 2010). Ofgem appears to consider that such behaviour amounts to an abuse
of market power and a Market Power License Condition (MPLC)
23was
the 2010 Energy Act. The new Condition gives Ofgem the power to penalise the
withholding or manipulation of output however, given the short term market volatility
that the deployment of wind at scale will bring, deliberate manipulation of output to
exploit network constraints will become more difficult to demonstrate. Furthermore,
even if demonstrated, such behaviour is arguably no more than the expected
commercial response to a particular set of flawed market arrangements. The MPLC
therefore addresses the symptoms of the problem, rather than the problem itself.
The Cheviot boundary is that which cuts the four transmission circuits connecting Scotland with
England, currently having a capacity of around 2.4 GVA.
22
23
http://www.opsi.gov.uk/acts/acts2010/pdf/ukpga_20100027_en.pdf
24
250
200
/MWh
150
100
50
0
1
10
Month (08/09)
Of f ers
Bids
Energy price
Figure 3. Balancing Mechanism bids & offers compared with market Index price,
2008/09 (National Grid)
24
25
It is instructive to compare the costs of resolving congestion under current market rules
with those observed under previous market regimes, for example the England & Wales
Electricity Pool, which precede the introduction of NETA/BETTA. Under the old Pool
rules, the cost of resolving congestion was essentially the difference between the offers
made by generation that was ultimately constrained and offers made by replacement
plant at the day-ahead schedule stage. For similar technologies, i.e. where coal plant
was displaced by other coal plant in order to resolve a network constraint, the difference
in day ahead offers may only have been a few pounds and maybe around 15/MWh
where CCGT plant was replaced by coal. Resolving network congestion under BETTA is
therefore around ten times as expensive as was the case under the E&W Electricity Pool
rules or the old CEGB merit order arrangements which existed before the industry was
privatised.
26
27
The settlement process has the innate ability to allocate actual energy consumption to
the appropriate settlement periods and profiling could probably be extended to
accommodate interruptible demand and ToU tariffs, provided that the shape and timing
of those tariffs were known in advance. Individual profiles could be constructed around
each ToU tariff, once customer response to those tariffs had been demonstrated by
experience. However, while fixed ToU tariffs are an appropriate response to predicable
demand characteristics where the timing of demand and price peaks can readily be
forecast, they will be less so with the growth of intermittent generation. Dynamic ToU
tariffs will be required to respond to variations in energy supply energy prices that can
only be forecast with any accuracy in short timescales.
Truly dynamic ToU tariffs will therefore require energy consumption to be settled on a
half-hourly, rather than a profiled basis. Profiling will clearly need to be retained
though the smart meter rollout process, however it seems likely that there will be a
gradual migration of non-half hourly metered demand to half-hourly settlement over
time. This will have implications for the settlement process. Firstly, profiling would
need to ensure the appropriate half-hourly allocation of energy consumption as the
number of customers being profiled diminished and, secondly, that differences in actual
and estimated consumption continued to be dealt with appropriately. Differences
between actual and estimated energy consumption are allocated to suppliers on the
basis of their market share of non-half hourly metered demand and this may no longer
be appropriate with ever diminishing customer numbers (Elexon, 2008).
A transition to full half hourly settlement will involve a very substantial increase in the
volume of metering data to be processed and the costs of data retrieval, handling and
aggregation will clearly increase. While the central settlement systems may not be
significantly affected as data will be received in an aggregated form, the need to process
half hourly, rather than summated, customer energy consumption will substantially
increase the data volumes to be handled by suppliers. Although modifying existing half
hourly settlement processes, e.g. by extending the period over which half hourly data
may be entered into the settlement system (Frontier Economics, 2007), could mitigate
cost increases to some extent, substantial increases in cost seem unavoidable. An
indication of scale of these additional costs can be inferred from those incurred by
customers who currently elect to be metered on a half-hourly basis. In 2007, the
additional costs associated with data aggregation and collection was estimated at
around 250 (Elexon, 2010). Although there is evidence to suggest that these costs
have reduced, it will be necessary to ensure that overheads are commensurate with the
relatively low energy requirements of individual and do not become a barrier to smart
metering delivering small customer demand response.
A further settlement-related issue is the extent to which current arrangements will
encourage dynamic customer demand response, i.e. response to real time situations.
28
References
Abbad, J. R. (2010). Electricity Market Participation of wind Farms:the success story of
Market Designs.
Committee on Climate Change. (2010). Meeting Carbon Budgets - ensuring a low
carbon recovery.
E.on. (2009). http://www.eon.com/en/downloads/E.ON_Capital_Market_Day_09.pdf.
ENA. (2010). ENA Response to Ofgems Embedding Financeability in a New Regulation"
Consultation.
Ernst & Young. (2009). Securing the UK's Energy Future.
Geen Investment Bank Commission. (June, 2010). Unlocking Investment to Deliver
Future challenges.
IEA. (2008). Design of Power Systems with Large Amounts of Wind Power. Wind Task 25
41
Littlechild. (2007). A Proposal for a Balancing Market to Determine Cash Out Prices.
Natioanl Grid. (2009). Grid Code Working Group - Intermittent Generation Data.
National Grid. (2010). Letter from Paul Whittaker to Scott Phillips, Ofgem; RPI-X@20
Ref 91/10.
Ofgem. (2008). Transmission Access Review - Initial Consultation on Enhanced
Options.
SEDG. (2009). Probabalistic Network Operation and Design standards to Support the
Markets.
42
43
Chapter 3
Lead Authors:
Luisa F. Cabeza (Spain), K.G. Terry Hollands (Canada), Arnulf Jger-Waldau (Italy/Germany),
Michio Kondo (Japan), Charles Konseibo (Burkina Faso), Valentin Meleshko (Russia),
Wesley Stein (Australia), Yutaka Tamaura (Japan), Honghua Xu (China),
Roberto Zilles (Brazil)
Contributing Authors:
Armin Aberle (Singapore/Germany), Andreas Athienitis (Canada), Shannon Cowlin (USA),
Don Gwinner (USA), Garvin Heath (USA), Thomas Huld (Italy/Denmark), Ted James (USA),
Lawrence Kazmerski (USA), Margaret Mann (USA), Koji Matsubara (Japan),
Anton Meier (Switzerland), Arun Mujumdar (Singapore), Takashi Oozeki (Japan),
Oumar Sanogo (Burkina Faso), Matheos Santamouris (Greece), Michael Sterner (Germany),
Paul Weyers (Netherlands)
Review Editors:
Eduardo Calvo (Peru) and Jrgen Schmid (Germany)
333
Chapter 3
3.2.4
3.3
Table 3.2 | International and national projects that collect, process and archive information on solar irradiance resources at the Earths surface.
Available Data Sets
Responsible Institution/Agency
Ground-based solar irradiance from 1,280 sites for 1964 to 2009 provided by national meteorological services around the
world.
National Solar Radiation Database that includes 1,454 ground locations for 1991 to 2005. The satellite-modelled solar
data for 1998 to 2005 provided on 10-km grid. The hourly values of solar data can be used to determine solar resources for
collectors.
European Solar Radiation Database that includes measured solar radiation complemented with other meteorological data
necessary for solar engineering. Satellite images from METEOSAT help in improving accuracy in spatial interpolation. Test
Reference Years were also included.
The Solar Radiation Atlas of Africa contains information on surface radiation over Europe, Asia Minor and Africa. Data
covering 1985 to 1986 were derived from measurements by METEOSAT 2.
The solar data set for Africa based on images from METEOSAT processed with the Heliosat-2 method covers the period 1985
to 2004 and is supplemented with ground-based solar irradiance.
Typical Meteorological Year (Test Reference Year) data sets of hourly values of solar radiation and meteorological parameters
derived from individual weather observations in long-term (up to 30 years) data sets to establish a typical year of hourly data.
Used by designers of heating and cooling systems and large-scale solar thermal power plants.
The solar radiation data for solar energy applications. IEA/SHC Task36 provides a wide range of users with information on
solar radiation resources at Earths surface in easily accessible formats with understandable quality metrics. The task focuses
on development, validation and access to solar resource information derived from surface- and satellite-based platforms.
Solar and Wind Energy Resource Assessment (SWERA) project aimed at developing information tools to simulate RE
development. SWERA provides easy access to high-quality RE resource information and data for users. Covered major areas
of 13 developing countries in Latin America, the Caribbean, Africa and Asia. SWERA produced a range of solar data sets and
maps at better spatial scales of resolution than previously available using satellite- and ground-based observations.
343
3.3.1
Passive solar energy technologies absorb solar energy, store and distribute it in a natural manner (e.g., natural ventilation), without using
mechanical elements (e.g., fans) (Hernandez Gonzalvez, 1996). The term
passive solar building is a qualitative term describing a building that
makes signicant use of solar gain to reduce heating energy consumption based on the natural energy ows of radiation, conduction and
convection. The term passive building is often employed to emphasize
use of passive energy ows in both heating and cooling, including redistribution of absorbed direct solar gains and night cooling (Athienitis and
Santamouris, 2002).
Daylighting technologies are primarily passive, including windows, skylights and shading and reecting devices. A worldwide trend, particularly
in technologically advanced regions, is for an increased mix of passive
and active systems, such as a forced-air system that redistributes passive solar gains in a solar house or automatically controlled shades that
optimize daylight utilization in an ofce building (Tzempelikos et al.,
2010).
The basic elements of passive solar design are windows, conservatories
and other glazed spaces (for solar gain and daylighting), thermal mass,
protection elements, and reectors (Ralegaonkar and Gupta, 2010). With
the combination of these basic elements, different systems are obtained:
direct-gain systems (e.g., the use of windows in combination with walls
able to store energy, solar chimneys, and wind catchers), indirect-gain
systems (e.g., Trombe walls), mixed-gain systems (a combination of
direct-gain and indirect-gain systems, such as conservatories, sunspaces
and greenhouses), and isolated-gain systems. Passive technologies are
integrated with the building and may include the following components:
Windows with high solar transmittance and a high thermal resistance facing towards the Equator as nearly as possible can be
employed to maximize the amount of direct solar gains into the living space while reducing heat losses through the windows in the
heating season and heat gains in the cooling season. Skylights are
also often used for daylighting in ofce buildings and in solaria/
sunspaces.
Building-integrated thermal storage, commonly referred to as thermal mass, may be sensible thermal storage using concrete or brick
materials, or latent thermal storage using phase-change materials
(Mehling and Cabeza, 2008). The most common type of thermal storage is the direct-gain system in which thermal mass is adequately
distributed in the living space, absorbing the direct solar gains.
Storage is particularly important because it performs two essential
functions: storing much of the absorbed direct solar energy for slow
344
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
BIPV/T
Roof
Exhaust
Fan
q
External
Rolling
Shutter
Variable
Speed Fan
Solar
Tilted
Slats
Dryer
Air
Inlet
Geothermal
Pump
HRV
Passive
Slab
Light
Shelf
DHW
Ventilated
Slab
Internal
Rolling
Shutter
Blinds
Side-Fin
Figure 3.2 | Left: Schematic of thermal mass placement and passive-active systems in a house; solar-heated air from building-integrated photovoltaic/thermal (BIPV/T) roof heats
ventilated slab or domestic hot water (DHW) through heat exchanger; HRV is heat recovery ventilator. Right: Schematic of several daylighting concepts designed to redistribute daylight
into the ofce interior space (Athienitis, 2008).
345
346
Chapter 3
3.3.2
Active solar heating and cooling technologies use the Sun and mechanical elements to provide either heating or cooling; various technologies
are discussed here, as well as thermal storage.
3.3.2.1
Solar heating
In a solar heating system, the solar collector transforms solar irradiance into heat and uses a carrier uid (e.g., water, air) to transfer
that heat to a well-insulated storage tank, where it can be used when
needed. The two most important factors in choosing the correct type
of collector are the following: 1) the service to be provided by the
solar collector, and 2) the related desired range of temperature of the
heat-carrier uid. An uncovered absorber, also known as an unglazed
collector, is likely to be limited to low-temperature heat production
(Dufe and Beckman, 2006).
A solar collector can incorporate many different materials and be manufactured using a variety of techniques. Its design is inuenced by the
system in which it will operate and by the climatic conditions of the
installation location.
Flat-plate collectors are the most widely used solar thermal collectors
for residential solar water- and space-heating systems. They are also
used in air-heating systems. A typical at-plate collector consists of an
absorber, a header and riser tube arrangement or a single serpentine
Chapter 3
Single or
Double
Glazing
Pump
Flow
Glazing Frame
Metal Deck
Rubber
Grommet
Serpentine Plastic
Pipe Collector
Box
Flow Passages
Absorber
Plate
Insulation
Backing
Typically
1 1/2 ABS Pipe
Pump Flow
Evacuated-tube collectors are usually made of parallel rows of transparent glass tubes, in which the absorbers are enclosed, connected to
a header pipe (Figure 3.3c). To reduce heat loss within the frame by
convection, the air is pumped out of the collector tubes to generate
a vacuum. This makes it possible to achieve high temperatures, useful
Evacuated-Tube Collectors
ater
ed W
Heat
Insulation
Solar
Energ
Heat
Heat
es to
r Ris
Vapo
Top
ns to
ensed
Cond
Vacuum Indicator
etur
uid R
Botto
fe
Trans
fe
Trans
Copper
Sleeve in
Manifold
Aluminium
Header
Casing
Liq
Copper
Manifold
347
Chapter 3
households with signicant daytime and evening hot water needs; but
it does not work well in households with predominantly morning draws
because sometimes the tanks can lose most of the collected energy
overnight.
Active solar water heaters rely on electric pumps and controllers to circulate the carrier uid through the collectors. Three types of active solar
water-heating systems are available. Direct circulation systems use pumps
to circulate pressurized potable water directly through the collectors.
These systems are appropriate in areas that do not freeze for long periods
and do not have hard or acidic water. Antifreeze indirect-circulation systems pump heat-transfer uid, which is usually a glycol-water mixture,
through collectors. Heat exchangers transfer the heat from the uid to
the water for use (Figure 3.4, right). Drainback indirect-circulation systems
use pumps to circulate water through the collectors. The water in the
collector and the piping system drains into a reservoir tank when the
pumps stop, eliminating the risk of freezing in cold climates. This system should be carefully designed and installed to ensure that the piping
always slopes downward to the reservoir tank. Also, stratication should
be carefully considered in the design of the water tank (Hadorn, 2005).
A solar combisystem provides both solar space heating and cooling as
well as hot water from a common array of solar thermal collectors, usually backed up by an auxiliary non-solar heat source (Weiss, 2003). Solar
combisystems may range in size from those installed in individual properties to those serving several in a block heating scheme. A large number
of different types of solar combisystems are produced. The systems on
the market in a particular country may be more restricted, however,
because different systems have tended to evolve in different countries.
Solar
Collector
A Close-Coupled
Solar
Energy
Solar Water
Heater
Solar Energy
To Taps
Tank
Controller
Boiler
Arrows Show
Direction of Water
Flow Through Copper
Cold
Water
Feed
Figure 3.4 | Generic schematics of thermal solar systems. Left: Passive (thermosyphon). Right: Active system.
348
Pump
Chapter 3
include the heat recovery units, heat exchangers and humidiers. Liquid
sorption techniques have been demonstrated successfully.
3.3.2.3
3.3.2.2
Solar cooling
Solar cooling can be broadly categorized into solar electric refrigeration, solar thermal refrigeration, and solar thermal air-conditioning.
In the rst category, the solar electric compression refrigeration uses
PV panels to power a conventional refrigeration machine (Fong et al.,
2010). In the second category, the refrigeration effect can be produced
through solar thermal gain; solar mechanical compression refrigeration,
solar absorption refrigeration, and solar adsorption refrigeration are the
three common options. In the third category, the conditioned air can be
directly provided through the solar thermal gain by means of desiccant
cooling. Both solid and liquid sorbents are available, such as silica gel
and lithium chloride, respectively.
Solar electrical air-conditioning, powered by PV panels, is of minor interest from a systems perspective, unless there is an off-grid application
(Henning, 2007). This is because in industrialized countries, which have
a well-developed electricity grid, the maximum use of photovoltaics is
achieved by feeding the produced electricity into the public grid.
Solar thermal air-conditioning consists of solar heat powering an absorption chiller and it can be used in buildings (Henning, 2007). Deploying
such a technology depends heavily on the industrial deployment of lowcost small-power absorption chillers. This technology is being studied
within the IEA Task 25 on solar-assisted air-conditioning of buildings,
SHC program and IEA Task 38 on solar air-conditioning and refrigeration, SHC program.
Closed heat-driven cooling systems using these cycles have been known
for many years and are usually used for large capacities of 100 kW
and greater. The physical principle used in most systems is based on
the sorption phenomenon. Two technologies are established to produce
thermally driven low- and medium-temperature refrigeration: absorption and adsorption.
Open cooling cycle (or desiccant cooling) systems are mainly of interest
for the air conditioning of buildings. They can use solid or liquid sorption. The central component of any open solar-assisted cooling system
is the dehumidication unit. In most systems using solid sorption, this
unit is a desiccant wheel. Various sorption materials can be used, such
as silica gel or lithium chloride. All other system components are found
in standard air-conditioning applications with an air-handling unit and
Thermal storage
349
3.3.2.4
For active solar heating and cooling applications, the amount of hot
water produced depends on the type and size of the system, amount of
sun available at the site, seasonal hot-water demand pattern, and installation characteristics of the system (Norton, 2001).
Solar heating for industrial processes is at a very early stage of development in 2010 (POSHIP, 2001). Worldwide, less than 100 operating solar
thermal systems for process heat are reported, with a total capacity of
about 24 MWth (34,000 m collector area). Most systems are at an experimental stage and relatively small scale. However, signicant potential
exists for market and technological developments, because 28% of the
overall energy demand in the EU27 countries originates in the industrial
sector, and much of this demand is for heat below 250C. Education and
knowledge dissemination are needed to deploy this technology.
In the short term, solar heating for industrial processes will mainly be used
for low-temperature processes, ranging from 20C to 100C. With technological development, an increasing number of medium-temperature
applicationsup to 250Cwill become feasible within the market.
According to Werner (2006), about 30% of the total industrial heat
demand is required at temperatures below 100C, which could theoretically be met with solar heating using current technologies. About 57%
of this demand is required at temperatures below 400C, which could
largely be supplied by solar in the foreseeable future.
In several specic industry sectorssuch as food, wine and beverages,
transport equipment, machinery, textiles, and pulp and paperthe
share of heat demand at low and medium temperatures (below 250C)
is around 60% (POSHIP, 2001). Tapping into this low- and mediumtemperature heat demand with solar heat could provide a signicant
opportunity for solar contribution to industrial energy requirements. A
substantial opportunity for solar thermal systems also exists in chemical industries and in washing processes.
Among the industrial processes, desalination and water treatment
(e.g., sterilization) are particularly promising applications for solar
thermal energy, because these processes require large amounts of
350
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
treatment for low-contaminant waste (Gumy et al., 2006). Multipleeffect humidication (MEH) desalination units indirectly use heat
from highly efcient solar thermal collectors to induce evaporation
and condensation inside a thermally isolated, steam-tight container.
These MEH systems are now beginning to appear in the market. Also
see the report on water desalination by CSP (DLR, 2007) and the discussion of SolarPACES Task VI (SolarPACES, 2009b).
In solar drying, solar energy is used either as the sole source of the
required heat or as a supplemental source, and the air ow can be
generated by either forced or free (natural) convection (Fudholi et al.,
2010). Solar cooking is one of the most widely used solar applications
in developing countries (Lahkar and Samdarshi, 2010) though might still
be considered an early stage commercial product due to limited overall
deployment in comparison to other cooking methods. A solar cooker
uses sunlight as its energy source, so no fuel is needed and operating
costs are zero. Also, a reliable solar cooker can be constructed easily and
quickly from common materials.
Anti-Reection Coating
n-Type Semiconductor
Front Contact
Electron (-)
Hole (+)
Recombination
p-Type Semiconductor
Back Contact
3.3.3
3.3.3.1
351
cell is 24.2% for 155.1 cm2 (Bunea et al., 2010). Commercial module
efciencies for wafer-based silicon PV range from 12 to 14% for multicrystalline Si and from 14 to 20% for monocrystalline Si.
Commercial thin-lm PV technologies include a range of absorber
material systems: amorphous silicon (a-Si), amorphous silicon-germanium, microcrystalline silicon, CdTe and CIGS. These thin-lm cells have
an absorber layer thickness of a few m or less and are deposited on
glass, metal or plastic substrates with areas of up to 5.7 m2 (Stein et al.,
2009).
The a-Si solar cell, introduced in 1976 (Carlson and Wronski, 1976) with
initial efciencies of 1 to 2%, has been the rst commercially successful
thin-lm PV technology. Because a-Si has a higher light absorption coefcient than c-Si, the thickness of an a-Si cell can be less than 1 mthat
is, more than 100 times thinner than a c-Si cell. Developing higher efciencies for a-Si cells has been limited by inherent material quality and
by light-induced degradation identied as the Staebler-Wronski effect
(Staebler and Wronski, 1977). However, research efforts have successfully lowered the impact of the Staebler-Wronski effect to around 10%
or less by controlling the microstructure of the lm. The highest stabilized efciencythe efciency after the light-induced degradationis
reported as 10.1% (Benagli et al., 2009).
Higher efciency has been achieved by using multijunction technologies
with alloy materials, e.g., germanium and carbon or with microcrystalline silicon, to form semiconductors with lower or higher bandgaps,
respectively, to cover a wider range of the solar spectrum (Yang and
Guha, 1992; Yamamoto et al., 1994; Meier et al., 1997). Stabilized
efciencies of 12 to 13% have been measured for various laboratory
devices (Green et al., 2010b).
CdTe solar cells using a heterojunction with cadmium sulphide (CdS)
have a suitable energy bandgap of 1.45 electron-volt (eV) (0.232 aJ)
with a high coefcient of light absorption. The best efciency of this
cell is 16.7% (Green et al., 2010b) and the best commercially available
modules have an efciency of about 10 to 11%.
The toxicity of metallic cadmium and the relative scarcity of tellurium
are issues commonly associated with this technology. Although several
assessments of the risk (Fthenakis and Kim, 2009; Zayed and Philippe,
2009) and scarcity (Green et al., 2009; Wadia et al., 2009) are available,
no consensus exists on these issues. It has been reported that this potential hazard can be mitigated by using a glass-sandwiched module design
and by recycling the entire module and any industrial waste (Sinha et
al., 2008).
The CIGS material family is the basis of the highest-efciency thin-lm
solar cells to date. The copper indium diselenide (CuInSe2)/CdS solar
cell was invented in the early 1970s at AT&T Bell Labs (Wagner et al.,
1974). Incorporating Ga and/or S to produce CuInGa(Se,S)2 results in the
benet of a widened bandgap depending on the composition (Dimmler
and Schock, 1996). CIGS-based solar cells have been validated at an
352
Chapter 3
3.3.3.2
Chapter 3
3.3.3.5
3.3.3.3
3.3.3.4
Photovoltaic applications
Photovoltaic systems
353
25,000
Cumulative Grid-Connected
20,000
Cumulative Off-Grid
15,000
10,000
5,000
0
92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
Figure 3.6 | Historical trends in cumulative installed PV power of off-grid and gridconnected systems in the OECD countries (IEA, 2010e). Vertical axis is in peak megawatts.
354
Chapter 3
Grid-connected centralized PV systems perform the functions of centralized power stations. The power supplied by such a system is not
associated with a particular electricity customer, and the system is
not located to specically perform functions on the electricity network
other than the supply of bulk power. Typically, centralized systems are
mounted on the ground, and they are larger than 1 MW.
The economical advantage of these systems is the optimization of installation and operating cost by bulk buying and the cost effectiveness of
the PV components and balance of systems at a large scale. In addition,
the reliability of centralized PV systems can be greater than distributed
PV systems because they can have maintenance systems with monitoring equipment, which can be a smaller part of the total system cost.
Multi-functional PV, daylighting and solar thermal components involving PV or solar thermal that have already been introduced into the built
environment include the following: shading systems made from PV
and/or solar thermal collectors; hybrid PV/thermal (PV/T) systems that
generate electricity and heat from the same panel/collector area; semitransparent PV windows that generate electricity and transmit daylight
from the same surface; faade collectors; PV roofs; thermal energy roof
systems; and solar thermal roof-ridge collectors. Currently, fundamental and applied R&D activities are also underway related to developing
other products, such as transparent solar thermal window collectors, as
well as faade elements that consist of vacuum-insulation panels, PV
panels, heat pump, and a heat-recovery system connected to localized
ventilation.
Solar energy can be integrated within the building envelope and with
energy conservation methods and smart-building operating strategies.
Much work over the last decade or so has gone into this integration,
culminating in the net-zero energy building.
Much of the early emphasis was on integrating PV systems with thermal
and daylighting systems. Bazilian et al. (2001) and Tripanagnostopoulos
(2007) listed methods for doing this and reviewed case studies where
the methods had been applied. For example, PV cells can be laid on
the absorber plate of a at-plate solar collector. About 6 to 20% of the
solar energy absorbed on the cells is converted to electricity; the remaining roughly 80% is available as low-temperature heat to be transferred
to the uid being heated. The resulting unit produces both heat and
Chapter 3
electricity and requires only slightly more than half the area used if the
two conversion devices had been mounted side by side and worked
independently. PV cells have also been developed to be applied to windows to allow daylighting and passive solar gain. Reviews of recent
work in this area are provided by Chow (2010) and Arif Hasan and
Sumathy (2010).
gas, nuclear, oil or biomasscomes from creating a hot uid. CSP simply provides an alternative heat source. Therefore, an attraction of this
technology is that it builds on much of the current know-how on power
generation in the world today. And it will benet not only from ongoing
advances in solar concentrator technology, but also as improvements
continue to be made in steam and gas turbine cycles.
The idea of the net-zero-energy solar building has sparked recent interest. Such buildings send as much excess PV-generated electrical energy
to the grid as the energy they draw over the year. An IEA Task is considering how to achieve this goal (IEA NZEB, 2009). Recent examples for
the Canadian climate are provided by Athienitis (2008). Starting from a
building that meets the highest levels of conservation, these homes use
hybrid air-heating/PV panels on the roof; the heated air is used for space
heating or as a source for a heat pump. Solar water-heating collectors
are included, as is fenestration permitting a large passive gain through
equatorial-facing windows. A key feature is a ground-source heat pump,
which provides a small amount of residual heating in the winter and
cooling in the summer.
Smart solar-building control strategies may be used to manage the collection, storage and distribution of locally produced solar electricity
and heat to reduce and shift peak electricity demand from the grid. An
example of a smart solar-building design is given by Candanedo and
Athienitis (2010), where predictive control based on weather forecasts
one day ahead and real-time prediction of building response are used to
optimize energy performance while reducing peak electricity demand.
3.3.4
355
Chapter 3
(a)
(b)
Reector
Absorber Tube
Curved Mirrors
Curved Mirrors
(c)
(d)
Central Receiver
Reector
Receiver/Engine
Heliostats
Figure 3.7 | Schematic diagrams showing the underlying principles of four basic CSP congurations: (a) parabolic trough, (b) linear Fresnel reector, (c) central receiver/power tower,
and (d) dish systems (Richter et al., 2009).
linear Fresnel reectors is that the installed costs on a per square metre
basis can be lower than for trough systems. However, the annual optical
performance is less than that for a trough.
Central receivers (or power towers), which are one type of point-focus
collector, are able to generate much higher temperatures than troughs
and linear Fresnel reectors, although requiring two-axis tracking as
the Sun moves through solar azimuth and solar elevation. This higher
356
Chapter 3
Dish systems include an ideal optical reector and therefore are suitable
for applications requiring high temperatures. Dish reectors are paraboloid
and concentrate the solar irradiation onto a receiver mounted at the
focal point, with the receiver moving with the dish. Dishes have been
used to power Stirling engines at 900C, and also for steam generation. There is now signicant operational experience with dish/Stirling
engine systems, and commercial rollout is planned. In 2010, the capacity of each Stirling engine is smallon the order of 10 to 25 kWelectric.
The largest solar dishes have a 485-m2 aperture and are in research
facilities or demonstration plants.
In thermal storage, the heat from the solar eld is stored prior to
reaching the turbine. Thermal storage takes the form of sensible or
latent heat storage (Gil et al., 2010; Medrano et al., 2010). The solar
eld needs to be oversized so that enough heat can be supplied to
both operate the turbine during the day and, in parallel, charge the
thermal storage. The term solar multiple refers to the total solar eld
area installed divided by the solar eld area needed to operate the turbine at design point without storage. Thermal storage for CSP systems
needs to be at a temperature higher than that needed for the working uid of the turbine. As such, system temperatures are generally
between 400C and 600C, with the lower end for troughs and the
higher end for towers. Allowable temperatures are also dictated by
the limits of the media available. Examples of storage media include
molten salt (presently comprising separate hot and cold tanks), steam
accumulators (for short-term storage only), solid ceramic particles,
high-temperature phase-change materials, graphite, and high-temperature concrete. The heat can then be drawn from the storage to
generate steam for a turbine, as and when needed. Another type of
storage associated with high-temperature CSP is thermochemical storage, where solar energy is stored chemically. This is discussed more
fully in Sections 3.3.5 and 3.7.5.
Thermal energy storage integrated into a system is an important attribute of CSP. Until recently, this has been primarily for operational
purposes, providing 30 minutes to 1 hour of full-load storage. This
eases the impact of thermal transients such as clouds on the plant,
assists start-up and shut-down, and provides benets to the grid.
Trough plants are now designed for 6 to 7.5 hours of storage, which is
enough to allow operation well into the evening when peak demand
can occur and tariffs are high. Trough plants in Spain are now operating with molten-salt storage. In the USA, Abengoa Solars 280-MW
Solana trough project, planned to be operational by 2013, intends
to integrate six hours of thermal storage. Towers, with their higher
temperatures, can charge and store molten salt more efciently.
Gemasolar, a 17-MWe solar tower project under construction in Spain,
is designed for 15 hours of storage, giving a 75% annual capacity factor (Arce et al., 2011).
Thermal storage is a means of providing dispatchability. Hybridization
with non-renewable fuels is another way in which CSP can be
designed to be dispatchable. Although the back-up fuel itself may
357
3.3.5
Solar fuel technologies convert solar energy into chemical fuels, which
can be a desirable method of storing and transporting solar energy.They
can be used in a much wider variety of higher-efciency applications
than just electricity generation cycles. Solar fuels can be processed into
liquid transportation fuels or used directly to generate electricity in
fuel cells; they can be employed as fuels for high-efciency gas-turbine
cycles or internal combustion engines; and they can serve for upgrading
fossil fuels, CO2 synthesis, or for producing industrial or domestic heat.
The challenge is to produce large amounts of chemical fuels directly
from sunlight in cost-effective ways and to minimize adverse effects on
the environment (Steinfeld and Meier, 2004).
Solar fuels that can be produced include synthesis gas (syngas, i.e.,
mixed gases of carbon monoxide and hydrogen), pure hydrogen (H2)
gas, dimethyl ether (DME) and liquids such as methanol and diesel. The
high energy density of H2 (on a mass basis) and clean conversion give it
attractive properties as a future fuel and it is also used as a feedstock for
many industrial processes. H2 has a higher energy density than batteries,
although batteries have a higher round-trip efciency. However, its very
low energy density on a volumetric basis poses economic challenges
associated with its storage and transport. It will require signicant new
distribution infrastructure and either new designs of internal combustion
engine or a move to fuel cells. Additionally, the synthesis of hydrogen
with CO2 can produce hydrocarbon fuels that are compatible with existing infrastructures. DME gas is similar to liqueed petroleum gas (LPG)
and easily stored. Methanol is liquid and can replace gasoline without
signicant changes to the engine or the fuel distribution infrastructure.
Methanol and DME can be used for fuel cells after reforming, and DME
can also be used in place of LPG. Fischer-Tropsch processes can produce
hydrocarbon fuels and electricity (see Sections 2.6 and 8.2.4).
There are three basic routes, alone or in combination, for producing
storable and transportable fuels from solar energy: 1) the electrochemical route uses solar electricity from PV or CSP systems followed by an
electrolytic process; 2) the photochemical/photobiological route makes
direct use of solar photon energy for photochemical and photobiological
processes; and 3) the thermochemical route uses solar heat at moderate
and/or high temperatures followed by an endothermic thermochemical
process (Steinfeld and Meier, 2004). Note that the electrochemical and
thermochemical routes apply to any RE technology, not exclusively to
solar technologies.
358
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Concentrated
Solar Energy
H2O
Solar Thermolysis
Decarbonization
H2O Splitting
Solar Thermochemical
Cycle
Solar Reforming
Solar Cracking
Fossil Fuels
(NG, Oil, Coal)
Solar
Gasication
Optional CO2/C
Sequestration
Solar Fuels (Hydrogen, Syngas)
Figure 3.8 | Thermochemical routes for solar fuels production, indicating the chemical source of H2: water (H2O) for solar thermolysis and solar thermochemical cycles to produce H2
only; fossil or biomass fuels as feedstock for solar cracking to produce H2 and carbon (C); or a combination of fossil/biomass fuels and H2O/CO2 for solar reforming and gasication to
produce syngas, H2 and carbon monoxide (CO). For the solar decarbonization processes, sequestration of the CO2/C may be considered (from Steinfeld and Meier, 2004; Steinfeld, 2005).
atmosphere or other sources in a synthesis reactor with a nickel catalyst. In this way, a substitute for natural gas is produced that can be
stored, transported and used in gas power plants, heating systems
and gas vehicles (Sterner, 2009).
Solar methane can be produced using water, air, solar energy and a
source of CO2. Possible CO2 sources are biomass, industry processes
or the atmosphere. CO2 is regarded as the carrier for hydrogen in this
energy system. By separating CO2 from the combustion process of
solar methane, CO2 can be recycled in the energy system or stored
permanently. Thus, carbon sink energy systems powered by RE can
be created (Sterner, 2009). The rst pilot plants at the kW scale with
atmospheric CO2 absorption have been set up in Germany, proving the
technical feasibility. Scaling up to the utility MW scale is planned in
the next few years (Specht et al., 2010).
In an alternative conversion step, liquid fuels such as Fischer-Tropsch
diesel, DME, methanol or solar kerosene (jet fuel) can be produced
from solar energy and CO2/water (H2O) for long-distance transportation. The main advantages of these solar fuels are the same range
as fossil fuels (compared to the generally reduced range of electric
vehicles), less competition for land use, and higher per-hectare yields
compared to biofuels. Solar energy can be harvested via natural photosynthesis in biofuels with an efciency of 0.5%, via PV power and
3.4
3.4.1
359
For passive solar technologies, no estimates are available at this time for
the installed capacity of passive solar or the energy generated or saved
through this technology.
For active solar heating, the total installed capacity worldwide was
about 149 GWth in 2008 and 180 GWth in 2009 (Weiss and Mauthner,
2010; REN21, 2010).
In 2008, new capacity of 29.1 GWth, corresponding to 41.5 million m2 of
solar collectors, was installed worldwide (Weiss and Mauthner, 2010).
In 2008, China accounted for about 79% of the installations of glazed
collectors, followed by the EU with 14.5%.
The overall new installations grew by 34.9% compared to 2007. The
growth rate in 2006/2007 was 18.8%. The main reasons for this growth
were the high growth rates of glazed water collectors in China, Europe
and the USA.
In 2008, the global market had high growth rates for evacuated-tube
collectors and at-plate collectors, compared to 2007. The market for
unglazed air collectors also increased signicantly, mainly due to the
installation of 23.9 MWth of new systems in Canada.
Compared to 2007, the 2008 installation rates for new unglazed, glazed
at-plate, and evacuated-tube collectors were signicantly up in Jordan,
Cyprus, Canada, Ireland, Germany, Slovenia, Macedonia (FYROM),
Tunisia, Poland, Belgium and South Africa.
New installations in China, the worlds largest market, again increased
signicantly in 2008 compared to 2007, reaching 21.7 GWth. After a
market decline in Japan in 2007, the growth rate was once again positive in 2008.
Market decreases compared to 2007 were reported for Israel, the Slovak
Republic and the Chinese province of Taiwan.
The main markets for unglazed water collectors are still found in the
USA (0.8 GWth), Australia (0.4 GWth), and Brazil (0.08 GWth). Notable
markets are also in Austria, Canada, Mexico, The Netherlands, South
Africa, Spain, Sweden and Switzerland, with values between 0.07 and
0.01 GWth of new installed unglazed water collectors in 2008.
Comparison of markets in different countries is difcult due to the
wide range of designs used for different climates and different demand
requirements. In Scandinavia and Germany, a solar heating system
will typically be a combined water-heating and space-heating system,
known as a solar combisystem, with a collector area of 10 to 20 m2. In
Japan, the number of solar domestic water-heating systems is large, but
most installations are simple integral preheating systems. The market in
Israel is large due to a favourable climate, as well as regulations mandating installation of solar water heaters. The largest market is in China,
where there is widespread adoption of advanced evacuated-tube solar
360
Chapter 3
To enable comparison, the IEAs Solar Heating and Cooling Programme, together
with the European Solar Thermal Industry Federation and other major solar thermal
trade associations, publish statistics in kWth (kilowatt thermal) and use a factor of
0.7 kWth/m2 to convert square metres of collector area into installed thermal capacity
(kWth).
Chapter 3
Figure 3.9 illustrates the cumulative installed capacity for the top eight
PV markets through 2009, including Germany (9,800 MW), Spain (3,500
MW), Japan (2,630 MW), the USA (1,650 MW), Italy (1,140 MW), Korea
(460 MW), France (370MW) and the Peoples Republic of China (300
MW). By far, Spain and Germany have seen the largest amounts of
growth in installed PV capacity in recent years, with Spain seeing a huge
surge in 2008 and Germany having experienced steady growth over the
last ve years.
10,000
9,000
8,000
Germany
Italy
7,000
Spain
Korea
6,000
Japan
France
5,000
USA
China
4,000
3,000
2,000
1,000
0
2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009
Figure 3.9 | Installed PV capacity in eight markets. Data sources: EurObservER (2009);
IEA (2009c); REN21 (2009); and Jger-Waldau (2010b).
661/2007 has been a major driving force for CSP plant construction and
expansion plans. As of November 2009, 2,340 MWe of CSP projects had
been preregistered for the tariff provisions of the Royal Decree. In the
USA, more than 4,500 MWe of CSP are currently under power purchase
agreement contracts. The different contracts specify when the projects
must start delivering electricity between 2010 and 2015 (Bloem et al.,
2010). More than 10,000 MWe of new CSP plants have been proposed in
the USA. More than 50 CSP electricity projects are currently in the planning phase, mainly in North Africa, Spain and the USA. In Australia, the
federal government has called for 1,000 MWe of new solar plants, covering both CSP and PV, under the Solar Flagships programme. Figure 3.10
shows the current and planned deployment to add more CSP capacity
in the near future.
Hybrid solar/fossil plants have received increasing attention in recent
years, and several integrated solar combined-cycle (ISCC) projects
have been either commissioned or are under construction in the
Mediterranean region and the USA. The rst plant in Morocco (Ain
Beni Mathar: 470 MW total, 22 MW solar) began operating in June
2010, and two additional plants in Algeria (Hassi RMel: 150 MW total,
30 MW solar) and Egypt (Al Kuraymat: 140 MW total, 20 MW solar)
are under construction. In Italy, another example of an ISCC project is
Archimede; however, the plants 31,000-m2 parabolic trough solar eld
will be the rst to use molten salt as the heat transfer uid (SolarPACES,
2009a).
Solar fuel production technologies are in an earlier stage of development. The high-temperature solar reactor technology is typically being
developed at a laboratory scale of 1 to 10 kWth solar power input.
12,000
South Africa
China
10,000
Israel
Jordan
Egypt
8,000
Algeria
Morocco
Tunesia
6,000
Abu Dhabi
Australia
Spain
4,000
USA
2,000
0
1990
2000
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2012
2015
Figure 3.10 | Installed and planned concentrated solar power plants by country (Bloem
et al., 2010).
361
3.4.2
This subsection discusses the industry capacity and supply chain within
the ve technology areas of passive solar, active solar heating and cooling, PV electricity generation, CSP electricity generation and solar fuel
production.
In passive solar technologies, people make up part of the industry
capacity and the supply chain: namely, the engineers and architects
who collaborate to produce passively heated buildings. Close collaboration between the two disciplines has often been missing in the past,
but the dissemination of systematic design methodologies issued by
362
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Figure 3.11 plots the increase in production from 2000 through 2009,
showing regional contributions (Jger-Waldau, 2010a). The compound
annual growth rate in production from 2003 to 2009 was more than
50%.
12,000
Rest of World
10,000
United States
China
8,000
Europe
Japan
6,000
4,000
Solar cell production capacities mean the following: for wafer-silicon-based solar
cells, only the cells; for thin lms, the complete integrated module. Only those companies that actually produce the active circuit (solar cell) are counted; companies
that purchase these circuits and then make modules are not counted.
2,000
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
70,000
60,000
ROW
India
50,000
South Korea
USA
40,000
30,000
China
Europe
Japan
20,000
10,000
0
Estimated
Production
2009
Planned
Capacity
2009
Planned
Capacity
2010
Planned
Capacity
2012
Planned
Capacity
2015
363
Chapter 3
70,000
60,000
50,000
40,000
30,000
20,000
10,000
0
2006
2009
2010
2012
2015
Figure 3.13 | Actual (2006) and announced (2009 to 2015) production capacities of
thin-lm and crystalline silicon-based solar modules (Jger-Waldau, 2010b).
364
Chapter 3
and Haugwitz, 2010; Ruhl et al., 2010). The possible solar cell production will also depend on the material use per Wp. Material consumption
could decrease from the current 8g/Wp to 7g/Wp or even 6g/Wp (which
could increase delivered PV capacity from 31 to 36 to 42 GW, respectively), but this may not be achieved by all manufacturers.
Forecasts of the future costs of vital materials have a high-prole history,
and there is ongoing public debate about possible material shortages
and competition regarding some (semi-)metals (e.g., In and Te) used in
thin-lm cell production. In a recent study, Wadia et al. (2009) explored
material limits for PV expansion by examining the dual constraints of
material supply and least cost per watt for the most promising semiconductors as active photo-generating materials. Contrary to the commonly
assumed scarcity of indium and tellurium, the study concluded that
the currently known economic reserves of these materials would allow
about 10TW of CdTe or CuInS2 solar cells to be installed.
In CSP electricity generation, the solar collector eld is readily scalable,
and the power block is based on adapted knowledge from the existing
power industry such as steam and gas turbines. The collectors themselves
benet from a range of existing skill sets such as mechanical, structural
and control engineers, and metallurgists. Often, the materials or components used in the collectors are already mass-produced, such as glass
mirrors.
By the end of 2010, strong competition had emerged and an increasing number of companies had developed industry-level capability to
supply materials such as high-reectivity glass mirrors and manufactured components. Nonetheless, the large evacuated tubes designed
specically for use in trough/oil systems for power generation remain
a specialized component, and only two companies (Schott and Solel)
have been capable of supplying large orders of tubes, with a third
company (Archimedes) now emerging. The trough concentrator itself
comprises know-how in both structures and thermally sagged glass mirrors. Although more companies are now offering new trough designs
and considering alternatives to conventional rear-silvered glass (e.g.,
polymer-based reective lms), the essential technology of concentration remains unchanged. Direct steam generation in troughs is under
demonstration, as is direct heating of molten salt, but these designs are
not yet commercially available. As a result of its successful operational
history, the trough/oil technology comprised most of the CSP installed
capacity in 2010.
Linear Fresnel and central-receiver systems comprise a high level of
know-how, but the essential technology is such that there is the potential for a greater variety of new industry participants. Although only a
couple of companies have historically been involved with central receivers, new players have entered the market over the last few years. There
are also technology developers and projects at the demonstration level
(China, USA, Israel, Australia, Spain). Central-receiver developers are
aiming for higher temperatures, and, in some cases, alternative heat
transfer uids such as molten salts. The accepted standard to date has
been to use large heliostats, but many of the new entrants are pursuing
much smaller heliostats to gain potential cost reductions through highvolume mass production. The companies now interested in heliostat
development range from optics companies to the automotive industry
looking to diversify. High-temperature steam receivers will benet from
existing knowledge in the boiler industry. Similarly, with linear Fresnel,
a range of new developments are occurring, although not yet as developed as the central-receiver technology.
Dish technology is much more specialized, and most effort presently
has been towards developing the dish/Stirling concept as a commercial
product. Again, the technology can be developed as specialized components through specic industry know-how such as the Stirling engine
mass-produced through the automotive industry.
Within less than 10 years prior to 2010, the CSP industry has gone from
negligible activity to over 2,400 MWe either commissioned or under
construction. A list of new CSP plants and their characteristics can be
found at the IEA SolarPACES web site.3 More than ten different companies are now active in building or preparing for commercial-scale
plants, compared to perhaps only two or three who were in a position to
build a commercial-scale plant three years ago. These companies range
from large organizations with international construction and project
management expertise who have acquired rights to specic technologies, to start-ups based on their own technology developed in-house. In
addition, major independent power producers and energy utilities are
playing a role in the CSP market.
The supply chain does not tend to be limited by raw materials, because
the majority of required materials are bulk commodities such as glass,
steel/aluminium, and concrete. The sudden new demand for the specic
solar salt mixture material for molten-salt storage is claimed to have
impacted supply. At present, evacuated tubes for trough plants can be
produced at a sufcient rate to service several hundred MW per year.
However, expanded capacity can be introduced readily through new factories with an 18-month lead time.
Solar fuel technology is still at an emerging stagethus, there is no
supply chain in place at present for commercial applications. However,
solar fuels will comprise much of the same solar-eld technology being
deployed for other high-temperature CSP systems, with solar fuels
requiring a different receiver/reactor at the focus and different downstream processing and control. Much of the downstream technology,
such as Fischer-Tropsch liquid fuel plants, would come from existing
expertise in the petrochemical industry. The scale of solar fuel demonstration plants is being ramped up to build condence for industry,
which will eventually expand operations.
3
See: www.solarpaces.org.
365
Chapter 3
Steam reforming of natural gas for hydrogen production is a conventional industrial-scale process that produces most of the worlds
hydrogen today, with the heat for the process derived from burning a
signicant proportion of the fossil fuel feedstock. Using concentrated
solar power, instead, as the source of the heat embodies solar energy in
the fuel. The solar steam-reforming of natural gas and other hydrocarbons, and the solar steam-gasication of coal and other carbonaceous
materials yields a high-quality syngas, which is the building block for a
wide variety of synthetic fuels including Fischer-Tropsch-type chemicals,
hydrogen, ammonia and methanol (Steinfeld and Meier, 2004).
3.4.3
Impact of policies4
366
Most successful solar policies are tailored to the barriers posed by specic applications. Across technologies, there is a need to offset relatively
high upfront investment costs (Denholm et al., 2009). Yet, in the case
of utility-scale CSP and PV projects, substantial and long-term investments are required at levels that exceed solar applications in distributed
markets. Solar heating and cooling technologies are included in many
policies, yet the characteristics of their applications differ from electricity-generating technologies. Policies based on energy yield rather than
collector surface area are generally preferred for various types of solar
thermal collectors (IEA, 2007). See Section 1.5 for further discussion.
Similar to other renewable sources, there is ongoing discussion about
the merits of existing solar policies to spur innovation and accelerate
deployment using cost-effective measures. Generallyand as discussed
Chapter 3
in Chapter 11the most successful policies are those that send clear,
long-term and consistent signals to the market. In addition to targeted
economic policies, government action through educationally based
schemes (e.g., workshops, workforce training programs and seminars)
and engagement of regulatory organizations are helping to overcome
many of the barriers listed in this section.
3.5
This section discusses how direct solar energy technologies are part of
the broader energy framework, focusing specically on the following:
low-capacity energy demand; district heating and other thermal loads;
PV generation characteristics and the smoothing effect; and CSP generation characteristics and grid stabilization. Chapter 8 addresses the
broader technical and institutional options for managing the unique
characteristics, production variability, limited predictability and locational dependence of some RE technologies, including solar, as well as
existing experience with and studies associated with the costs of that
integration.
3.5.1
There can be comparative advantages for using solar energy rather than
non-renewable fuels in many developing countries. Within a country, the
advantages can be higher in un-electried rural areas compared to urban
areas. Indeed, solar energy has the advantage, due to being modular, of
being able to provide small and decentralized supplies, as well as large
centralized ones. For more on integrated buildings and households, see
Section 8.3.2.
In a wide range of countries, particularly those that are not oil producers,
solar energy and other forms of RE can be the most appropriate energy
source. If electricity demand exceeds supply, the lack of electricity can
prevent development of many economic sectors. Even in countries with
high solar energy sustainable development potential, RE is often only considered to satisfy high-power requirements such as the industrial sector.
However, large-scale technologies such as CSP are often not available to
them due, for example, to resource conditions or suitable land area availability. In such cases, it is reasonable to keep the electricity generated near
the source to provide high amounts of power to cover industrial needs.
Applications that have low power consumption, such as lighting in rural
areas, can primarily be satised using onsite PVeven if the business plan
for electrication of the area indicates that a grid connection would be
more protable. Furthermore, the criteria to determine the most suitable
technological option for electrifying a rural area should include benets
such as local economic development, exploiting natural resources, creating jobs, reducing the countrys dependence on imports, and protecting
the environment.
5
3.5.2
Highly insulated buildings can be heated easily with relatively lowtemperature district-heating systems, where solar energy is ideal, or
quite small quantities of renewable-generated electricity (Boyle, 1996).
A district cooling and heating system (DCS) can provide both cooling
and heating for blocks of buildings. Since the district heating system
already makes the outdoor pipe network available, a district cooling system becomes a viable solution to the cooling demand of buildings. There
are already many DCS installations in the USA, Europe, Japan and other
Asian countries because this system has many advantages compared to
a decentralized cooling system. For example, it takes full advantage of
economy of scale and diversity of cooling demand of different buildings,
reduces noise and structure load, and saves considerable equipment area.
It also allows greater exibility in designing the building by removing the
cooling tower on the roof and chiller plant in the building or on the roof,
and it can provide more reliable and exible services through a specialized professional team in cold-climate areas (Shu et al., 2010). For more
on RE integration in district heating and cooling networks, see Section
8.2.2.3.
In China, Greece, Cyprus and Israel, solar water heaters make a signicant
contribution to supplying residential energy demand. In addition, solar
water heating is widely used for pool heating in Australia and the USA.
In countries where electricity is a major resource for water heating (e.g.,
Australia, Canada and the USA), the impact of numerous solar domestic
water heaters on the operation of the power grid depends on the utilitys load management strategy. For a utility that uses centralized load
switching to manage electric water heater load, the impact is limited to
fuel savings. Without load switching, the installation of many solar water
heaters may have the additional benet of reducing peak demand on the
grid. For a utility that has a summer peak, the time of maximum solar
water heater output corresponds with peak electrical demand, and there is
a capacity benet from load displacement of electric water heaters. Largescale deployment of solar water heating can benet both the customer
and the utility. Another benet to utilities is emissions reduction, because
solar water heating can displace the marginal and polluting generating
plant used to produce peak-load power.
Combining biomass and low-temperature solar thermal energy could provide zero emissions and high capacity factors to areas with less frequent
direct-beam solar irradiance. In the short term, local tradeoffs exist for
areas that have high biomass availability due to increased cloud cover
and rainfall. However, solar technology is more land-efcient for energy
production and greatly reduces the need for biomass growing area and
biomass transport cost. Some optimum ratio of CSP and biomass supply
is likely to exist at each site. Research is being conducted on tower and
dish systems to develop technologiessuch as solar-driven gasication of
biomassthat optimally combine both these renewable resources. In the
longer term, greater interconnectedness across different climate regimes
may provide more stability of supply as a total grid system; this situation
could reduce the need for occasional fuel supply for each individual CSP
system.
367
3.5.3
368
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
3.5.4
3.6
3.6.1
Environmental impacts
No consensus exists on the premium, if any, that society should pay for
cleaner energy. However, in recent years, there has been progress in
analyzing environmental damage costs, thanks to several major projects
to evaluate the externalities of energy in the USA and Europe (Gordon,
2001; Bickel and Friedrich, 2005; NEEDS, 2009; NRC, 2010). Solar energy
has been considered desirable because it poses a much smaller environmental burden than non-renewable sources of energy. This argument
has almost always been justied by qualitative appeals, although this
is changing.
Results for damage costs per kilogram of pollutant and per kWh were
presented by the International Solar Energy Society in Gordon (2001).
The results of studies such as NEEDS (2009), summarized in Table 3.3
for PV and in Table 3.4 for CSP, conrm that RE is usually comparatively
benecial, though impacts still exist. In comparison to the gures presented for PV and CSP here, the external costs associated with fossil
generation options, as summarized in Chapter 10.6, are considerably
higher, especially for coal-red generation.
Considering passive solar technology, higher insulation levels provide
many benets, in addition to reducing heating loads and associated
costs (Harvey, 2006). The small rate of heat loss associated with high
levels of insulation, combined with large internal thermal mass, creates
a more comfortable dwelling because temperatures are more uniform.
This can indirectly lead to higher efciency in the equipment supplying the heat. It also permits alternative heating systems that would not
Table 3.3 | Quantiable external costs for photovoltaic, tilted-roof, single-crystalline silicon, retrot, average European conditions; in US2005 cents/kWh (NEEDS, 2009).
2005
2025
2050
Health Impacts
0.17
0.14
0.10
Biodiversity
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
Material Damage
0.00
0.00
0.00
Land Use
Total
N/A
0.01
0.01
0.18
0.17
0.12
Table 3.4 | Quantiable external costs for concentrating solar power; in US2005 cents/
kWh (NEEDS, 2009).
2005
2025
2050
Health Impacts
0.65
0.10
0.06
Biodiversity
0.03
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Material Damage
0.01
0.00
0.00
Land Use
N/A
N/A
N/A
0.69
0.10
0.06
Total
369
Chapter 5
Hydropower
Coordinating Lead Authors:
Arun Kumar (India) and Tormod Schei (Norway)
Lead Authors:
Alfred Ahenkorah (Ghana), Rodolfo Caceres Rodriguez (El Salvador),
Jean-Michel Devernay (France), Marcos Freitas (Brazil), Douglas Hall (USA),
nund Killingtveit (Norway), Zhiyu Liu (China)
Contributing Authors:
Emmanuel Branche (France), John Burkhardt (USA), Stephan Descloux (France),
Garvin Heath (USA), Karin Seelos (Norway)
Review Editors:
Cristobal Diaz Morejon (Cuba) and Thelma Krug (Brazil)
437
Chapter 5
Hydropower
Table 5.2 | Power generation capacity in GW and TWh/yr (2005) and estimated changes
(TWh/yr) due to climate change by 2050. Results are based on an analysis using the SRES
A1B scenario in 12 different climate models (Milly et al., 2008), UNEP world regions and
data for the hydropower system in 2005 (US DOE, 2009) as presented in Hamududu and
Killingtveit (2010).
TWh/yr (PJ/yr)
Change by 2050
TWh/yr (PJ/yr)
Africa
22
90 (324)
0.0 (0)
Asia
246
996 (3,586)
2.7 (9.7)
Europe
177
517 (1,861)
-0.8 (-2.9)
North America
161
655 (2,358)
0.3 (1)
South America
119
661 (2,380)
0.3 (1)
Oceania
13
40 (144)
0.0 (0)
TOTAL
737
2931 (10,552)
2.5 (9)
In general the results given in Table 5.2 are consistent with the (mostly
qualitative) results given in previous studies (IPCC, 2007b; Bates et al.,
2008). For Europe, the computed reduction (-0.2%) has the same sign,
but is less than the -6% found by Lehner et al. (2005). One reason could
be that Table 5.2 shows changes by 2050 while Lehner et al. (2005) give
changes by 2070, so a direct comparison is difcult.
It can be concluded that the overall impacts of climate change on the
existing global hydropower generation may be expected to be small, or
even slightly positive. However, results also indicated substantial variations in changes in energy production across regions and even within
countries (Hamududu and Killingtveit, 2010).
Insofar as a future expansion of the hydropower system will occur incrementally in the same general areas/watersheds as the existing system,
these results indicate that climate change impacts globally and averaged across regions may also be small and slightly positive.
Still, uncertainty about future impacts as well as increasing difculty of
future systems operations may pose a challenge that must be addressed
in the planning and development of future HPP (Hamududu et al., 2010).
Indirect effects on water availability for energy purposes may occur if
water demand for other uses such as irrigation and water supply for
households and industry rises due to the climate change. This effect is
difcult to quantify, and it is further discussed in Section 5.10.
5.3
In a recent study (Hamududu and Killingtveit, 2010), the regional and
global changes in hydropower generation for the existing hydropower
system were computed, based on a global assessment of changes in
river ow by 2050 (Milly et al., 2005, 2008) for the SRES A1B scenario
using 12 different climate models. The computation was done at the
country or political region (USA, Canada, Brazil, India, China, Australia)
level, and summed up to regional and global values (see Table 5.2).
REGION
Head and also installed capacity (size) are often presented as criteria for
the classication of hydropower plants. The main types of hydropower,
however, are run-of-river, reservoir (storage hydro), pumped storage,
and in-stream technology. Classication by head and classication by
size are discussed in Section 5.3.1. The main types of hydropower are
presented in Section 5.3.2. Maturity of the technology, status and
449
Hydropower
Chapter 5
5.3.1
Table 5.3 | Small-scale hydropower by installed capacity (MW) as dened by various countries
Country
Reference Declaration
Brazil
30
Canada
<50
China
50
EU Linking Directive
20
India
25
Norway
10
Norwegian Ministry of Petroleum and Energy. Facts 2008. Energy and Water Resources in Norway; p.27
Sweden
1.5
USA
5100
US National Hydropower Association. 2010 Report of State Renewable Portfolio Standard Programs (US
RPS)
450
Norwegian Water Resources and Energy Directorate, Water resource act and
regulations, 2001.
Chapter 5
5.3.2
Hydropower
Hydropower plants are often classied in three main categories according to operation and type of ow. Run-of-river (RoR), storage (reservoir)
and pumped storage HPPs all vary from the very small to the very large
scale, depending on the hydrology and topography of the watershed. In
addition, there is a fourth category called in-stream technology, which is
a young and less-developed technology.
5.3.2.1
Run-of-River
A RoR HPP draws the energy for electricity production mainly from the
available ow of the river. Such a hydropower plant may include some
short-term storage (hourly, daily), allowing for some adaptations to the
demand prole, but the generation prole will to varying degrees be
dictated by local river ow conditions. As a result, generation depends
on precipitation and runoff and may have substantial daily, monthly or
seasonal variations. When even short-term storage is not included, RoR
HPPs will have generation proles that are even more variable, especially when situated in small rivers or streams that experience widely
varying ows.
5.3.2.2
Storage Hydropower
Hydropower projects with a reservoir are also called storage hydropower since they store water for later consumption. The reservoir
reduces the dependence on the variability of inow. The generating
stations are located at the dam toe or further downstream, connected
to the reservoir through tunnels or pipelines. (Figure 5.6). The type and
design of reservoirs are decided by the landscape and in many parts of
the world are inundated river valleys where the reservoir is an articial
lake. In geographies with mountain plateaus, high-altitude lakes make
up another kind of reservoir that often will retain many of the properties
Dam
Penstock
Powerhouse
Switch Yard
Tailrace
Desilting
Tank
Diversion
Weir
Headrace
Forebay
Penstock
Powerhouse
Tailrace
Intake
Stream
5.3.2.3
Pumped storage
may form cascades along a river valley, often with a reservoir-type HPP
in the upper reaches of the valley that allows both to benet from the
cumulative capacity of the various power stations. Installation of RoR
Pumped storage plants are not energy sources, but are instead storage
devices. In such a system, water is pumped from a lower reservoir into
an upper reservoir (Figure 5.7), usually during off-peak hours, while ow
is reversed to generate electricity during the daily peak load period or at
451
Hydropower
Chapter 5
5.3.3
Upper Reservoir
Pumping
Pumped Storage
Power Plant
Generating
Lower
Reservoir
5.3.3.1
other times of need. Although the losses of the pumping process make
such a plant a net energy consumer overall, the plant is able to provide
large-scale energy storage system benets. In fact, pumped storage is
the largest-capacity form of grid energy storage now readily available
worldwide (see Section 5.5.5).
Efciency
5.3.2.4
Spillway
Diversion Canal
Irrigation Canal
Switch Yard
Powerhouse
Tailrace Channel
452
Chapter 5
Hydropower
have lower efciency, and efciency can also be reduced due to wear
and abrasion caused by sediments in the water. The rest of the potential
energy is lost as heat in the water and in the generator.
In addition, some energy losses occur in the headrace section where
water ows from the intake to the turbines, and in the tailrace section
taking water from the turbine back to the river downstream. These losses,
called head loss, reduce the head and hence the energy potential for the
power plant. These losses can be classied either as friction losses or
singular losses. Friction losses depend mainly on water velocity and the
roughness in tunnels, pipelines and penstocks.
Efciency () [%]
5.3.3.2
Tunnelling capacity
In hydropower projects, tunnels in hard and soft rock are often used for
transporting water from the intake to the turbines (headrace), and from the
turbine back to the river, lake or fjord downstream (tailrace). In addition,
tunnels are used for a number of other purposes when the power station
is placed underground, for example for access, power cables, surge shafts
100
Francis
Kaplan
90
80
Pelton
70
Crossow
60
50
Propeller
40
30
20
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
453
Hydropower
Chapter 5
and ventilation. Tunnels are increasingly favoured for hydropower construction as a replacement for surface structures like canals and penstocks.
Tunnelling technology has improved greatly due to the introduction
of increasingly efcient equipment, as illustrated by Figure 5.10 (Zare
and Bruland, 2007). Today, the two most important technologies for
hydropower tunnelling are the drill and blast method and the use of
tunnel-boring machines (TBM).
The drill and blast method is the conventional method for tunnel excavation in hard rock. Thanks to the development in tunnelling technology,
excavation costs have been reduced by 25%, or 0.8%/yr, over the past 30
years (see Figure 5.10).
TBMs excavate the entire cross section in one operation without the use
of explosives. TBMs carry out several successive operations: drilling, support of the ground traversed and construction of the tunnel. The diameter
of tunnels constructed can be from <1 m (micro tunnelling) up to 15 m.
The excavation progress of the tunnel is typically from 30 up to 60 m/day.
3,000
2,500
In addition, for HPPs with reservoirs, their storage capacity can be lled
up by sediments, which requires special technical mitigation measures
or plant design.
Lysne et al. (2003) reported that the effects of sediment-induced wear of
turbines in power plants can be, among others:
All of these effects are associated with revenue losses and increased
maintenance costs. Several promising concepts for sediment control at
intakes and mechanical removal of sediment from reservoirs and for
settling basins have been developed and practised. A number of authors
(Mahmood, 1987; Morris and Fan, 1997; ICOLD, 1999; Palmieri et al.,
2003; White, 2005) have reported measures to mitigate the sedimentation problems by better management of land use practices in upstream
watersheds to reduce erosion and sediment loading, mechanical removal
of sediment from reservoirs and design of hydraulic machineries aiming
to resist the effect of sediment passing through them.
2,000
5.3.4
1,500
1,000
500
0
1975
1979
1983
1988
1995
2005
Figure 5.10 | Developments in tunnelling technology: the trend in excavation costs for a
60 m2 tunnel, in USD2005 per metre (adapted from Zare and Bruland, 2007).
5.3.3.3
Although sedimentation problems are not found in all rivers (see Section
5.6.1.4), operating a hydropower project in a river with a large sediment
load comes with serious technical challenges.
Specically, increased sediment load in the river water induces wear
on hydraulic machinery and other structures of the hydropower plant.
Deposition of sediments can obstruct intakes, block the ow of water
through the system and also impact the turbines. The sediment-induced
wear of the hydraulic machinery is more serious when there is no room
for storage of sediments.
Renovation, modernization and upgrading (RM&U) of old power stations is often less costly than developing a new power plant, often has
relatively smaller environment and social impacts, and requires less time
for implementation. Capacity additions through RM&U of old power
stations can therefore be attractive. Selective replacement or repair of
identied hydro powerhouse components like turbine runners, generator
windings, excitation systems, governors, control panels or trash cleaning
devices can reduce costs and save time. It can also lead to increased
efciency, peak power and energy availability of the plant (Prabhakar
and Pathariya, 2007). RM&U may allow for restoring or improving
environmental conditions in already-regulated areas. Several national
programmes for RM&U are available. For example, the Research Council
of Norway recently initiated a program with the aim to increase power
production in existing hydropower plants and at the same time improve
environmental conditions.10 The US Department of Energy has been
using a similar approach to new technology development since 1994
when it started the Advanced Hydropower Turbine Systems Program
that emphasized simultaneous improvements in energy and environmental performance (Odeh, 1999; Cada, 2001; Sale et al., 2006a).
Normally the life of hydroelectric power plants is 40 to 80 years.
Electromechanical equipment may need to be upgraded or replaced
after 30 to 40 years, however, while civil structures like dams, tunnels
10 Centre for Environmental Design of Renewable Energy: www.cedren.no/.
454
Chapter 5
Hydropower
etc. usually function longer before they requires renovation. The lifespan of properly maintained hydropower plants can exceed 100 years.
Using modern control and regulatory equipment leads to increased reliability (Prabhakar and Pathariya, 2007). Upgrading hydropower plants
calls for a systematic approach, as a number of hydraulic, mechanical,
electrical and economic factors play a vital role in deciding the course
of action. For techno-economic reasons, it can also be desirable to
consider up-rating (i.e., increasing the size of the hydropower plant)
along with RM&U/life extension. Hydropower generating equipment
with improved performance can also be retrotted, often to accommodate market demands for more exible, peaking modes of operation.
Most of the existing worldwide hydropower equipment in operation
will need to be modernized to some degree by 2030 (SER, 2007).
Refurbished or up-rated hydropower plants also result in incremental
increases in hydropower generation due to more efcient turbines and
generators.
In addition, existing infrastructure without hydropower plants (like
existing barrages, weirs, dams, canal fall structures, water supply
schemes) can also be reworked by adding new hydropower facilities. The majority of the worlds 45,000 large dams were not built
for hydropower purposes, but for irrigation, ood control, navigation
and urban water supply schemes (WCD, 2000). Retrotting these
5.4
5.4.1
Existing generation
1973
2008
Africa 2.2%
Asia 7.2%
Non-OECD
Europe
2.1%
Middle East
0.3%
Latin
America
7.2%
Asia 25.5%
Non-OECD
Europe
1.5%
Former
USSR 9.4%
Latin America
20.5%
Africa 3%
Former
USSR 7.3%
Middle East
0.3%
OECD 72%
OECD 41.9%
Figure 5.11 | 1973 and 2008 regional shares of hydropower production (IEA, 2010a).
455
Hydropower
Chapter 5
Rest of World;
1007; 31%
Sweden; 69; 2%
Venezuela; 87; 3%
PR of China;
585; 18%
Japan; 83; 2%
India; 114; 3%
Despite the signicant growth in hydroelectric production, the percentage share of hydroelectricity on a global basis has dropped during the
last three decades (1973 to 2008), from 21 to 16%. This is because
electricity demand and the deployment of other energy technologies
have increased more rapidly than hydropower generating capacity.
Norway; 141; 4%
Canada;
383; 12%
Brasil;
370; 11%
United
States;
282; 9%
Russia; 167; 5%
5.4.2
Table 5.4 | Major hydroelectricity producer countries with total installed capacity and percentage of hydropower generation in the electricity mix. Source: IJHD (2010).
Country
China
200
Norway
Brazil
84
Brazil
USA
78.2
Venezuela
73.4
Canada
74.4
Canada
59.0
Russia
49.5
Sweden
48.8
India
38
Russia
19.0
Norway
29.6
India
17.5
Japan
27.5
China
15.5
France
21
Italy
14.0
Italy
20
301.6
World
926.1
456
99
83.9
France
8.0
14.3
World
15.9
Chapter 5
5.4.3
Impact of policies12
5.4.3.1
Hydropower
investment capital, and international carbon markets offer one possible route to that capital. Out of the 2,062 projects registered by the
CDM Executive Board (EB) by 1 March 2010, 562 were hydropower
projects. When considering the predicted volumes of Certied Emission
Reductions to be delivered, registered hydropower projects are expected
to avoid more than 50 Mt of carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions per year
by 2012. China, India, Brazil and Mexico represent roughly 75% of the
hosted projects.
5.4.3.2
Project nancing
5.4.3.3
457
Hydropower
5.4.3.4
Classication by size
Chapter 5
biomass and carbon uxes (see Section 5.6.3). As such, the PDI rule may
inadvertently impede the development of socially benecial hydropower
projects, while at the same time supporting less benecial projects. The
European Emission Trading Scheme and related trading markets similarly treat small- and large-scale hydropower stations differently.17
5.5
5.5.1
14 Dcret n2000-1196, Decree on capacity limits for different categories of systems for
the generation of electricity from renewable sources that are eligible for the feed-in
tariff: www.legifrance.gouv.fr.
15 EEG, 2009 - Act on Granting Priority to Renewable Energy and Mineral Sources:
bundesrecht.juris.de/eeg_2009/.
Grid-independent applications
Hydropower can be delivered through national and regional interconnected electric grids, through local mini-grids and isolated grids, and can
also serve individual customers through captive plants. Water mills in
England, Nepal, India and elsewhere, which are used for grinding cereals, for lifting water and for powering machinery, are early testimonies
of hydropower being used as captive power in mechanical and electrical
form. The tea and coffee plantation industries as well as small islands
and developing states have used and still make use of hydropower to
meet energy needs in isolated areas.
Captive power plants (CPPs) are dened here as plants set up by any
person or group of persons to generate electricity primarily for the
person or the groups members (Indian Electricity Act, 2003). CPPs are
often found in decentralized isolated systems and are generally built by
private interests for their own electricity needs. In deregulated electricity
markets that allow open access to the grid, hydropower plants are also
sometimes installedfor captive purposes by energy-intensive industries
such as aluminium smelters, pulp and paper mills, mines and cement factories in order to weather short-term market uncertainties and volatility
(Shukla et al., 2004). For governments of emerging economies such as
India facing shortages of electricity, CPPs are also a means to cope with
unreliable power supply systems and higher industrial tariffs by encouraging decentralized generation and private participation (Shukla et al.,
2004).
5.5.2
13 The Renewables Obligation Order 2006, No. 1004 (ROO 2006): www.statutelaw.
gov.uk.
Rural electrication
458
Chapter 5
5.5.3
Hydropower
459
Hydropower
5.5.4
Electricity systems worldwide rely upon widely varying amounts of hydropower today. In this range of hydropower capabilities, electric system
operators have developed economic dispatch methodologies that take
into account the unique role of hydropower, including coordinating the
operation of hydropower plants with other types of generating units. In
particular, many thermal power plants (coal, gas or liquid fuel, or nuclear
energy) require considerable lead times (often four hours for gas turbines
and over eight hours for steam turbines) before they attain an optimum
thermal efciency at which point fuel consumption and emissions per
unit output are minimum. In an integrated system, the considerable exibility provided by storage HPPs can be used to reduce the frequency
of start ups and shut downs of thermal plants; to maintain a balance
between supply and demand under changing demand or supply patterns and thereby reduce the load-following burden on thermal plants;
and to increase the amount of time that thermal units are operated at
their maximum thermal efciency. In some regions, for instance, hydroelectric power plants are used to follow varying peak load demands
while nuclear or fossil fuel power plants are operated as base-load units.
Chapter 5
5.5.5
Pumped hydropower storage can further increase the support of other
resources. In cases with pumped hydropower storage, pumps can use
the output from thermal plants during times that they would otherwise operate less efciently at part load or be shut down (i.e., low load
periods). The pumped storage plant then keeps water in reserve for generating power during peak period demands. Pumped storage has much
the same ability as storage HPPs to provide balancing and regulation
services.
Pumped storage hydropower is usually not a source for energy, however.
The hydraulic, mechanical and electrical efciencies of pumped storage
determine the overall cycle efciency, ranging from 65 to 80% (Egr
and Milewski, 2002). If the upstream pumping reservoir is also used as
a traditional reservoir the inow from the watershed may balance out
the energy loss caused by pumping. If not, net losses lead to pumped
460
Hydropower
1,000,000
Compressed Air/Thermal
10,000
1,000
Batteries
1 month
AA-CAES, RWE/GE,
Project
3d
100
32 h
In Operation
7d
16 h
Pumped Storage
Compressed Air
8h
10
4h
Under Construction/
Project
Chapter 5
Batteries
Thermal Storage
2h
1h
1
1
10
100
1,000
10,000
that adequate total annual energy demand can be met. Strong interconnections between diverse hydropower resources or between
hydro-dominated and thermal-dominated power systems have been
used in existing systems to ensure adequate energy generation (see
Section 8.2.1.3). In the future, interconnection to other renewable
resources could also ensure adequate energy. Wind and direct solar
power, for instance, can be used to reduce demands on hydropower,
either by allowing dams to save their water for later release in peak periods or letting storage or pumped storage HPPs consume excess energy
produced in off-peak hours.
5.6
461
Chapter 7
Wind Energy
Coordinating Lead Authors:
Ryan Wiser (USA), Zhenbin Yang (China)
Lead Authors:
Maureen Hand (USA), Olav Hohmeyer (Germany), David Ineld (United Kingdom),
Peter H. Jensen (Denmark), Vladimir Nikolaev (Russia), Mark OMalley (Ireland),
Graham Sinden (United Kingdom/Australia), Arthouros Zervos (Greece)
Contributing Authors:
Nam Darghouth (USA), Dennis Elliott (USA), Garvin Heath (USA), Ben Hoen (USA),
Hannele Holttinen (Finland), Jason Jonkman (USA), Andrew Mills (USA),
Patrick Moriarty (USA), Sara Pryor (USA), Scott Schreck (USA), Charles Smith (USA)
Review Editors:
Christian Kjaer (Belgium/Denmark) and Fatemeh Rahimzadeh (Iran)
535
Wind Energy
Chapter 7
loading for offshore plants, and changes in sea ice and/or permafrost
conditions may also inuence access for performing wind power plant
O&M (Laakso et al., 2003). One study focusing on northern Europe
found substantial declines in sea ice under reasonable climate change
scenarios (Claussen et al., 2007). Other meteorological drivers of turbine
loading may also be inuenced by climate change but are likely to be
secondary in comparison to changes in resource magnitude, weather
extremes, and icing issues (Pryor and Barthelmie, 2010).
Power in
Wind
Rated Power
Power Captured
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.1.1
Generating electricity from the wind requires that the kinetic energy of
moving air be converted to mechanical and then electrical energy, thus
the engineering challenge for the wind energy industry is to design costeffective wind turbines and power plants to perform this conversion.
The amount of kinetic energy in the wind that is theoretically available
for extraction increases with the cube of wind speed. However, a turbine
only captures a portion of that available energy (see Figure 7.3).
550
Rotor RPM
Power
Wind Speed
Cut-In Speed
Region I
Region II
Rated Speed
Cut-Out Speed
Region III
Figure 7.3 | Conceptual power curve for a modern variable-speed wind turbine (US
DOE, 2008).
Chapter 7
Wind Energy
7.3.1.2
In the 1980s, larger machines were rated at around 100 kW and primarily
relied on aerodynamic blade stall to control power production from the
xed blades. These turbines generally operated at one or two rotational
speeds. As turbine size increased over time, development went from stall
control to full-span pitch control in which turbine output is controlled by
pitching (i.e., rotating) the blades along their long axis (EWEA, 2009). In
addition, a reduction in the cost of power electronics allowed variable
speed wind turbine operation. Initially, variable speeds were used to
smooth out the torque uctuations in the drive train caused by wind
turbulence and to allow more efcient operation in variable and gusty
winds. More recently, almost all electric system operators require the
continued operation of large wind power plants during electrical faults,
together with being able to provide reactive power: these requirements
have accelerated the adoption of variable-speed operation with power
electronic conversion (see Section 7.3.3 for a summary of power conversion technologies, Section 7.5 for a fuller discussion of electric system
integration issues, and Chapter 8 for a discussion of reactive power and
broader issues with respect to the integration of RE into electricity systems). Modern wind turbines typically operate at variable speeds using
full-span blade pitch control. Blades are commonly constructed with
composite materials, and towers are usually tubular steel structures that
taper from the base to the nacelle at the top (EWEA, 2009).
Over the past 30 years, average wind turbine size has grown signicantly (Figure 7.6), with the largest fraction of onshore wind turbines
installed globally in 2009 having a rated capacity of 1.5 to 2.5 MW; the
average size of turbines installed in 2009 was 1.6 MW (BTM, 2010). As
of 2010, wind turbines used onshore typically stand on 50- to 100-m
towers, with rotors that are often 50 to 100 m in diameter; commercial
Horizontal-Axis Turbines
Vertical-Axis Turbines
Figure 7.4 | Early wind turbine designs, including horizontal and vertical axis turbines (South et al., 1983).
551
Wind Energy
Chapter 7
Rotor Blade
Wind
Direction
D
ireectio
io
on
on
FFor
or aan
n
Upwind
Rotor
Wind
Direction
Nacelle with
Gearbox and
Generator
Low-Speed
Shaft
Rotor
Diameter
Swept Area
of Blades
Gear Box
Pitch
Generator
Rotor
Hub
Controller
Anemometer
Wind
Direction
Brake
Hub
Height
Yaw
Drive
Blades
Yaw
Motor
Tower
Tower
High-Speed
Shaft
Nacelle
Wind Vane
Transformer
Figure 7.5 | Basic components of a modern, horizontal-axis wind turbine with a gearbox (Design by the National Renewable Energy Laboratory (NREL)).
machines with rotor diameters and tower heights in excess of 125 m are
operating, and even larger machines are under development. Modern
turbines operate with rotational speeds ranging from 12 to 20 revolutions per minute (RPM), which compares to the faster and potentially
more visually disruptive speeds exceeding 60 RPM common of the
smaller turbines installed during the 1980s.13 Onshore wind turbines
are typically grouped together into wind power plants, sometimes also
called wind projects or wind farms. These wind power plants are often 5
to 300 MW in size, though smaller and larger plants do exist.
The main reason for the continual increase in turbine size to this point
has been to minimize the levelized generation cost of wind energy
13 Rotational speed decreases with larger rotor diameters. The acoustic noise resulting
from tip speeds greater than 70 to 80 m/s is the primary design criterion that governs
rotor speed.
552
Chapter 7
Wind Energy
320
250m
20,000kW
300
280
260
Future Wind
Turbines
150m
10,000kW
240
220
125m
5,000kW
200
180
100m
3,000kW
160
140
120
100
80m
1,800kW
50m
750kW
80
60
40
70m
1,500kW
17m
75kW
30m
300kW
20
0
1980- 19901990 1995
19952000
20002005
20052010
2010-?
2010-?
Future
Future
Figure 7.6 | Growth in size of typical commercial wind turbines (Design by NREL).
As a result of these and other developments, onshore wind energy technology is already being commercially manufactured and deployed on a
large scale. Moreover, modern wind turbines have nearly reached the
theoretical maximum of aerodynamic efciency, with the coefcient of
performance rising from 0.44 in the 1980s to about 0.50 by the mid
2000s.14 The value of 0.50 is near the practical limit dictated by the
drag of aerofoils and compares with the Lanchester-Betz theoretical
limit of 0.593 (see Section 7.3.1.1). The design requirement for wind
turbines is normally 20 years with 4,000 to 7,000 hours of operation
(at and below rated power) each year depending on the characteristics
of the local wind resource. Given the challenges of reliably meeting this
design requirement, O&M teams work to maintain high plant availability despite component failure rates that have, in some instances, been
higher than expected (Echavarria et al., 2008). Though wind turbines are
reportedly under-performing in some contexts (Li, 2010), data collected
through 2008 show that modern onshore wind turbines in mature markets can achieve an availability of 97% or more (Blanco, 2009; EWEA,
2009; IEA, 2009).
These results demonstrate that the technology has reached sufcient
commercial maturity to allow large-scale manufacturing and deployment. Nonetheless, additional advances to improve reliability, increase
electricity production and reduce costs are anticipated, and are discussed
in Section 7.7. Additionally, most of the historical technology advances
have occurred in developed countries. Increasingly, however, developing
countries are investigating the use of wind energy, and opportunities for
14 Wind turbines achieve maximum aerodynamic efciency when operating at wind
speeds corresponding to power levels below the rated power level (see Region II in
Figure 7.3). Aerodynamic efciency is limited by the control system when operating
at speeds above rated power (see Region III in Figure 7.3).
7.3.1.3
The rst offshore wind power plant was built in 1991 in Denmark,
consisting of eleven 450 kW wind turbines. Offshore wind energy technology is less mature than onshore, and has higher investment and
O&M costs (see Section 7.8). By the end of 2009, just 1.3% of global
installed wind power capacity was installed offshore, totalling 2,100
MW (GWEC, 2010a).
The primary motivation to develop offshore wind energy is to provide access
to additional wind resources in areas where onshore wind energy development is constrained by limited technical potential and/or by planning
and siting conicts with other land uses. Other motivations for developing
offshore wind energy include: the higher-quality wind resources located
at sea (e.g., higher average wind speeds and lower shear near hub height;
wind shear refers to the general increase in wind speed with height);
the ability to use even larger wind turbines due to avoidance of certain
land-based transportation constraints and the potential to thereby gain
additional economies of scale; the ability to build larger power plants than
onshore, gaining plant-level economies of scale; and a potential reduction
in the need for new, long-distance, land-based transmission infrastructure
553
Wind Energy
554
Chapter 7
lower than used for onshore wind power plants due to reduced wind
shear offshore relative to onshore.
Lower power plant availabilities and higher O&M costs have been common for offshore wind energy relative to onshore wind both because of
the comparatively less mature state of offshore wind energy technology
and because of the inherently greater logistical challenges of maintaining and servicing offshore turbines (Carbon Trust, 2008b; UKERC, 2010).
Wind energy technology specically tailored for offshore applications
will become more prevalent as the offshore market expands, and it is
expected that larger turbines in the 5 to 10 MW range may come to
dominate this market segment (EU, 2008). Future technical advancement possibilities for offshore wind energy are described in Section 7.7.
7.3.2
Wind turbines in the 1970s and 1980s were designed using simplied
design models, which in some cases led to machine failures and in other
cases resulted in design conservatism. The need to address both of these
issues, combined with advances in computer processing power, motivated designers to improve their calculations during the 1990s (Quarton,
1998; Rasmussen et al., 2003). Improved design and testing methods
have been codied in International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
standards, and the rules and procedures for Conformity Testing and
Certication of Wind Turbines (IEC, 2010) relies upon these standards.
Certication agencies rely on accredited design and testing bodies to
provide traceable documentation of the execution of rules and specications outlined in the standards in order to certify turbines, components
or entire wind power plants. The certication system assures that a wind
turbine design or wind turbines installed in a given location meet common guidelines relating to safety, reliability, performance and testing.
Figure 7.7(a) illustrates the design and testing procedures required to
obtain a wind-turbine type certication. Plant certication, shown in
Figure 7.7(b), requires a type certicate for the turbine and includes procedures for evaluating site conditions and turbine design parameters
associated with that specic site, as well as other site-specic conditions
including soil properties, installation and plant commissioning.
Insurance companies, nancing institutions and power plant owners
normally require some form of certication for plants to proceed, and
the IEC standards therefore provide a common basis for certication to
reduce uncertainty and increase the quality of wind turbine products
available in the market (EWEA, 2009). In emerging markets, the lack of
highly qualied testing laboratories and certication bodies limits the
opportunities for manufacturers to obtain certication according to IEC
standards and may lead to lower-quality products. As markets mature
and design margins are compressed to reduce costs, reliance on internationally recognized standards is likely to become even more widespread
to assure consistent performance, safety and reliability of wind turbines.
Chapter 7
Wind Energy
Site Conditions
Assessment
Design Basis
Evaluation
Type Certicate
Design Basis
Evaluation
Design
Evaluation
Foundation Design
Evaluation
Manufacturing
Evaluation
Foundation
Manufacturing
Evaluation
Integrated Load
Analysis
Wind Turbine/RNA
Design Evaluation
Support Structure
Design Evaluation
Other Installations
Design Evaluation
Wind Turbine/RNA
Manuf. Surveillance
Support Structure
Manuf. Surveillance
Other Installations
Manuf. Surveillance
Type Testing
Transportation &
Install Surveillance
Type Characteristics
Measurements
Commissioning
Surveillance
Project Characteristics
Measurements
Final Evaluation
Optional Module
Final Evaluation
Optional Module
Type Certicate
Project Certicate
Operational &
Maintainance Surveillance
Figure 7.7 | Modules for (a) turbine type certication and (b) wind power plant certication (IEC, 2010).
Notes: RNA refers to Rotor Nacelle Assembly. The authors thank the IEC for permission to reproduce information from its International Standard IEC 61400-22 ed.1.0 (2010). All such
extracts are copyright of IEC, Geneva, Switzerland. All rights reserved. Further information on the IEC is available from www.iec.ch. IEC has no responsibility for the placement and
context in which the extracts and contents are reproduced by the authors, nor is IEC in any way responsible for the other content or accuracy therein. Copyright 2010 IEC Geneva,
Switzerland, www.iec.ch.
7.3.3
555
Wind Energy
Chapter 7
7.4
The wind energy market expanded substantially in the 2000s, demonstrating the commercial and economic viability of the technology and
industry, and the importance placed on wind energy development by
a number of countries through policy support measures. Wind energy
expansion has been concentrated in a limited number of regions, however, and wind energy remains a relatively small fraction of global
electricity supply. Further expansion of wind energy, especially in regions
of the world with little wind energy deployment to date and in offshore
locations, is likely to require additional policy measures.
This section summarizes the global (Section 7.4.1) and regional (Section
7.4.2) status of wind energy deployment, discusses trends in the wind
energy industry (Section 7.4.3) and highlights the importance of policy
actions for the wind energy market (Section 7.4.4).
7.4.1
The majority of the capacity has been installed onshore, with offshore
installations constituting a small proportion of the total market. About 2.1
GW of offshore wind turbines were installed by the end of 2009; 0.6 GW
were installed in 2009, including the rst commercial offshore wind power
plant outside of Europe, in China (GWEC, 2010a). Many of these offshore
installations have taken place in the UK and Denmark. Signicant offshore
wind power plant development activity, however, also exists in, at a minimum, other EU countries, the USA, Canada and China (e.g., Mostafaeipour,
2010). Offshore wind energy is expected to develop in a more signicant
way in the years ahead as the technology advances and as onshore wind
energy sites become constrained by local resource availability and/or siting
challenges in some regions (BTM, 2010; GWEC, 2010a).
The total investment cost of new wind power plants installed in 2009 was
USD2005 57 billion (GWEC, 2010a). Direct employment in the wind energy
sector in 2009 has been estimated at roughly 190,000 in the EU and
85,000 in the USA. Worldwide, direct employment has been estimated at
approximately 500,000 (GWEC, 2010a; REN21, 2010).
Despite these trends, wind energy remains a relatively small fraction of
worldwide electricity supply. The total wind power capacity installed by the
end of 2009 would, in an average year, meet roughly 1.8% of worldwide
electricity demand, up from 1.5% by the end of 2008, 1.2% by the end of
2007, and 0.9% by the end of 2006 (Wiser and Bolinger, 2010).
7.4.2
The countries with the highest total installed wind power capacity by the
end of 2009 were the USA (35 GW), China (26 GW), Germany (26 GW),
Spain (19 GW) and India (11 GW). After its initial start in the USA in the
1980s, wind energy growth centred on countries in the EU and India during the 1990s and the early 2000s. In the late 2000s, however, the USA and
then China became the locations for the greatest annual capacity additions (Figure 7.9).
Regionally, Europe continues to lead the market with 76 GW of cumulative installed wind power capacity by the end of 2009, representing 48%
of the global total (Asia represented 25%, whereas North America
180
60
50
150
40
120
30
90
20
60
10
30
0
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
Figure 7.8 | Global annual wind power capacity additions and cumulative capacity (Data sources: GWEC, 2010a; Wiser and Bolinger, 2010).
556
2007
2008
2009
Chapter 7
Wind Energy
40
35
2006
2007
30
2008
2009
25
20
15
10
5
0
US
China
Germany
Spain
India
Italy
France
UK
Portugal
Denmark
Figure 7.9 | Top-10 countries in cumulative wind power capacity (Date source: GWEC, 2010a).
16
14
2006
2007
12
2008
2009
10
8
6
4
2
0
Europe
North America
Asia
Latin America
Africa &
Middle East
Pacic
Figure 7.10 | Annual wind power capacity additions by region (Data source: GWEC, 2010a).
Note: Regions shown in the gure are dened by the study.
557
Wind Energy
Chapter 7
201 GW
324 GW
26 GW
Total Additions
25 GW
100
90
Other
80
Coal
Natural Gas
70
Wind
60
50
40
30
20
7.4.3
10
0
EU
US
EU
2000-2009
US
2009
Figure 7.11 | Relative contribution of electricity supply types to gross capacity additions
in the EU and the USA (Data sources: EWEA, 2010b; Wiser and Bolinger, 2010).
Note: The other category includes other forms of renewable energy, nuclear energy,
and fuel oil.
Industry development
The growing maturity of the wind energy sector is illustrated not only
by wind power capacity additions, but also by trends in the wind energy
industry. In particular, major established companies from outside the
traditional wind energy industry have become increasingly involved in
the sector. For example, there has been a shift in the type of companies
developing, owning and operating wind power plants, from relatively
small independent power plant developers to large power generation
22
20
Approximate Wind Penetration, End of 2009
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
TOTAL
Japan
Brazil
China
Turkey
Canada
Australia
France
Sweden
US
Austria
India
Italy
UK
Netherlands
Greece
Germany
Ireland
Spain
Portugal
Denmark
Figure 7.12 | Approximate annual average wind electricity penetration in the twenty countries with the greatest installed wind power capacity (Wiser and Bolinger, 2010).
roughly 11% of all newly installed net electric capacity additions came
from new wind power plants; in 2009 alone, that gure was probably
more than 20%.16
16 Worldwide capacity additions from 2000 through 2007 come from historical data
from the US Energy Information Administration. Capacity additions for 2008 and
2009 are estimated based on historical capacity growth from 2000 to 2007. The focus here is on capacity additions in GW terms, though it is recognized that electricity
generation technologies often have widely divergent average capacity factors, and
that the contribution of wind energy to new electricity demand (in GWh terms) may
differ from what is presented here.
558
Chapter 7
scale power plants, higher capacity and offshore turbines, and lower
wind speeds. More generally, the signicant contribution of wind energy
to new electric capacity investment in several regions of the world has
attracted a broad range of players across the industry supply chain,
from local site-focused engineering rms to global vertically integrated
utilities. The industrys supply chain has also become increasingly competitive as a multitude of rms seek the most protable balance between
vertical integration and specialization (BTM, 2010; GWEC, 2010a).
Despite these trends, the global wind turbine market remains somewhat
regionally segmented, with just six countries hosting the majority of
wind turbine manufacturing (China, Denmark, India, Germany, Spain
and the USA). With markets developing differently, market share for turbine supply has been marked by the emergence of national industrial
champions, the entry of highly focused technology innovators and the
arrival of new start-ups licensing proven technology from other regions
(Lewis and Wiser, 2007). Regardless, the industry continues to globalize:
Europes turbine and component manufacturers have penetrated the
North American and Asian markets, and the growing presence of Asian
manufacturers in Europe and North America is expected to become more
pronounced in the years ahead. Chinese wind turbine manufacturers, in
particular, are dominating their home market, and will increasingly seek
export opportunities. Wind turbine sales and supply chain strategies are
therefore expected to continue to take on a more international dimension as volumes increase.
Amidst the growth in the wind energy industry also come challenges. As
discussed further in Section 7.8, from 2005 through 2008, supply chain difculties caused by growing demand for wind energy strained the industry,
and prices for wind turbines and turbine components increased to compensate for this imbalance. Commodity price increases, the availability of skilled
labour and other factors also played a role in pushing wind turbine prices
higher, while the underdeveloped supply chain for offshore wind power
plants strained that portion of the industry. Overcoming supply chain difculties is not simply a matter of ramping up the production of wind turbine
components to meet the increased levels of demand. Large-scale investment decisions are more easily made based on a sound long-term outlook
for the industry. In most markets, however, both the projections and actual
demand for wind energy depend on a number of factors, some of which
are outside of the control of the industry, such as political frameworks and
policy measures.
7.4.4
Impact of policies18
Wind Energy
(though not all) regions of the world, wind energy is more expensive
than current energy market prices, at least if environmental impacts are
not internalized and monetized (NRC, 2010a). Wind energy also faces
a number of other challenges, some of which are somewhat unique to
wind energy or are at least particularly relevant to this sector. Some
of the most critical challenges include: (1) concerns about the impact
of wind energys variability on electricity reliability; (2) challenges to
building the new transmission infrastructure both on- and offshore (and
within country and cross-border) needed to enable access to the most
attractive wind resource areas; (3) cumbersome and slow planning, siting and permitting procedures that impede wind energy deployment;
(4) the technical advancement needs and higher cost of offshore wind
energy technology; and (5) lack of institutional and technical knowledge
in regions that have not experienced substantial wind energy deployment to this point.
As a result of these challenges, growth in the wind energy sector is
affected by and responsive to political frameworks and a wide range
of government policies. During the past two decades, a signicant
number of developed countries and, more recently, a growing number
of developing nations have laid out RE policy frameworks that have
played a major role in the expansion of the wind energy market. These
efforts have been motivated by the environmental, fuel diversity, and
economic development impacts of wind energy deployment, as well as
the potential for reducing the cost of wind energy over time. An early
signicant effort to deploy wind energy at a commercial scale occurred
in California, with a feed-in tariff and aggressive tax incentives spurring
growth in the 1980s (Bird et al., 2005). In the 1990s, wind energy deployment moved to Europe, with feed-in tariff policies initially established
in Denmark and Germany, and later expanding to Spain and then a
number of other countries (Meyer, 2007); renewable portfolio standards
have been implemented in other European countries and, more recently,
European renewable energy policies have been motivated in part by the
EUs binding 20%-by-2020 target for renewable energy. In the 2000s,
growth in the USA (Bird et al., 2005; Wiser and Bolinger, 2010), China (Li
et al., 2007; Li, 2010; Liu and Kokko, 2010), and India (Goyal, 2010) was
based on varied policy frameworks, including renewable portfolio standards, tax incentives, feed-in tariffs and government-overseen bidding.
Still other policies have been used in a number of countries to directly
encourage the localization of wind turbine and component manufacturing (Lewis and Wiser, 2007).
Though economic support policies differ, and a healthy debate exists
over the relative merits of different approaches, a key nding is that
both policy transparency and predictability are important (see Chapter
11). Moreover, though it is not uncommon to focus on economic policies for wind energy, as noted above and as discussed elsewhere in this
chapter and in Chapter 11, experience shows that wind energy markets
are also dependent on a variety of other factors (e.g., Valentine, 2010).
These include local resource availability, site planning and approval procedures, operational integration into electric systems, transmission grid
expansion, wind energy technology improvements, and the availability
of institutional and technical knowledge in markets unfamiliar with
559
Wind Energy
wind energy (e.g., IEA, 2009). For the wind energy industry, these issues
have been critical in dening both the size of the market opportunity
in each country and the rules for participation in those opportunities;
many countries with sizable wind resources have not deployed signicant amounts of wind energy as a result of these factors. Given the
challenges to wind energy listed earlier, successful frameworks for
wind energy deployment might consider the following elements: support systems that offer adequate protability and that ensure investor
condence; appropriate administrative procedures for wind energy
planning, siting and permitting; a degree of public acceptance of wind
power plants to ease implementation; access to the existing transmission system and strategic transmission planning and new investment
for wind energy; and proactive efforts to manage wind energys inherent output variability and uncertainty. In addition, R&D by government
and industry has been essential to enabling incremental improvements
in onshore wind energy technology and to driving the improvements
needed in offshore wind energy technology. Finally, for those markets
that are new to wind energy deployment, both knowledge (e.g., wind
resource mapping expertise) and technology transfer (e.g., to develop
local wind turbine manufacturers and to ease grid integration) can help
facilitate early installations.
7.5
560
Chapter 7
7.5.1
Chapter 7
Wind Energy
weather conditions. Variations can occur over multiple time scales, from
shorter-term sub-hourly uctuations to diurnal, seasonal, and ever interannual uctuations (e.g., Van der Hoven, 1957; Justus et al., 1979; Wan
and Bucaneg, 2002; Apt, 2007; Rahimzadeh et al., 2011). The nature of
these uctuations and patterns is highly site- and region-specic. Figure
7.13 illustrates some elements of this variability by showing the scaled
output of an individual wind turbine, a small collection of wind power
plants, and a large collection of wind power plants in Germany over 10
consecutive days. An important aspect of wind power variability for electric system operations is the rate of change in wind power output over
different relatively short time periods; Figure 7.13 demonstrates that the
aggregate output of multiple wind power plants changes much more
dramatically over relatively longer periods (multiple hours) than over very
short periods (minutes). An important aspect of wind power variability
for the purpose of electric sector planning, on the other hand, is the correlation of wind power output with the periods of time when electric
system reliability is at greatest risk, typically periods of high electricity
demand. In this case, the diurnal, seasonal, and even interannual patterns
of wind power output (and the correlation of those patterns with electricity demand) can impact the capacity credit assigned by system planners
to wind power plants, as discussed further in Section 7.5.3.4.
output use various approaches and have multiple goals, and signicant
improvements in forecasting accuracy have been achieved in recent
years (e.g., Costa et al., 2008). Despite those improvements, however,
forecasts remain imperfect. In particular, forecasts are less accurate
over longer forecast horizons (multiple hours to days) than over shorter
periods (e.g., H. Madsen et al., 2005), which, depending on the characteristics of the electric system, can have implications for the ability of
that system and related trading markets to manage wind power variability and uncertainty (Usaola, 2009; Weber, 2010).
The aggregate variability and uncertainty of wind power output
depends, in part, on the degree of correlation between the outputs of
different geographically dispersed wind power plants. This correlation
between the outputs of wind power plants, in turn, depends on the
geographic deployment of the plants and the regional characteristics
of weather patterns, especially wind speeds. Generally, the output of
wind power plants that are farther apart are less correlated with each
other, and variability over shorter time periods (minutes) is less correlated than variability over longer time periods (multiple hours) (e.g.,
Wan et al., 2003; Sinden, 2007; Holttinen et al., 2009; Katzenstein et
al., 2010). This lack of perfect correlation results in a smoothing effect
associated with geographic diversity when the output of multiple
wind turbines and power plants are combined, as illustrated in Figure
7.13: the aggregate scaled variability shown for groups of wind power
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
Single Turbine
0.1
0
7-Dec-06
9-Dec-06
11-Dec-06
13-Dec-06
15-Dec-06
17-Dec-06
Date
Figure 7.13 | Example time series of wind power output scaled to wind power capacity for a single wind turbine, a group of wind power plants, and all wind power plants in Germany
over a 10-day period in 2006 (Durstewitz et al., 2008)
561
Wind Energy
plants over a region is less than the scaled output of a single wind
turbine. This apparent smoothing of aggregated output is due to the
decreasing correlation of output between different wind power plants
as distance between those plants increases. If, on the other hand, the
output of multiple wind turbines and power plants was perfectly correlated, then the aggregate variability would be equivalent to the scaled
variability of a single turbine. With sufcient transmission capacity
between wind power plants, the observed geographic smoothing
effect has implications for the variability of aggregate wind power
output that electric systems must accommodate, and also inuences
forecast accuracy because accuracy improves with the number and
diversity of wind power plants considered (e.g., Focken et al., 2002).
7.5.2
Detailed system planning for new generation and transmission infrastructure is used to ensure that the electric system can be operated
reliably and economically in the future. Advanced planning is required
due, in part, to the long time horizons required to build new electricity
infrastructure. More specically, electric system planners22 must evaluate the adequacy of transmission to deliver electricity to demand centres
and the adequacy of generation to maintain a balance between supply and demand under a variety of operating conditions. Though not
an exhaustive list, four technical planning issues are prominent when
considering increased reliance on wind energy: the need for accurate
electric system models of wind turbines and power plants; the development of technical standards for connecting wind power plants with
electric systems (i.e., grid codes); the broader transmission infrastructure
needs of electric systems with wind energy; and the maintenance of
overall generation adequacy with increased wind electricity penetration.
7.5.2.1
562
Chapter 7
7.5.2.2
As wind power capacity has increased, so has the need for wind power
plants to become more active participants in maintaining (rather than
passively depending on) the operability and power quality of the electric
system. Focusing here primarily on the technical aspects of grid connection, the electrical performance of wind turbines in interaction with the
grid is often veried in accordance with international standards for the
characteristics of wind turbines, in which methods to assess the impact
of one or more wind turbines on power quality are specied (IEC, 2008).
Additionally, an increasing number of electric system operators have
implemented technical standards (sometimes called grid codes) that
wind turbines and/or wind power plants (and other power plants) must
meet when connecting to the grid to help prevent equipment or facilities
from adversely affecting the electric system during normal operation
and contingencies (see also Chapter 8). Electric system models and
operating experience are used to develop these requirements, which can
then typically be met through modications to wind turbine design or
through the addition of auxiliary equipment such as power conditioning
devices. In some cases, the unique characteristics of specic generation
types are addressed in grid codes, resulting in wind-specic grid codes
(e.g., Singh and Singh, 2009).
Grid codes often require fault ride-through capability, or the ability of
a wind power plant to remain connected and operational during brief
but severe changes in electric system voltage (Singh and Singh, 2009).
The requirement for fault ride-through capability was in response to the
increasing penetration of wind energy and the signicant size of individual wind power plants. Electric systems can typically maintain reliable
operation when small individual power plants shut down or disconnect
from the system for protection purposes in response to fault conditions.
When a large amount of wind power capacity disconnects in response to
a fault, however, that disconnection can exacerbate the fault conditions.
Electric system planners have therefore increasingly specied that wind
power plants must meet minimum fault ride-through standards similar
to those required of other large power plants. System-wide approaches
have also been adopted: in Spain, for example, wind power output may
be curtailed in order to avoid potential reliability issues in the event of
a fault; the need to employ this curtailment, however, is expected to
decrease as fault ride-through capability is added to new and existing wind power plants (Rivier Abbad, 2010). Reactive power control to
help manage voltage is also often required by grid codes, enabling wind
turbines to improve voltage stability margins particularly in weak parts
of the electric system (Vittal et al., 2010). Requirements for wind turbine inertial response to improve system stability after disturbances are
less common, but are under consideration (Hydro-Quebec TransEnergie,
Chapter 7
2006; Doherty et al., 2010). Active power control (including limits on how
quickly wind power plants can change their output) and frequency control are also sometimes required (Singh and Singh, 2009). Finally, controls
can be added to wind power plants to enable benecial dampening of
inter-area oscillations during dynamic events (Miao et al., 2009).
7.5.2.3
Transmission infrastructure
As noted earlier, the highest-quality wind resources (whether on- or offshore) are often located at a distance from electricity demand centres.
As a result, even at low to medium levels of wind electricity penetration,
the addition of large quantities of wind energy in areas with the strongest wind resources may require signicant new additions or upgrades
to the transmission system (see also Chapter 8). Transmission adequacy
evaluations must consider any tradeoffs between the costs of expanding the transmission system to access higher-quality wind resources and
the costs of accessing lower-quality wind resources that require less
transmission investment (e.g., Hoppock and Patio-Echeverri, 2010). In
addition, evaluations of new transmission capacity need to account for
the relative smoothing benets of aggregating wind power plants over
large areas, the amount of transmission capacity devoted to managing
the remaining variability of wind power output, and the broader nonwind-specic advantages and disadvantages of transmission expansion
(Burke and OMalley, 2010).
Irrespective of the costs and benets of transmission expansion to
accommodate increased wind energy deployment, one of the primary
challenges is the long time it can take to plan, site, permit and construct new transmission infrastructure relative to the shorter time it
often takes to add new wind power plants. Depending on the legal and
regulatory framework in any particular region, the institutional challenges of transmission expansion, including cost allocation and siting,
can be substantial (e.g., Benjamin, 2007; Vajjhala and Fischbeck, 2007;
Swider et al., 2008). Enabling increased penetration of wind electricity
may therefore require the creation of regulatory and legal frameworks
for proactive rather than reactive transmission planning (Schumacher
et al., 2009). Estimates of the cost of the new transmission required to
achieve low to medium levels of wind electricity penetration in a variety
of locations around the world are summarized in Section 7.5.4.
7.5.2.4
Wind Energy
Generation adequacy
The contribution of wind energy to long-term reliability can be evaluated using standard approaches, and wind power plants are typically
found to have a capacity credit of 5 to 40% of nameplate capacity (see
Figure 7.14). The correlation between wind power output and electrical demand is an important determinant of the capacity credit of an
individual wind power plant. In many cases, wind power output is uncorrelated or is weakly negatively correlated with periods of high electricity
demand, reducing the capacity credit of wind power plants; this is not
always the case, however, and wind power output in the UK, for example, has been found to be weakly positively correlated with periods of
high demand (Sinden, 2007). These correlations are case specic as they
depend on the diurnal, seasonal and yearly characteristics of both wind
power output and electricity demand. A second important characteristic of the capacity credit for wind energy is that its value generally
decreases as wind electricity penetration levels rise, because the capacity credit of a generator is greater when power output is well-correlated
with periods of time when there is a higher risk of a supply shortage.
As the level of wind electricity penetration increases, however, assuming that the outputs of wind power plants are positively correlated, the
period of greatest risk will shift to times with low average levels of wind
energy supply (Hasche et al., 2010). Aggregating wind power plants
over larger areas may reduce the correlation between wind power outputs, as described earlier, and can slow the decline in capacity credit
as wind electricity penetration increases, though adequate transmission
capacity is required to aggregate the output of wind power plants in this
way (Tradewind, 2009; EnerNex Corp, 2010).24
The relatively low average capacity credit of wind power plants (compared to fossil fuel-powered units, for example) suggests that systems
with large amounts of wind energy will also tend to have signicantly
more total nameplate generation capacity (wind and non-wind) to meet
the same peak electricity demand than will electric systems without
large amounts of wind energy. Some of this generation capacity will
operate infrequently, however, and the mix of other generation in an
electric system with large amounts of wind energy will tend (on economic grounds) to increasingly shift towards more exible peaking
23 As an example, the addition of a very reliable 100 MW fossil unit in a system with
numerous other reliable units will usually increase the load-carrying capability of the
system by at least 90 MW, leading to a greater than 90% capacity credit for the fossil
unit.
24 Generation resource adequacy evaluations are also beginning to include the capability of the system to provide adequate exibility and operating reserves to accommodate more wind energy (NERC, 2009). The increased demand from wind energy
for operating reserves and exibility is addressed in Section 7.5.3.
563
Wind Energy
Chapter 7
45
Germany
40
Ireland ESBNG 5GW
35
30
25
UK 2002
20
UK 2007
US California
15
US Minnesota 2004
10
US Minnesota 2006
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
7.5.3
7.5.3.1
564
and also a decrease in the minimum net demand. For example, Figure
7.15 depicts demand and ramp duration curves for Ireland.25 At relatively
low levels of wind electricity penetration, the magnitude of changes in
net demand, as shown in the 15-minute ramp duration curve, is similar to
the magnitude of changes in total demand (Figure 7.15(c)). At higher levels of wind electricity penetration, however, changes in net demand are
greater than changes in total demand (Figure 7.15(d)). Similar impacts on
changes in net demand with increased wind energy have been reported
in the USA (Milligan and Kirby, 2008). The gure also shows that, at
high levels of wind electricity penetration, the magnitude of net demand
across all hours of the year is lower than total demand, and that in some
hours net demand is near or even below zero (Figure 7.15(b)).
As a result of these trends, wholesale electricity prices will tend to decline
when wind power output is high (or is forecast to be high in the case of
day-ahead markets) and transmission interconnection capacity to other
energy markets is constrained, with a greater frequency of low or even
negative prices (e.g., Jnsson et al., 2010; Morales et al., 2011). As with
25 Figure 7.15 presents demand and ramp duration curves for Ireland with (net demand) and without (demand) the addition of wind energy. A demand duration curve
shows the percentage of the year that the demand exceeds a level on the vertical
axis. Demand in Ireland exceeds 4,000 MW, for example, about 10% of the year. The
ramp duration curves show the percentage of the year that changes in the demand
exceed the level on the vertical axis. The 15-min change in demand in Ireland exceeds 100 MW/15minutes, for example, less than 10% of the year.
Chapter 7
Wind Energy
5,000
Power [MW]
4,000
3,000
400
Demand
Net Demand
300
200
100
0
-100
2,000
-200
-300
1,000
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
Probability
Power [MW]
Probability
Demand
Net Demand
4,000
2,000
400
Demand
Net Demand
200
-200
-2,000
-400
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
Probability
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
Probability
Figure 7.15 | Demand duration and 15-minute ramp duration curves for Ireland in (a, c) 2008 (wind energy represents 7.5% of total annual average electricity demand), and (b, d)
projected for high wind electricity penetration levels (wind energy represents 40% of total annual average electricity demand).1 Source: Data from www.eirgrid.com.
Note: 1. Projected demand and ramp duration curves are based on scaling 2008 data (demand is scaled by 1.27 and wind energy is scaled on average by 7). Ramp duration curves
show the cumulative probability distributions of 15-minute changes in demand and net demand.
565
Wind Energy
7.5.4 and 7.6.1.3, respectively), increases wear and tear on boilers and
other equipment, increases maintenance costs, and reduces power plant
life (Denny and OMalley, 2009). Various kinds of economic incentives
can be used to ensure that the operational exibility of other generators is made available to system operators. Some electricity systems,
for example, have day-ahead, intra-day, and/or hour-ahead markets for
electricity, as well as markets for reserves, balancing energy and other
ancillary services. These markets can provide pricing signals for increased
(or decreased) exibility when needed as a result of rapid changes in or
poorly predicted wind power output, and can therefore reduce the cost of
integrating wind energy (J. Smith et al., 2007; Gransson and Johnsson,
2009). Markets with shorter scheduling periods have also been found
to be more responsive to variability and uncertainty, thereby facilitating wind energy integration (Holttinen, 2005; Kirby and Milligan, 2008;
Tradewind, 2009). In addition, coordinated electric system operations
across larger areas has been shown to benet wind energy integration,
and increased levels of wind energy supply may therefore tend to motivate greater investments in and electricity trade across transmission
interconnections (Milligan and Kirby, 2008; Denny et al., 2010). Where
wholesale electricity markets do not exist, other planning methods or
incentives would be needed to ensure that generating plants are exible
enough to accommodate increased deployment of wind energy.
Planning systems and incentives may also need to be adopted to
ensure that new generating plants are sufciently exible to accommodate expected wind energy deployment. Moreover, in addition to
exible fossil fuel-powered units, hydropower stations, bulk energy
storage, large-scale deployment of electric vehicles and their associated
contributions to system exibility through controlled battery charging,
diverting excess wind energy to fuel production or local heating, and
various forms of demand response can also be used to facilitate the integration of wind energy. The deployment of a diversity of RE technologies
may also help facilitate overall electric system integration. The role of
some of these technologies (as well as some of the operational and
planning methods noted earlier) in electric systems is described in more
detail in Chapter 8 because they are not all specic to wind energy and
because some are more likely to be used at higher levels of wind electricity penetration than considered here (up to 20%). Wind power plants,
meanwhile, can provide some exibility by briey curtailing output to
provide downward regulation or, in extreme cases, curtailing output for
extended periods to provide upward regulation. Modern controls on
wind power plants can also use curtailment to limit or even (partially)
control ramp rates (Fox et al., 2007). Though curtailing wind power output is a simple and often times readily available source of exibility,
there are sizable opportunity costs associated with curtailing plants that
have low operating costs before reducing the output of other plants that
have high fuel costs. These opportunity costs should be compared to the
possible benets of curtailment (e.g., reduced part-load efciency penalties and wear and tear for fossil generators, and avoidance of certain
transmission investments) when determining the prevalence of its use.
566
Chapter 7
7.5.3.2
Actual operating experience in different parts of the world demonstrates that electric systems can operate reliably with increased
contributions of wind energy (Sder et al., 2007). In four countries, as
discussed earlier, wind energy in 2010 was already able to supply from
10 to roughly 20% of annual electricity demand. The three examples
reported here demonstrate the challenges associated with this operational integration, and the methods used to manage the additional
variability and uncertainty associated with wind energy. Naturally,
these impacts and management methods vary across regions for reasons of geography, electric system design and regulatory structure,
and additional examples of wind energy integration associated with
operations, curtailment and transmission are described in Chapter 8.
Moreover, as more wind energy is deployed in diverse regions and electric systems, additional knowledge about the impacts of wind power
output on electric systems will be gained. To date, for example, there
is little experience with severe contingencies (i.e., faults) during times
with high instantaneous wind electricity penetration. Though existing
experience demonstrates that electric systems can operate with wind
energy, further analysis is required to determine whether electric systems are maintaining the same level of overall security, measured by
the ability of the system to withstand major contingencies, with and
without wind energy, and depending on various management options.
Limited analysis (e.g., EirGrid and SONI, 2010; Eto et al., 2010) suggests that particular systems are able to survive such conditions but,
if primary frequency control reserves are reduced as thermal generation is increasingly displaced by wind energy, additional management
options may be needed to maintain adequate frequency response. The
security of the electric system with high instantaneous wind electricity
penetrations is described in more detail in Chapter 8.
Denmark has the highest wind electricity penetration of any country in
the world, with wind energy supply equating to approximately 20% of
total annual electricity demand. Total wind power capacity installed by
the end of 2009 equalled 3.4 GW, while the peak demand in Denmark
was 6.5 GW. Much of the wind power capacity (2.7 GW) is located
in western Denmark, resulting in instantaneous wind power output
exceeding total demand in western Denmark in some instances (see
Figure 7.16). The Danish example demonstrates the benets of having
access to markets for exible resources and having strong transmission interconnections to neighbouring countries. Denmarks electricity
systems operate without serious reliability issues in part because the
country is well interconnected to two different electric systems. In conjunction with wind power output forecasting, this allows wind energy to
be exported to other markets and helps the Danish operators manage
wind power variability. The interconnection with the Nordic system, in
particular, provides access to exible hydropower resources, and balancing the Danish system is much more difcult during periods when
Chapter 7
Wind Energy
5,000
101%
100
98%
Demand
Wind
% Wind
4,000
3,000
90
80
70
60
50
2,000
40
The Electric Reliability Council of Texas (ERCOT) operates a synchronous system with a peak demand of 63 GW and 8.5 GW of wind
power capacity, and with a wind electricity penetration level of 6%
of annual electricity demand by the end of 2009. ERCOTs experience
7.5.4
In addition to actual operating experience, a number of high-quality studies of the increased transmission and generation resources required to
accommodate wind energy have been completed, primarily covering
OECD countries. As summarized further below, these studies employ
a wide variety of methodologies and have diverse objectives, but typically seek to evaluate the capability of the electric system to integrate
increased penetrations of wind energy and to quantify the costs and
benets of operating the system with wind energy. The issues and costs
often considered by these studies are reviewed in this section, and
include: the increased operating reserves and balancing costs required
5,000
42%
4,000
40
3,000
30
Demand
2,000
20
20
Wind
% Wind
30
1,000
50
1,000
10
10
0
0
10/01
11/01
12/01
13/01
14/01
15/01
16/01
0
04-Apr-10
05-Apr-10
Figure 7.16 | Wind energy, electricity demand and instantaneous penetration levels in (left) West Denmark for a week in January 2005, and (right) the island of Ireland for two days
in April 2010. Source: Data from (left) www.energinet.dk; (right) www.eirgrid.com and System Operator for Northern Ireland.
567
Wind Energy
Chapter 7
integrating up to 20% wind energy into electric systems is, in most cases,
modest but not insignicant. Specically, at low to medium levels of wind
electricity penetration (up to 20% wind energy), the available literature
(again, primarily from a subset of OECD countries) suggests that the
additional costs of managing electric system variability and uncertainty,
ensuring generation adequacy and adding new transmission to accommodate wind energy will be system specic but generally in the range
of US cents2005 0.7 to 3/kWh.26 Concerns about (and the costs of) wind
energy integration will grow with wind energy deployment and, even at
lower penetration levels, integration issues must be actively managed.
7.5.4.1
7.5.4.2
Methodological challenges
Estimating the incremental impacts and costs of wind energy integration is difcult due to the complexity of electric systems and study data
requirements. One of the most signicant challenges in executing these
studies is simulating wind power output data at high time resolutions
for a chosen future wind electricity penetration level and for a sufcient
duration for the results of the analysis to accurately depict worst-case
conditions and correlations of wind and electricity demand. These data
are then used in electric system simulations to mimic system planning
and operations, thereby quantifying the impacts, costs and benets of
wind energy integration.
Addressing all integration impacts requires several different simulation models that operate over different time scales, and most individual
studies therefore focus on a subset of the potential issues. The results
of wind energy integration studies are also dependent on pre-existing
differences in electric system designs and regulatory environments:
important differences include generation capacity mix and the exibility of that generation, the variability of demand and the strength
and breadth of the transmission system. In addition, study results differ
and are hard to compare because standard methodologies and even
denitions have not been developed, though signicant progress has
been made in developing agreement on many high-level study design
principles (Holttinen et al., 2009). The rst-generation integration studies, for example, used models that were not designed to fully reect
the variability and uncertainty of wind energy, resulting in studies that
addressed only parts of the larger system. More recent studies, on the
other hand, have used models that can incorporate the uncertainty of
wind power output from the day-ahead time scale to some hours ahead
of delivery (e.g., Meibom et al., 2009; Tuohy et al., 2009). Integration
studies are also increasingly simulating high wind electricity penetration
scenarios over entire synchronized systems (not just individual, smaller
balancing areas) (e.g., Tradewind, 2009; EnerNex Corp, 2010; GE Energy,
2010). Finally, only recently have studies begun to explore in more depth
the capability of electric systems to maintain primary frequency control during system contingencies with high penetrations of wind energy
(e.g., EirGrid and SONI, 2010; Eto et al., 2010).
Regardless of the challenges of executing and comparing such studies, the
results, as described in more detail below, demonstrate that the cost of
568
Chapter 7
7.5.4.3
Wind Energy
7.5.4.4
Finally, a number of assessments of the need for and cost of upgrading or building large-scale transmission infrastructure between wind
resource regions and demand centres have similarly found modest, but
not insignicant, costs.28 The transmission cost for achieving 20% wind
electricity penetration in the USA, for example, was estimated to add
about USD2005 150 to 290/kW to the investment cost of wind power
plants (US DOE, 2008). The cost of this transmission expansion was
found to be justied because of the higher quality of the wind resources
accessed if the transmission were to be built relative to accessing only
lower-quality wind resources with less transmission expansion. More
0.6
Nordic 2004
Finland 2004
0.5
UK, 2002
UK, 2007
0.4
Ireland
Colorado US
Minnesota 2004
0.3
Minnesota 2006
California US
Pacicorp US
0.2
Greennet Germany
Greennet Denmark
Greennet Finland
0,1
Greennet Norway
Greennet Sweden
0.0
0
10
15
20
25
30
28 These costs are distinct from the costs to connect individual wind power plants to the
transmission system; connection costs are often included in estimates of the investment costs of wind power plants (see Section 7.8).
569
Wind Energy
Chapter 7
Transmission expansion for wind energy can be justied by the reduction in congestion costs that would occur for the same level of wind
energy deployment without transmission expansion. A European-wide
study, for example, identied several transmission upgrades between
nations and between high-quality offshore wind resource areas that
would reduce transmission congestion and ease wind energy integration (Tradewind, 2009). The avoided congestion costs associated with
transmission expansion were similarly found to justify transmission
investments in two US-based detailed integration studies of high wind
electricity penetrations (Milligan et al., 2009). At the same time, it is not
always appropriate to fully assign the cost of transmission expansion to
wind energy deployment. In some cases, these transmission expansion
costs can be justied for reasons beyond wind energy, as new transmission can have wider benets including increased electricity reliability,
decreased pre-existing congestion and reduced market power (Budhraja
et al., 2009). Moreover, wind energy is not unique in potentially requiring new transmission investment; other energy technologies may also
require new transmission, and the costs summarized above do not all
represent truly incremental costs.
7.6.1
7.6
570
This section summarizes the best available knowledge about the most
relevant environmental net benets of wind energy (Section 7.6.1),
while also addressing ecological impacts (Section 7.6.2), impacts on
human activities and well-being (Section 7.6.3), public attitudes and
acceptance (Section 7.6.4) and processes for minimizing social and environmental concerns (Section 7.6.5).
The environmental benets of wind energy come primarily from displacing the emissions from fossil fuel-based electricity generation. However,
the manufacturing, transport, installation, operation and decommissioning of wind turbines induces some indirect negative effects, and the
variability of wind power output also impacts the operations and emissions of fossil fuel-red plants. Such effects need to be subtracted from
the gross benets of wind energy in order to estimate net benets. As
shown below, these latter effects are modest compared to the net GHG
reduction benets of wind energy.
7.6.1.1
Direct impacts
The major environmental benets of wind energy (as well as other forms
of RE) result from displacing electricity generation from fossil fuel-based
power plants, as the operation of wind turbines does not directly emit
GHGs or other air pollutants. Similarly, unlike some other generation
sources, wind energy requires insignicant amounts of water, produces
little waste and requires no mining or drilling to obtain its fuel supply
(see Chapter 9).
Estimating the environmental benets of wind energy is somewhat
complicated by the operational characteristics of the electric system and
the decisions that are made about investments in new power plants to
economically meet electricity demand (Deutsche Energie-Agentur, 2005;
NRC, 2007; Pehnt et al., 2008). In the short run, increased wind energy
will typically displace the operations of existing fossil fuel-based plants
that are otherwise on the margin. In the longer term, however, new
generating plants may be needed, and the presence of wind energy can
inuence what types of power plants are built; specically, increased
wind energy will tend to favour on economic grounds exible peaking/
intermediate plants that operate less frequently over base-load plants
(Kahn, 1979; Lamont, 2008). Because the impacts of these factors are
both complicated and system specic, the benets of wind energy will
also be system specic and are difcult to forecast with precision.
Chapter 7
Wind Energy
Planetary boundary layer research is important for accurately determining wind ow and turbulence in the presence of various atmospheric
stability effects and complex land surface characteristics. Research in
mesoscale atmospheric processes aims at improving the fundamental
understanding of mesoscale and local wind ows (Banta et al., 2003;
Kelley et al., 2004). In addition to its contribution towards understanding
turbine-level aerodynamic and array wake effects, a better understanding of mesoscale atmospheric processes will yield improved wind energy
resource assessments and forecasting methods. Physical and statistical
modelling to resolve spatial scales in the 100- to 1,000-m range, a notable gap in current capabilities (Wyngaard, 2004), could occupy a central
role of this research.
The levelized cost of energy from on- and offshore wind power plants is
affected by ve primary factors: annual energy production, investment
costs, O&M costs, nancing costs and the assumed economic life of the
plant.43 Available support policies can also inuence the cost (and price)
of wind energy, as well as the cost of other electricity supply options, but
these factors are not addressed here.
7.8
Cost trends41
Though the cost of wind energy has declined signicantly since the
1980s, policy measures are currently required to ensure rapid deployment in most regions of the world (e.g., NRC, 2010b). In some areas
with good wind resources, however, the cost of wind energy is competitive with current energy market prices (e.g., Berry, 2009; IEA, 2009; IEA
and OECD, 2010). Moreover, continued technology advances in on- and
offshore wind energy are expected (Section 7.7), supporting further cost
reductions. The degree to which wind energy is utilized globally and
regionally will depend largely on the economic performance of wind
energy compared to alternative power sources.
This section describes the factors that affect the cost of wind energy
(Section 7.8.1), highlights historical trends in the cost and performance
of wind power plants (Section 7.8.2), summarizes data and estimates
the levelized generation cost of wind energy in 2009 (Section 7.8.3),
41 Discussion of costs in this section is largely limited to the perspective of private
investors. Chapters 1 and 8 to 11 offer complementary perspectives on cost issues
covering, for example, costs of integration, external costs and benets, economywide costs and costs of policies.
7.8.1
The nature of the wind resource, which varies geographically and temporally, largely determines the annual energy production from a prospective
wind power plant, and is among the most important economic factors
(Burton et al., 2001). Precise micro-siting of wind power plants and even
individual turbines is critical for maximizing energy production. The trend
towards turbines with larger rotor diameters and taller towers has led to
increases in annual energy production per unit of installed capacity, and
has also allowed wind power plants in lower-resource areas to become
more economically competitive. Larger wind power plants, meanwhile,
have led to consideration of array effects whereby the production of
downwind turbines is affected by those turbines located upwind. Offshore
power plants will, generally, be exposed to better wind resources than will
onshore plants (EWEA, 2009).
Wind power plants are capital intensive and, over their lifetime, the initial
investment cost ranges from 75 to 80% of total expenditure, with O&M
costs contributing the balance (Blanco, 2009; EWEA, 2009). The investment cost includes the cost of the turbines (turbines, transportation to site,
and installation), grid connection (cables, sub-station, connection), civil
works (foundations, roads, buildings), and other costs (engineering, licensing, permitting, environmental assessments and monitoring equipment).
Table 7.4 shows a rough breakdown of the investment cost components
for modern wind power plants. Turbine costs comprise more than 70%
of total investment costs for onshore wind power plants. The remaining
investment costs are highly site-specic. Offshore wind power plants are
dominated by these other costs, with the turbines often contributing less
than 50% of the total. Site-dependent characteristics such as water depth
and distance to shore signicantly affect grid connection, civil works and
42 The environmental impacts and costs of RE and non-RE sources are summarized in
Chapters 9 and 10, respectively.
43 Decommissioning costs also exist, but are not expected to be sizable in most instances.
583
Wind Energy
Chapter 7
Table 7.4 | Investment cost distribution for on- and offshore wind power plants (Data sources: Blanco, 2009; EWEA, 2009).
Cost Component
Offshore (%)1
Onshore (%)
Turbine
7176
3749
Grid connection
1012
2123
Civil works
79
2125
58
915
other costs. Offshore turbine foundations and internal electric grids are
also considerably more costly than those for onshore power plants.
The O&M costs of wind power plants include xed costs such as land
leases, insurance, taxes, management, and forecasting services, as well as
variable costs related to the maintenance and repair of turbines, including
spare parts. O&M comprises approximately 20% of total wind power plant
expenditure over a plants lifetime (Blanco, 2009), with roughly 50% of
total O&M costs associated directly with maintenance, repair and spare
parts (EWEA, 2009). O&M costs for offshore wind energy are higher than
for onshore due to the less mature state of technology as well as the
challenges and costs of accessing offshore turbines, especially in harsh
weather conditions (Blanco, 2009).
Financing arrangements, including the cost of debt and equity and the
proportional use of each, can also inuence the cost of wind energy, as
can the expected operating life of the wind power plant. For example,
ownership and nancing structures have evolved in the USA that minimize
the cost of capital while taking advantage of available incentives (Bolinger
et al., 2009). Other research has found that the predictability of the policy
measures supporting wind energy can have a sizable impact on nancing
costs, and therefore the ultimate cost of wind energy (Wiser and Pickle,
1998; Dinica, 2006; Dunlop, 2006; Agnolucci, 2007). Because offshore
wind power plants are still relatively new, with greater performance risk,
higher nancing costs are experienced than for onshore plants (Dunlop,
2006; Blanco, 2009), and larger rms tend to dominate offshore wind
energy development and ownership (Markard and Petersen, 2009).
7.8.2
Historical trends
7.8.2.1
Investment costs
584
7.8.2.2
Modern turbines that meet IEC standards are designed for a 20-year
life, and plant lifetimes may exceed 20 years if O&M costs remain at
an acceptable level. Few wind power plants were constructed 20 or
more years ago, however, and there is therefore limited experience in
plant operations over this entire time period (Echavarria et al., 2008).
Moreover, those plants that have reached or exceeded their 20-year
lifetime tend to have turbines that are much smaller and less sophisticated than their modern counterparts. Early turbines were also designed
using more conservative criteria, though they followed less stringent
standards than todays designs. As a result, early plants only offer limited guidance for estimating O&M costs for more recent turbine designs.
In general, O&M costs during the rst couple of years of a wind power
plants life are covered, in part, by manufacturer warranties that are
included in the turbine purchase, resulting in lower ongoing costs than
in subsequent years. Newer turbine models also tend to have lower initial O&M costs than older models, with maintenance costs increasing
Chapter 7
Wind Energy
5,000
4,500
Average Project Investment Cost
4,000
3,500
3,000
2,500
2,000
1,500
1,000
500
2006
2007
2008
2006
2007
2008
2009
2005
2004
2003
2002
2001
2000
1999
1998
1997
1996
1995
1994
1993
1992
1991
1990
1989
1988
1987
1986
1985
1984
1983
2005
1982
5,000
4,500
4,000
3,500
3,000
2,500
2,000
1,500
1,000
500
2009
2004
2003
2002
2001
2000
1999
1998
1997
1996
1995
1994
1993
1992
1991
1990
1989
1988
1987
1986
1985
1984
1983
1982
Figure 7.20. Investment cost of onshore wind power plants in (upper panel) Denmark (Data source: Nielson et al., 2010) and (lower panel) the USA (Wiser and Bolinger, 2010).
as turbines age (Blanco, 2009; EWEA, 2009; Wiser and Bolinger, 2010).
Offshore wind power plants have historically incurred higher O&M costs
than onshore plants (Junginger et al., 2004; EWEA, 2009; Lemming et al.,
2009).
7.8.2.3
Energy production
The performance of wind power plants is highly site-specic, and is primarily governed by the characteristics of the local wind regime, which varies
geographically and temporally. Wind power plant performance is also
impacted by wind turbine design optimization, performance, and availability, however, and by the effectiveness of O&M procedures. Improved
resource assessment and siting methodologies developed in the 1970s
and 1980s played a major role in improved wind power plant productivity.
Advances in wind energy technology, including taller towers and larger
rotors, have also contributed to increased energy capture (EWEA, 2009).
Though plant-level capacity factors vary widely, data on average eetwide capacity factors45 for a large sample of onshore wind power
plants in the USA show a trend towards higher average capacity factors over time, as wind power plants built more recently have higher
45 A wind power plants capacity factor is only a partial indicator of performance
(EWEA, 2009). Most turbine manufacturers supply variations on a given generator
capacity with multiple rotor diameters and hub heights. In general, for a given generator capacity, increasing the hub height, the rotor diameter, or the average wind
speed will result in an increased capacity factor. When comparing different wind
turbines, however, it is possible to increase annual energy capture by using a larger
generator, while at the same time decreasing the capacity factor.
585
Wind Energy
Chapter 7
7,000
6,000
5,000
4,000
3,000
2,000
1,000
0
1990
1995
2000
2005
2010
2015
Figure 7.21 | Investment cost of operating and announced offshore wind power plants (Musial and Ram, 2010).
average capacity factors than those built earlier (Figure 7.22). Higher
hub heights and larger rotor sizes are primarily responsible for these
improvements, as the more recent wind power plants built in this time
period and included in Figure 7.22 were, on average, sited in relatively
lower-quality wind resource regimes.
7.8.3
Current conditions
7.8.3.1
Investment costs
The investment costs for onshore wind power plants installed worldwide
in 2009 averaged approximately USD2005 1,750/kW, with many plants
falling in the range of USD2005 1,400 to 2,100/kW (Milborrow, 2010);
data in IEA Wind (2010) are reasonably consistent with this range. Wind
power plants installed in the USA in 2009 averaged USD2005 1,900/
kW (Wiser and Bolinger, 2010). Costs in some markets were lower: for
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
Projects:
11
17
77
124
137
163
190
217
258
299
242
MW:
701
1.158
2.199
3.955
4.458
5.784
6.467
9.289
11.253
16.068
22.346
Figure 7.22 | Fleet-wide average capacity factors for a large sample of wind power plants in the USA from 1999 to 2009 (Wiser and Bolinger, 2010).
586
Chapter 7
Wind Energy
Wind power plant investment costs rose from 2004 to 2009 (Figure 7.20),
an increase primarily caused by the rising price of wind turbines (Wiser
and Bolinger, 2010). Those price increases have been attributed to a number of factors. Increased rotor diameters and hub heights have enhanced
the energy capture of modern wind turbines, for example, but those
performance improvements have come with increased turbine costs,
measured on a dollar per kW basis. The costs of raw materials, including steel, copper, cement, aluminium and carbon bre, also rose sharply
from 2004 through mid-2008 as a result of strong global economic
growth. The strong demand for wind turbines over this period also
put upward pressure on labour costs, and enabled turbine manufacturers and their component suppliers to boost prot margins. Strong
demand, in excess of available supply, also placed particular pressure on critical components such as gearboxes and bearings (Blanco,
2009). Moreover, because many of the wind turbine manufacturers
have historically been based in Europe, and many of the critical components have similarly been manufactured in Europe, the relative
value of the Euro compared to other currencies also contributed to the
wind turbine price increases in certain countries. Turbine manufacturers and component suppliers responded to the tight supply over this
period by expanding or adding new manufacturing facilities. Coupled
with reductions in materials costs that began in late 2008 as a result
of the global nancial crisis, these trends began to moderate wind
turbine prices in 2009 (Wiser and Bolinger, 2010).
7.8.3.2
Though xed O&M costs such as insurance, land payments and routine maintenance are relatively easy to estimate, variable costs such as
repairs and spare parts are more difcult to predict (Blanco, 2009). O&M
costs can vary by wind power plant, turbine type and age, and the availability of a local servicing infrastructure, among other factors. Levelized
O&M costs for onshore wind energy are often estimated to range from
US cents2005 1.2 to 2.3/kWh (Blanco, 2009); these gures are reasonably
consistent with costs reported in EWEA (2009), IEA (2010c), Milborrow
(2010), and Wiser and Bolinger (2010).
Limited empirical data exist on O&M costs for offshore wind energy,
due in large measure to the limited number of operating plants and the
limited duration of those plants operation. Reported or estimated O&M
costs for offshore plants installed since 2002 range from US cents2005 2 to
4/kWh (EWEA, 2009; IEA, 2009, 2010c; Lemming et al., 2009; Milborrow,
2010; UKERC, 2010).
7.8.3.3
Energy production
Onshore wind power plant performance varies substantially, with capacity factors ranging from below 20 to more than 50% depending largely
on local resource conditions. Among countries, variations in average performance also reect differing wind resource conditions, as well as any
difference in the wind turbine technology that is deployed: the average
capacity factor for Germanys installed plants has been estimated at
20.5% (BTM, 2010); European country-level average capacity factors
range from 20 to 30% (Boccard, 2009); average capacity factors in China
are reported at roughly 23% (Li, 2010); average capacity factors in India
are reported at around 20% (Goyal, 2010); and the average capacity factor for US wind power plants is above 30% (Wiser and Bolinger, 2010).
Offshore wind power plants often experience a narrower range in capacity
factors, with a typical range of 35 to 45% for the European plants installed
to date (Lemming et al., 2009); some offshore plants in the UK, however,
have experienced capacity factors of roughly 30%, in part due to relatively
high component failures and access limitations (UKERC, 2010).
Because of these variations among countries and individual plants,
which are primarily driven by local wind resource conditions but are
also affected by turbine design and operations, estimates of the levelized cost of wind energy must include a range of energy production
estimates. Moreover, because the attractiveness of offshore plants
is enhanced by the potential for greater energy production than for
onshore plants, performance variations among on- and offshore wind
energy must also be considered.
587
Wind Energy
7.8.3.4
Chapter 7
35
Offshore USD 5,000/kW
30
25
20
15
10
The levelized cost of on- and offshore wind energy varies substantially,
depending on assumed investment costs, energy production and discount rates. For onshore wind energy, levelized generation costs in
good to excellent wind resource regimes are estimated to average US
cents2005 5 to 10/kWh. Levelized generation costs can reach US cents2005
15/kWh in lower- resource areas. The costs of wind energy in China and
Using the methods summarized in Annex II, the levelized generation cost
of wind energy is presented in Figure 7.23. For onshore wind energy,
estimates are provided for plants built in 2009; for offshore wind energy,
estimates are provided for plants built in 2008 and 2009 as well as those
plants planned for completion in the early 2010s.46 Estimated levelized
costs are presented over a range of energy production estimates to represent the cost variation associated with inherent differences in the wind
resource. The x-axis for these charts roughly correlates to annual average
35
Offshore Discount Rate = 10%
Offshore Discount Rate = 7%
30
25
20
15
10
5
China
European Low-Medium Wind Areas
US Great Plains
0
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Figure 7.23 | Estimated levelized cost of on- and offshore wind energy, 2009: (left) as a function of capacity factor and investment cost* and (right) as a function of capacity factor
and discount rate**.
Notes: * Discount rate assumed to equal 7%. ** Onshore investment cost assumed at USD2005 1,750/kW, and offshore at USD2005 3,900/kW.
the USA tend towards the lower range of these estimates, due to lower
average investment costs (China) and higher average capacity factors
(USA); costs in much of Europe tend towards the higher end of the range
due to relatively lower average capacity factors. Though the offshore
cost estimates are more uncertain, offshore wind energy is generally
more expensive than onshore, with typical levelized generation costs
that are estimated to range from US cents2005 10/kWh to more than US
cents2005 20/kWh for recently built or planned plants located in relatively
46 Because investment costs have risen in recent years, using the cost of recent and
planned plants reasonably reects the current cost of offshore wind energy.
48 Though the same discount rate range and mid-point are used for on- and offshore
wind energy, offshore wind power plants currently experience higher-cost nancing
than do onshore plants. As such, the levelized cost of energy from offshore plants
may, in practice, tend towards the higher end of the range presented in the gure, at
least in comparison to onshore plants.
47 Based on data presented earlier in this section, the mid-level investment cost for onand offshore wind power plants does not represent the arithmetic mean between
the low and high end of the range.
49 Decommissioning costs are generally assumed to be low, and are excluded from
these calculations.
588
Chapter 7
Wind Energy
7.8.4
7.8.4.1
Table 7.5 | Summary of learning curve literature for onshore wind energy.
Authors
Neij (1997)
Global or National
Data Years
Independent Variable
(cumulative capacity)
Dependent Variable
Denmark3
19821995
14
USA
19811996
Neij (1999)
Denmark3
19821997
Wene (2000)
32
USA2
19851994
Wene (2000)
18
EU
EU (generation cost)
19801995
10
Global
19711997
19
Global
UK (investment cost)
19922001
15
Global
19902001
19862000
14
Global
19811997
Jamasb (2007)
13
Global
19801998
19862000
19862000
Neij (2008)
17
Denmark
19812000
Kahouli-Brahmi (2009)
17
Global
19791997
Nemet (2009)
11
Global
19812004
17
Global
19862002
Global
19822009
Notes: 1. Two-factor learning curve that also includes R&D; others are one-factor learning curves. 2. Independent variable is cumulative production of electricity. 3. Cumulative
turbine production used as independent variable; others use cumulative installations.
50 It is too early to develop a meaningful learning curve for offshore wind energy based
on actual data from offshore plants. Studies have sometimes used learning rates to
estimate future offshore costs, but those learning rates have typically been synthesized based on judgment and on learning rates for related industries and offshore
subsystems (e.g., Junginger et al., 2004; Carbon Trust, 2008b).
589
Wind Energy
installed wind power capacity), data quality, and the time period over
which data are available. Because of these and other differences, the
learning rates for wind energy presented in Table 7.5 range from 4 to
32%, but need special attention to be accurately interpreted and compared. Focusing only on the smaller set of studies completed in 2004
and later that have prepared estimates of learning curves based on total
wind power plant investment costs and global cumulative installations,
the range of learning rates narrows to 9 to 19%; the lowest gure within
this range (9%) is the only one that includes data from 2004 to 2009, a
period of increasing wind power plant investment costs.
There are also a number of limitations to the use of such models to
forecast future costs (e.g., Junginger et al., 2010). First, learning curves
typically (and simplistically) model how costs have decreased with
increased installations in the past, but do not comprehensively explain
the reasons behind the decrease (Mukora et al., 2009). In reality, costs
may decline in part due to traditional learning and in part due to other factors, such as R&D expenditure and increases in turbine, power plant, and
manufacturing facility size. Learning rate estimates that do not account
for such factors may suffer from omitted variable bias, and may therefore
be inaccurate. Second, if learning curves are used to forecast future cost
trends, not only should the other factors that may inuence costs be
considered, but one must also assume that learning rates derived from
historical data can be appropriately used to estimate future trends. As
technologies mature, however, diminishing returns in cost reduction can
be expected, and learning rates may fall (Arrow, 1962; Ferioli et al., 2009;
Nemet, 2009). Third, the most appropriate cost measure for wind energy
is arguably the levelized cost of energy, as wind energy generation
costs are affected by investment costs, O&M costs and energy production (EWEA, 2009; Ferioli et al., 2009). Unfortunately, only two of the
published studies calculate the learning rate for wind energy using a levelized cost of energy metric (Wene, 2000; Neij, 2008); most studies have
used the more readily available metrics of investment cost or turbine
cost. Fourth, a number of the published studies have sought to explain
cost trends based on cumulative wind power capacity installations or
production in individual countries or regions of the world; because the
wind energy industry is global in scope, however, it is likely that much
of the learning is now occurring based on cumulative global installations (e.g., Ek and Sderholm, 2010). Finally, from 2004 through 2009,
wind turbine and power plant investment costs increased substantially,
countering the effects of learning, in part due to materials and labour
price increases and in part due to increased manufacturer protability.
Because production cost data are not generally publicly available, learning curve estimates typically rely upon price data that can be impacted
by changes in materials costs and manufacturer protability, resulting in
the possibility of poorly estimated learning rates if dynamic price effects
are not considered (Yu et al., 2011).
7.8.4.2
7.8.4.3
A number of studies have developed forecasted cost trajectories for onand offshore wind energy based on differing combinations of learning
curve estimates, engineering models, and/or expert judgement. These
estimates are sometimesbut not alwayslinked to certain levels of
assumed wind energy deployment. Representative examples of this literature include Junginger et al. (2004), Carbon Trust (2008b), IEA (2008,
2010b, 2010c), US DOE (2008), EWEA (2009), Lemming et al. (2009),
Teske et al. (2010), GWEC and GPI (2010) and UKERC (2010).
Recognizing that the starting year of the forecasts, the methodological approaches used, and the assumed deployment levels vary, these
recent studies nonetheless support a range of levelized cost of energy
reductions for onshore wind of 10 to 30% by 2020, and for offshore
wind of 10 to 40% by 2020. Some studies focused on offshore wind
energy technology even identify scenarios in which market factors lead
to continued increases in the cost of offshore wind energy, at least in the
near to medium term (BWEA and Garrad Hassan, 2009; UKERC, 2010).
Longer-term projections are more reliant on assumed deployment levels
and are subject to greater uncertainties, but for 2030, the same studies
support reductions in the levelized cost of onshore wind energy of 15 to
35% and of offshore wind energy of 20 to 45%.
590
Chapter 7
Chapter 7
are inherently more uncertain and depend, in part, on deployment levels and R&D expenditures that are also uncertain, the focus here is on
relatively nearer-term cost projections to 2020. Specically, Section
7.8.3.4 reported 2009 levelized cost of energy estimates for onshore
wind energy of roughly US cents2005 5 to 15/kWh, whereas estimates
for offshore wind energy were in the range of US cents2005 10 to 20/
kWh. Conservatively, the percentage cost reductions reported above can
be applied to these estimated 2009 levelized generation cost values to
develop low and high projections for future levelized generation costs.51
Based on these assumptions, the levelized generation cost of onshore
wind energy could range from roughly US cents2005 3.5 to 10.5/kWh by
2020 in a high cost-reduction case (30% by 2020), and from US cents2005
4.5 to 13.5/kWh in a low cost-reduction case (10% by 2020). Offshore
wind energy is often anticipated to experience somewhat deeper cost
reductions, with levelized generation costs that range from roughly US
cents2005 6 to 12/kWh by 2020 in a high cost-reduction case (40% by
2020) to US cents2005 9 to 18/kWh in a low cost-reduction case (10%
by 2020).52
Uncertainty exists over future wind energy costs, and the range of
costs associated with varied wind resource strength introduces greater
uncertainty. As installed wind power capacity increases, higher-quality
resource sites will tend to be utilized rst, leaving higher-cost sites for
later development. As a result, the average levelized cost of wind energy
will depend on the amount of deployment, not only due to learning
effects, but also because of resource exhaustion. This supply-curve
effect is not captured in the estimates presented above. The estimates
presented here therefore provide an indication of the technology
advancement potential for on- and offshore wind energy, but should be
used with some caution.
7.9
Potential deployment53
Wind energy offers signicant potential for near- and long-term GHG
emissions reductions. The wind power capacity installed by the end of
2009 was capable of meeting roughly 1.8% of worldwide electricity
demand and, as presented in this section, that contribution could grow
to in excess of 20% by 2050. On a global basis, the wind resource is
51 Because of the cost drivers discussed earlier in this section, wind energy costs in
2009 were higher than in some previous years. Applying the percentage cost reductions from the available literature to the 2009 starting point is, therefore, arguably a
conservative approach to estimating future cost reduction possibilities; an alternative
approach would be to use the absolute values of the cost estimates provided by the
available literature. As a result, and also due to the underlying uncertainty associated
with projections of this nature, future costs outside of the ranges presented here are
possible.
52 As mentioned earlier, the 2009 starting point values for offshore wind energy are
consistent with recently built or planned plants located in relatively shallow water.
53 Complementary perspectives on potential deployment based on a comprehensive
assessment of numerous model-based scenarios of the energy system are presented
in Sections 10.2 and 10.3 of this report.
Wind Energy
7.9.1
Near-term forecasts
The rapid increase in global wind power capacity from 2000 to 2009
is expected by many studies to continue in the near to medium term
(Table 7.6). From the roughly 160 GW of wind power capacity installed
by the end of 2009, the IEA (2010b) New Policies scenario and the
EIA (2010) Reference case scenario predict growth to 358 GW (forecasted electricity generation of 2.7 EJ/yr) and 277 GW (forecasted
electricity generation of 2.5 EJ/yr) by 2015, respectively. Wind energy
industry organizations predict even faster deployment rates, noting
that past IEA and EIA forecasts have understated actual growth by a
sizable margin (BTM, 2010; GWEC, 2010a). However, even these more
aggressive forecasts estimate that wind energy will contribute less
than 5% of global electricity supply by 2015. Asia, North America and
Europe are projected to lead in wind power capacity additions over
this period.
7.9.2
591
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
Summary
The European Unions (EU) Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS) is a cornerstone of the EUs
efforts to meet its obligation under the Kyoto Protocol. It covers more than 10,000 energy
intensive facilities across the 27 EU Member countries; covered entities emit about 45% of the
EUs carbon dioxide emissions. A Phase 1 trading period began January 1, 2005. A second,
Phase 2, trading period began in 2008, covering the period of the Kyoto Protocol. A Phase 3 will
begin in 2013 designed to reduce emissions by 21% from 2005 levels.
Several positive results from the Phase 1 learning by doing exercise assisted the ETS in making
the Phase 2 process run more smoothly, including: (1) greatly improving emissions data, (2)
encouraging development of the Kyoto Protocols project-based mechanismsClean
Development Mechanism (CDM) and Joint Implementation (JI), and (3) influencing corporate
behavior to begin pricing in the value of allowances in decision-making, particularly in the
electric utility sector.
However, several issues that arose during the first phase were not resolved as the ETS moved into
Phase 2, including allocation schemes and new entrant reserves, and others. A more
comprehensive and coordinated response by the EU has been made for Phase 3 with harmonized
and coordinated rules being developed by the European Commission.
The United States is not a party to the Kyoto Protocol. However, five years of carbon emissions
trading has given the EU valuable experience in designing and operating a greenhouse gas trading
system. This experience may provide some insight into cap-and-trade design issues currently
being debated in the United States.
The U.S. requires only electric utilities to monitor CO2. The EU-ETS experience
suggests that expanding similar requirements to all facilities covered under a capand-trade scheme would be pivotal for developing allocation systems, reduction
targets, and enforcement provisions.
As with most EU industries, most U.S. industry groups either oppose auctions
outright or want them to be supplemental to a base free allocation. The EU-ETS
experience suggests Congress may want to consider specifying any auction
requirement if it wishes to incorporate market economics more fully into
compliance decisions.
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
Contents
Overview ....................................................................................................................................1
Results from Phase 1 and 2 .........................................................................................................3
Phase 3 .......................................................................................................................................8
Auctions ...............................................................................................................................9
New Entrant Reserves ......................................................................................................... 11
EC Phase 3 Decision on Eligible Industries ......................................................................... 12
Flexibility Mechanisms and Price Volatility Control ............................................................ 13
Expanding Coverage ........................................................................................................... 14
Summary and Considerations for U.S. Cap-and-Trade Proposals ............................................... 15
Emission Inventories and Target Setting .............................................................................. 15
Coverage ............................................................................................................................ 16
Allocation Schemes ............................................................................................................ 17
Flexibility and Price Volatility............................................................................................. 18
Figures
Figure 1. ECX CFI Futures Contracts: Price and Volume.............................................................5
Figure 2. EU-15 Greenhouse Gas Emissions and Projections for the Kyoto Period: 19902012 ........................................................................................................................................6
Figure 3. Summary of EU-15 Emissions Projection Compared to Projected Kyoto
Protocol Credits .......................................................................................................................7
Tables
Table 1. Proposed Annual ETS Cap Figures for Phase 3 ..............................................................8
Contacts
Author Contact Information ...................................................................................................... 19
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
Overview1
Climate change is generally viewed as a global issue, but proposed responses typically require
action at the national level. With the 1997 Kyoto Protocol now in force and setting emissions
objectives for 2008-2012, countries that ratified the protocol are implementing strategies to begin
reducing their emissions of greenhouse gases.2 In particular, the European Union (EU) has
decided to use an emissions trading scheme (called a cap-and-trade program), along with other
market-oriented mechanisms permitted under the Protocol, to help it achieve compliance at least
cost.3 The decision to use emission trading to implement the Kyoto Protocol is at least partly
based on the successful emissions trading program used by the United States to implement its
sulfur dioxide (acid rain) control program contained in Title IV of the 1990 Clean Act
Amendments.4
The EUs Emissions Trading System (ETS) covers more than 10,000 energy-intensive facilities
across the 27 EU Member countries, including oil refineries, powerplants over 20 megawatts
(MW) in capacity, coke ovens, and iron and steel plants, along with cement, glass, lime, brick,
ceramics, and pulp and paper installations. In addition, aviation is currently being phased into the
ETS. These covered entities emit about 40%-45% of the EUs total greenhouse gas emissions,
and almost two-thirds of them are combustion installations. The trading program does not cover
either carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions from the transportation sector (except aviation), which
account for about 25% of the EUs total greenhouse gas emissions, or emissions of non-CO2
greenhouse gases, which account for about 20% of the EUs total greenhouse gas emissions. A
Phase 1 trading period ran between January 1, 2005, and December 31, 2007.5 A Phase 2 trading
period began January 1, 2008, covering the period of the Kyoto Protocol, and a Phase 3 has been
finalized to begin in 2013.6
Under the Kyoto Protocol, the then-existing 15 nations of the EU agreed to reduce their aggregate
annual average emissions for 2008-2012 by 8% from the Protocols baseline level (mostly 1990
levels) under a collective arrangement called a bubble. In light of the Kyoto Protocol targets,
the EU adopted a directive establishing the EU-ETS that entered into force October 13, 2003.7
Readers unfamiliar with the workings of the European Union may want to read CRS Report RS21372, The European
Union: Questions and Answers, by Kristin Archick and Derek E. Mix.
2
Six gases are included under the Kyoto Protocol: carbon dioxide, methane, nitrous oxide, hydrofluorocarbons,
perfluorocarbons, and sulfur hexafluoride. The United States has not ratified the Kyoto Protocol and, therefore, is not
covered by its provisions. For more information on the Kyoto Protocol, see CRS Report RL33826, Climate Change:
The Kyoto Protocol, Bali Action Plan, and International Actions, by Jane A. Leggett.
3
Norway, a non-EU country, also has instituted a CO2 trading system which is currently linked with the EU-ETS.
Various other countries and a state-sponsored regional initiative located in the northeastern United States involving
several states are developing mandatory cap-and-trade system programs, but are not operating at the current time. For a
review of these emerging programs, along with other voluntary efforts, see CRS Report RL33812, Climate Change:
Action by States to Address Greenhouse Gas Emissions, by Jonathan L. Ramseur.
4
P.L. 101-549, Title IV (November 15, 1990).
5
For further background on the ETS, see CRS Report RL34150, Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading
Scheme (ETS): Kyoto and Beyond, by Larry Parker.
6
More information, including relevant directives, on the EU-ETS is available on the European Unions website at
http://europa.eu.int/scadplus/leg/en/lvb/l28012.htm.
7
Directive 2003/87/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 October 2003 establishing a scheme for
greenhouse gas emissions allowance trading within the Community and amending Council Directive 96/61/EC.
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
One objective of the second phase of the ETS is to achieve 3.3 percentage points of the 8.0%
reduction required by the EU-15 under the Protocol.8
The importance of emissions trading was elevated by the accession of 12 additional central and
eastern European countries to EU membership from May 2004 through January 2007. For the
new EU-27, the overall ETS emissions cap is set at 2.08 billion metric tons of carbon dioxide
(CO2) annually for the Kyoto compliance period (2008-2012).
The second phase Kyoto compliance stage of the ETS is built on the experience the EU gained
from its preliminary Phase 1. The European Commission (EC) believes that the Phase 1 learning
by doing exercise prepared the community for the difficult task of achieving the reduction
requirements of the Kyoto Protocol. Several positive results from the Phase 1 experience assisted
the ETS in making the Phase 2 process run smoothly, at least so far. First, Phase 1 established
much of the critical infrastructure necessary for a functional emission market, including
emissions monitoring, registries, and inventories. Much of the publicized difficulty the ETS
experienced early in the first phase can be traced to inadequate emissions data infrastructure.9
Phase 1 significantly improved those critical elements in preparation for Phase 2 implementation.
Second, the ETS helped jump-start the project-based mechanismsClean Development
Mechanism (CDM) and Joint Implementation (JI)created under the Kyoto Protocol. 10 As stated
by Ellerman and Buchner:
The access to external credits provided by the Linking Directive has had an invigorating
effect on the CDM and more generally on CO2 reduction projects in developing countries,
especially in China and India, the two major countries that will eventually have to become
part of a global climate regime if there is to be one.11
Third, according to the EC, a key result of Phase 1 was its effect on corporate behavior. An EC
survey of stakeholders indicated that many participants are incorporating the value of allowances
in making decisions, particularly in the electric utility sector, where 70% of firms stated they were
pricing the value of allowances into their daily operations, and 87% into future marginal pricing
decisions. All industries stated that it was a factor in long-term decision-making.12
8
Commission of the European Communities, Communication from the Commission: Progress towards Achieving the
Kyoto Objectives (November 19, 2008). Other reductions are to be achieve through regulatory measures, such as a CO2
emissions standard for automobiles.
9
A. Denny Ellerman and Barbara K. Buchner, The European Union Emissions Trading Scheme: Origins, Allocations,
and Early Results, Environmental Economics and Policy (Winter 2007), pp. 69-70; and International Emissions
Trading Association, IETA Position Paper on EU ETS Marking Functioning, (no date), p. 3.
10
For more on the effect of the ETS on Kyoto mechanisms, see A. Denny Ellerman and Barbara K. Buchner, The
European Union Emissions Trading Scheme: Origins, Allocations, and Early Results, Environmental Economics and
Policy (Winter 2007), p. 84; and International Emissions Trading Association, IETA Position Paper on EU ETS
Market Functioning (no date), p. 2. For more information on the Kyoto Protocol mechanisms, see CRS Report
RL33826, Climate Change: The Kyoto Protocol, Bali Action Plan, and International Actions, by Jane A. Leggett.
11
A Denny Ellerman and Barbara K. Buchner, The European Union Emissions Trading Scheme: Origins, Allocations,
and Early Results, Environmental Economics and Policy (Winter 2007), p. 84.
12
European Commission, Directorate General for Environment, Review of EU Emissions Trading Scheme: Survey
Highlights, (November 2005), pp. 5-7.
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
However, several issues that arose during the first phase remained contentious as the ETS
implemented Phase 2, including allocation (including use of auctions and reliance on model
projections), new entrant reserves, and others. In addition, the expansion of the EU and the
implementation of the linking directives created new issues to which Phase 2 has had to
respond. 13 Based on lessons learned in Phase 1 and Phase 2, the EU has taken a substantially
different approach to these issues in Phase 3 that is discussed later.
For a further discussion of Phase 2 implementation issues, see CRS Report RL34150, Climate Change and the EU
Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Kyoto and Beyond, by Larry Parker.
14
For more information, see CRS Report RL33970, Greenhouse Gas Emission Drivers: Population, Economic
Development and Growth, and Energy Use, by John Blodgett and Larry Parker.
15
On the role of modeling in the first phase, see A Denny Ellerman and Barbara K. Buchner, The European Union
Emissions Trading Scheme: Origins, Allocations, and Early Results, 1 Environmental Economics and Policy 1
(Winter 2007), pp. 72-73.
16
Regina Betz and Misato Sato, Emissions Trading: Lessons Learnt from the 1st Phase of the EU ETS and Prospects
for the 2nd Phase, 6 Climate Policy (2006), p. 354.
17
For a further discussion, see CRS Report RL33581, Climate Change: The European Union's Emissions Trading
System (EU-ETS), by Larry Parker.
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
incorporate EUA prices into dispatch decisions that would have shifted generation to less
emitting plants. There is plenty of anecdotal evidence that this was the case, and the
prominent charges of windfall profits assume that the opportunity cost of freely allocated
allowances was being passed on (without noting the implications for abatement). Similarly, it
would be surprising if there were no changes in production processes that could be made by
the operators of industrial plants.18
However, EU emissions allowances (EUAs) during Phase 1 did not maintain value. Phase 1
EUAs were basically worthless during the final six months of 2007. This decline in EUA prices at
least partially reflected the general non-transferability of Phase 1 EUAs to Phase 2. Only Poland
and France included limited banking in their Phase 1 implementation plans (called National
Allocation Plans (NAPs)). The EC further restricted use of Phase 1 EUAs in Phase 2 with a ruling
in November 2006.19 As a result, excess Phase 1 EUAs were worthless at the end of 2007.20
One consequence of the non-transferability of Phase 1 EUAs is that prices for Phase 2 EUAs
remained relatively firm until the 2008-2009 recession reduced demand, as indicated by Figure 1.
Scarcity is critical for the proper functioning of an allowance market. As further indicated by
Figure 1, during 2009, the market firmed up at a much lower level as participants assessed the
impact of the recession on the demand for EUAs. This is a different response than the market had
during Phase 1, and may reflect Phase 2 improvements in the system. In particular, the more
predictable 2009 response may reflect the ability of the EC to certify Phase 2 NAPs using more
verifiable baseline data than were available for Phase 1.21 A major reason the EC rejected ex post
adjustments22 was fear that such adjustments would have a disruptive effect on the marketplace. 23
Phase 1 did not firmly establish this foundation of markets;24 based on the Phase 2 EUA futures
market, further market development appears to be occurring, although, like most commodity
markets, it remains somewhat volatile at times.
18
A Denny Ellerman and Barbara K. Buchner, The European Union Emissions Trading Scheme: Origins, Allocations,
and Early Results, 1 Environmental Economics and Policy 1 (Winter 2007), p. 83.
19
European Commission, Communication from the Commission to the Council and to the European Parliament on the
assessment of national allocation plans for the allocation of greenhouse gas emission allowances in the second period
of the EU Emissions Trading Scheme, COM(2006) 725 final (November 29, 2006), p. 11.
20
For a further discussion, see Joseph Kruger, Wallace E. Oates, and William A. Pizer, Decentralization in the EU
Emissions Trading Scheme and Lessons for Global Policy, 1 Environmental Economics and Policy 1 (Winter 2007), p.
126; and, Frank J. Convery and Luke Redmond, Market and Price Development in the European Union Emissions
Trading Scheme, 1 Environmental Economics and Policy 1 (Winter 2007), pp. 96-7, 107.
21
International Emissions Trading Association, IETA Position Paper on EU ETS Market Functioning, (no date), p. 2.
22
Once the EC has approved a countrys NAP, including the total number of allowances and the allocation to each
covered entity, the allocations can not be re-visited. Attempts to include provisions permitting such post-approval
adjustments to a facilitys allocation have been uniformly rejected by the EC.
23
European Commission, Communication from the Commission to the Council and to the European Parliament on the
assessment of national allocation plans for the allocation of greenhouse gas emission allowances in the second period
of the EU Emissions Trading Scheme, COM(2006) 725 final (November 29, 2006), p 8; and, A Denny Ellerman and
Barbara K. Buchner, The European Union Emissions Trading Scheme: Origins, Allocations, and Early Results, 1
Environmental Economics and Policy 1 (Winter 2007), p. 71.
24
On the mixed record of the EU-ETS and the need for allowance scarcity to a functioning emissions market, see Eric
Haymann, EU Emission Trading: Allocation Battles Intensifying, Deutsche Bank Research (March 6, 2007). For a
generally positive view of ETS market development, see Frank J. Convery and Luke Redmond, Market and Price
Development in the European Union Emissions Trading Scheme, 1 Environmental Economics and Policy 1 (Winter
2007), pp. 97-106. For a more negative view, see Karsten Neuhoff, Federico Ferrario, Michael Grubb, Etienne Gabel,
and Kim Keats, Emissions Projections 2008-2012 Versus NAPs II, 6 Climate Policy 5 (2006), pp. 395-410.
35
35
30
30
25
20
20
15
15
10
10
06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09
20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20 /20
/
6 7 1 2 1 1 1 1 3 3 6 7 5 6 5 6 6 9 9 2 4 4 4 2 3 3 6 6 8 1 2 2 2 2 1
2/ 3/1 5/ 6/1 7/2 8/3 0/1 1/2 1/ 2/1 3/2 5/ 6/1 7/2 9/ 0/1 1/2 1/ 2/1 4/ 5/1 6/2 8/ 9/1 0/2 12/ 1/1 2/2 4/ 5/2 7/ 8/1 9/2 11/ 2/1
1
1 1
1 1
1
Source: ECX Exchange.
Note: Dec09 Sett: Future contracts with a settlement date of December, 2009.
CRS-5
25
Dec09 Sett
40
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
While the environmental performance of Phase 1 may be disputed, the need for additional
reductions to achieve Kyoto is not. For 2008, the EU-15 is estimated to be 6.2% below its baseyear emissions, compared with an 8% five-year average reduction commitment under the Kyoto
Protocol. As indicated by Figure 2, this represents a continuation of reductions by EU-15 over
the past five years. However, as indicated by the pink line, the European Environment Agency
(EEA) projects that the EU-15 existing measures are insufficient to reduce EU-15 emissions to
their Kyoto requirements (represented by the purple line), resulting in a projected 6.9% reduction
from baseline levels. To achieve the Kyoto target the EU projects further actions reductions by
EU-15 countries (represented by the green line in Figure 2), resulting in an overall reduction of
8.5% compared with baseline levels.
Figure 2. EU-15 Greenhouse Gas Emissions and Projections for the Kyoto Period:
1990-2012
Source: European Environmental Agency, Greenhouse Gas Emissions Trends and Projects in Europe 2000, (2009) p.
10.
Note: WEM: with existing measures (measures implemented or adopted). WAM: with additional measures
(planned measures).
In addition to domestic emission reductions, the EU has also projected additional reduction
credits received by activities permitted under the Kyoto Protocol: (1) purchase of project-based
credits by ETS participants and EU governments (e.g., Joint Implementation (JI) and Clean
Development Mechanism (CDM) projects); and, (2) the use of carbon sinks. As indicated in
Figure 3, these activities provide a credit on the EU-15 baseline of 4.6 percentage points. Thus, if
the EU-15 maintains its current path, it would exceed its Kyoto commitment by about 3.5
percentage points (6.9% minus 3.4%). If its planned measures result in the projected 8.5%
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
reduction below baseline levels, the overachievement of its Kyoto commitment would be 5.1
percentage points (8.5% minus 3.4%).25
Figure 3. Summary of EU-15 Emissions Projection Compared to Projected Kyoto
Protocol Credits
Source: European Environmental Agency, Greenhouse Gas Emissions Trends and Projects in Europe 2000, (2009) p.
11.
Notes: The left section shows the projected emissions considering only domestic measures (existing and
additional) and is showing them as average 2008-2012 emissions (lines) and annual emissions (bars). The right
section shows the projected amount of Kyoto credits accumulated by the end of the commitment period,
including the initial EC assigned amount under the Protocol, the purchase of Kyoto project credits by EU ETS
participants and EU governments, and carbon sink activities.
The EU-27 as a whole does not have an emissions target comparable to the EU-15 bubble. By
2010, EU-27 emissions are projected at 9.6% below Kyoto baseline levels assuming current
policies. This reduction is projected at 11.3% if additional measures are included. Currently, 24 of
the 25 countries with reduction requirements are projected to meet their commitments under the
Kyoto Protocol. 26 Only Austria is not projected to meet its requirements even with additional
planned measures and the use of Kyoto mechanisms. 27
25
European Environment Agency, Greenhouse Gas Emissions Trends and Projections in Europe 2009, (2009) p. 11.
Cyprus and Malta are not Annex 1 countries.
27
European Environmental Agency, Greenhouse Gas Emission Trends and Projections in Europe 2009 (2009), p. 12.
26
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
Phase 3
The European Union is committed to achieving a 20% reduction in greenhouse gas emissions by
2020 from 1990 levels (or more depending on the actions of other countries). A strategic
component of the effort to achieve this target is a revised ETS that will achieve a 21% reduction
from covered entities from 2005 levels. Table 1 indicates the proposed EU-wide ETS cap for the
next Phase of EU greenhouse gas program (Phase 3) assuming no further international
commitments (the final 2013 cap figure is required by June 30, 2010). As indicated, the EC
envisions a linear reduction in the ETS cap to match the reduction target under the overall 20%
reduction program. These numbers will change as individual countries decide to include more
facilities under the ETS and as the EC expands ETS coverage to include other sectors and nonCO2 greenhouse gases.
Table 1. Proposed Annual ETS Cap Figures for Phase 3
Year
2.083
2013
1.974
2014
1.937
2015
1.901
2016
1.865
2017
1.829
2018
1.792
2019
1.756
2020
1.720
Source: European Commission, Questions and Answers on the Commissions Proposal to revise the EU Emissions
Trading System (Brussels, January 23, 2009), response to question 12.
Note: Figures are based on the current Phase 2 scope of the ETS. These need to be adjusted for three reasons:
(1) extensions of ETS scope during phase 2 by Member states; (2) extensions of ETS scope by the EC for third
trading period, and (3) the figures do not include inclusion of aviation, nor the emissions from Norway, Iceland,
and Liechtensteinnon-EU countries that have linked their programs to the ETS.
For Phase 3, the EU is re-shaping the ETS to improve its efficiency and eliminate some of the
problems identified during Phase 1 and 2.28 For Phase 2, the improved emissions inventories
resulting from Phase 1 allowed the EC to harmonize the types of installations covered by the ETS
across the various Member States.29 In addition, the EC imposed a uniform rule on the Member
States preventing the use of ex-post adjustments. However, Phase 2 made little advancement in
28
European Commission, Directive 2009/29/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 April 2009
amending Directive 2003/87/EC so as to improve and extend the greenhouse gas emission allowance trading system of
the Community (Brussels, April 23, 2009). Hereinafter referred to as the Directive.
29
European Commission, Limiting Global Change to 2 degrees Celsius: The Way Ahead for 2020 and Beyond
(Brussels, January 10, 2007), p. 23.
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
Auctions
Under Phases 1 and 2, allowances generally were and are allocated free to participating entities
under the ETS. During Phase 1, The EU-ETS Directive allowed countries to auction up to 5% of
allowance allocations, rising to 10% under Phase 2.34 Under Phase 1, only 4 of 25 countries used
auctions at all, and only Denmark auctioned the full 5%. The political difficulty in instituting
significant auctioning into ETS allowance allocations is the almost universal agreement by
covered entities in favor of free allocation of allowances and opposition to auctions.35 Free
allocation of allowances represents a one-time transfer of wealth to the entities receiving them
from the government issuing them. 36 The resulting transfer of wealth has been described by
30
Joachim Schleich, Regina Betz, and Karoline Rogge, EU Emissions TradingBetter Job Second Time Around?
Fraunhofer Institute System and Innovation Research (February 2007), p. 23.
31
Commission of the European Communities, Directive 2003/87/EC, available at http://eur-lex.europa.eu/LexUriServ/
LexUriServ.do?uri=OJ:L:2003:275:0032:0046:EN:PDF.
32
European Commission, Proposal for a Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council amending Directive
2003/87/EC so as to improve and extend the greenhouse gas emission allowance trading system of the Community
(Brussels, January 23, 2008).
33
European Commission, Directive 2009/29/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council amending Directive
2003/87/EC so as to improve and extend the greenhouse gas emission allowance trading system of the Community
(Brussels, April 23, 2009).
34
For a further discussion of auctioning and the ETS, see Cameron Hepburn, et. al., Auctioning of EU ETS phase II
allowances: how and why? 6 Climate Policy (2006), pp. 137-160.
35
A Denny Ellerman and Barbara K. Buchner, The European Union Emissions Trading Scheme: Origins, Allocations,
and Early Results, 1 Environmental Economics and Policy 1 (Winter 2007), p. 73.
36
Joseph Kruger, Wallace E. Oates, and William A. Pizer, Decentralization in the EU Emissions Trading Scheme and
(continued...)
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
After nine eastern European Member States threatened to veto an initial proposal to auction 100%
of all allowances, the EU compromised to provide for some free allocation of allowances during
Phase 3 that will begin in 2013.41 Most covered industries will be eligible for some free allocation
of allowances to cover direct emissions under the Phase 3 agreement. The introduction of auction
would be differentiated by sector. In general, for the power sector, full auctioning will begin in
2013. For electric powerplants, most will receive no free allocation of allowances during Phase 3.
However, in a concession to certain eastern European Member States, an optional and temporary
derogation from the no-free-allocation requirement for powerplants is provided to countries that
meet specific energy and economic criteria. Under the optional allocation scheme, the Member
State can allocate allowances equal to 70% of the powerplants Phase 1 emissions free; this
allocation declines to zero in 2020.
(...continued)
Lessons for Global Policy, 1 Environmental Economics and Policy 1 (Winter 2007), p. 114.
37
E.g., Deutsche Bank Research, EU Emission Trading: Allocation Battles Intensifying, (March 6, 2007) pp. 2-3; and
Regina Betz and Misato Sato, Emissions Trading: Lessons Learnt from the 1st Phase of the EU ETS and Prospects for
the 2nd Phase, 6 Climate Policy (2006), p. 353.
38
A Denny Ellerman and Barbara K. Buchner, The European Union Emissions Trading Scheme: Origins, Allocations,
and Early Results, 1 Environmental Economics and Policy 1 (Winter 2007), p. 85.
39
For more information, see CRS Report RL34150, Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS):
Kyoto and Beyond, by Larry Parker.
40
Martina Priebe, Distributional Effect of Carbon-allowance Trading (Cambridge, January 12, 2007). Also, see
Eurochambres, Review of the EU Emission Trading System (June 2007), p. 5.
41
See Position of the European Parliament adopted at the first reading on 17 December 2008 with a view to the
adoption of Directive 2009//EC of the European Parliament and of the Council amending Directive 2003/87/EC so
as to improve and extend the greenhouse gas emission allowance trading system of the Community (December 17,
2008).
10
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
The auction schedule for most other covered entities is more gradual with 80% of a sectors
allocation provided free in 2013, declining linearly to 30% by 2020, and zero by 2027. As stated
in the final Directive:
For other sectors covered by the Community scheme, a transitional system should be
foreseen for which free allocation in 2013 would be 80% of the amount that corresponded to
the percentage of the overall Community-wide emissions throughout the period 2005 to 2007
that those installations emitted as a proportion of the annual Community-wide total quantity
of allowances. Thereafter, the free allocation should decrease each year by equal amounts
resulting in 30% free allocation in 2020, with a view to reaching no free allocation in 2027.
(paragraph 21)
Because of concern that stringent EU carbon policies may encourage production and related
greenhouse gas emissions to shift to countries without carbon policies (i.e., carbon leakage),
exceptions to this phase-out of free allowances will be made in sectors where carbon leakage may
occur, as discussed later.
Distribution of allowances to be auctioned by the Member States will be determined by a threepart formula (Article 10(2)). Eighty-eight percent of the allowances to be auctioned by each
Member State is distributed to States according to their historic emissions under Phase 1 of the
EU-ETS. Ten percent of the total is distributed to States mostly based in their comparative GDP
per capita within the EU (Annex IIa). Two percent of the total is distributed to nine former
eastern-bloc countries based on the substantial greenhouse gas reductions they have already
achieved (Annex IIb). Auctions will be conducted at the Member State level (cooperative
auctions between States are also allowed) and must be open to any potential buyer. The EC is
directed to develop the appropriate rules for coordinated auctions by June 30, 2010.
Beyond the allocation of allowances, the EU Directive also provides guidelines for the allocation
of revenues from allowance auctions. The Directive states that at least 50% of the proceeds
should be used to fund a variety of climate change related activities, including emission
reductions, adaptation activities, renewable energy, carbon capture and storage (CCS), the Global
Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy Fund, and assisting developing countries to avoid
deforestation and increase afforestation and reforestation (Article 10(3)).
42
For example, the U.S. acid rain program provides no allocation of allowances to new entrants; instead, an EPA
sanctioned auction is held annually to ensure that allowances are available to new entrants. New entrants can also
obtain allowances from existing sources willing to sell them, either directly, through the EPA auction, or via a broker.
43
A Denny Ellerman and Barbara K. Buchner, The European Union Emissions Trading Scheme: Origins, Allocations,
and Early Results, 1 Environmental Economics and Policy 1 (Winter 2007), p. 75.
11
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
As is the case for existing entities, the free allocation of allowances to new entrants is a subsidy.
Under Phase 1 and Phase 2, the size and distribution of this subsidy is left to the individual
Member States. For Phase 1, the reserve varied widely from the average of 3% of total
allowances: Poland set aside only 0.4% of its allocation for new entrants while Malta set aside
26%. For Phase 2, the spread continues with Poland reserving 3.2% of its allowances for new
entrants in contrast to 45% reserved by Latvia.44
The decision to employ a new entrant reserve adds complexity to Member States allocation plans
and influences the investment decisions of covered entities. Rules had to be promulgated with
respect to the reserves size, manner in which the allowances are dispensed, and how to proceed if
the demand either exceeds the supply, or vice versa. As indicated, countries did not harmonize
new entrant reserve rules with respect to size during Phase 1 or 2. Likewise, there is no
standardization on dispensing allowances and replenishing the reserve: first-come, first-serve
with no replenishment is one approach used, but a variety of procedures have been developed
both to dispense allowances and to replenish the reserve if supply is inadequate. Member States
also have different formulas for determining how many allowances a new entrant should receive.
Member States claim to use a form of benchmarking to determine allowance allocationsan
approach based on a standard of best practices or best technology that is applied to the new
entrants anticipated production or capacity. However, the definitions and application of the
benchmarks used by the Member States are not uniform.
This will change under Phase 3. Under Phase 3, the Directive sets an EU-wide cap of 5% of the
total allowance cap for a new entrant reserve, and requires the harmonization of allocation rules.
The EC is to adopt a harmonized rule for applying a new entrant definition contained in the
Directive by December 31, 2010; the Directive expressly excludes any new electricity production
from being defined as a new entrant. The EC is also to determine EU-wide benchmarks for the
allocation of all free allowances. The Directive states that the starting point for setting those
benchmarks shall be the average performance of the 10% most efficient installations in a sector or
subsector in the EU in the years 2007-2008 (Article 10a(2)).
In an attempt to stimulate development of CCS, the Directive also provides that up to 300 million
allowances in the new entrants reserve shall be available through 2015 for aiding construction
and operation of up to 12 demonstration projects. No one project can receive more than 15% of
the allowances allocated for this purpose (Article 10a(8)).
Karoline Rogge, Joachim Schleich, and Regina Betz, An Early Assessment of National Allocation Plans for Phase 2
of EU Emission Trading, Fraunhofer Institute System and Innovation Research (January 2006).
45
For more information on climate change and competitiveness issues, see CRS Report R40914, Climate Change: EU
and Proposed U.S. Approaches to Carbon Leakage and WTO Implications, by Larry Parker and Jeanne J. Grimmett.
12
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
quantities, and to the still functioning long-term electricity contracts, which softened the
blow of rising electricity prices. Further, the general boom in prices for most traded products
subject to carbon costswhether direct or indirecthas blurred any effects of the latter.
Finally, the relatively short time span of these policies does not allow observation of the full
potential effects on industry via changes in investment location decisions.46
This conclusion is echoed by Carbon Trust, which states that currently, free allocation of
emissions allowances offset almost all of the additional costs of the ETS; and that conclusion is
echoed by The Climate Group for The German Marshall Fund, which states that companies
surveyed found it difficult to quantify effects on their bottom line in the first phase, or found no
effect at all.47
For energy-intensive, trade-exposed industries, Phase 3 has provisions to provide assistance to
eligible installations to address the direct and indirect impact of emissions control costs. With
respect to direct emissions costs, the EC published a list of installations exposed to a significant
risk of carbon leakage on December 24, 2009, as required under the Directive. 48 The list is
identical to the draft list released in September 2009.49 The decision lists 164 industrial sectors
and subsectors deemed to be exposed sectors under the appropriate European Parliament and
Council directives. Eligible installations will receive allowances sufficient to cover 100% of their
direct emissions, provided they are using the most efficient technology available. This 100%
allocation contrasts with the 80% distribution of free allowances to non-carbon leakage exposed
industries in 2013. Reflecting the fluid nature of the competitive situation and international
negotiations, the EC is to review its decision June 30, 2010, and provide the European Parliament
and Council with any appropriate proposals to respond to the situation.
Assistance for the impact of indirect emissions control costs on exposed industries from higher
electricity prices would be determined by Member States. As stated by the Directive:
Member States may deem it necessary to compensate temporarily certain installations which
have been determined to be exposed to a significant risk of carbon leakage related to
greenhouse gas emissions passed on in electricity prices for these costs. Such support should
only be granted where it is necessary and proportionate and should ensure that the
Community scheme incentives to save energy and to stimulate a shift in demand from grey
to green electricity are maintained. (paragraph 27)
Julia Reinaud, Issues Behind Competitiveness and Carbon Leakage: Focus on Heavy Industry (October 2008), p. 6.
Carbon Trust, EU ETS Impacts on Profitability and Trade (January 2008), p. 4; and The Climate Group, The Effects
of EU Climate Legislation on Business Competitiveness; A Survey and Analysis (September 2009), p. 8.
48
European Commission, Commission Decision of 24 December 2009 determining, pursuant to Directive 2003/87/EC
of the European Parliament and of the Council, a list of sectors and subsectors which are deemed to be exposed to a
significant risk of carbon leakage (Brussels, 2009).
49
European Commission, Draft Commission Decision of 18 September2009 determining, pursuant to Directive
2003/87/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council, a list of sectors and subsectors which are deemed to be
exposed to a significant risk of carbon leakage (Brussels, 2009).
47
13
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
has been the supplementarity requirement of the Kyoto Protocol to use its flexibility
mechanisms. Supplementarity requires that developed countries, such as most EU countries,
ensure that their use of JI/CDM credits is supplemental to their own domestic control efforts. In
defining supplementarity for Phase 2, the EC used 10% of a countrys allowance allocation as a
rule of thumb in approving NAPswith a greater limit possible based on a countrys domestic
efforts to reduce emissions. This process resulted in some significant reductions in some
countries proposed limits (e.g., Ireland, Poland, Spain), but some increase in others (e.g., Italy,
Latvia, Lithuania). Although these reductions appear substantial in individual cases, most analysts
agree that they do not represent a major barrier to the cost-effective use of JI/CDM. However, the
EU-ETS does not accept credits from land use, land-use change and forestry (LULUCF) projects.
For Phase 3, the EU maintains its ban on using LULUCF credits within the ETS. However, it will
permit up to 50% of the required reductions mandated under Phase 3 to be achieved through
CDM or JI credits. For existing installations, this represents a total of 1.6 billion credits over the
eight-year compliance period. Limits on use of Kyoto credits will be based on a facilitys 20082012 allocation (for an existing facilities) or its verified emissions during Phase 3 (for a new
entrant or sector). The EC estimates that the minimum amount of Kyoto credits an existing
facility will be able to use to comply with Phase 3 will be 11% of its 2008-2012 allocation, while
new entrants and sectors will be able to use a minimum of 4.5% of their verified emissions during
2013-2020 (article 11a(8)). The precise percentages will be determined later.
Another flexibility mechanism, banking, is extended by the Directive from Phase 2 to Phase 3 in
order to prevent a Phase 1 style collapse of allowance prices when the ETS transitions into Phase
3. In addition, the EU hopes that extending the trading period from five years to eight years, along
with the steady, linear emissions reduction schedule, will increase certainty and stability in the
allowance markets.
Phase 3 will introduce two other mechanisms designed to address price volatility. First, the EC is
required under the Directive to examine whether the market for emission allowances is
sufficiently protected from insider dealing or market manipulation. If not, the EC is to present
proposals to ensure such protection to the EP and the Council (article 12(a)).
Second, the Directive provides that if the allowance price is more than three times the preceding
two-year average for more than six consecutive months and the price is not based on market
fundamentals, one of two measures may be taken. The first would allow Member States to shift
forward the auctioning of some of its auctionable allowances. The second would allow Member
States to auction up to 25% of the remaining allowances in the new entrants reserve (article
29(a)).
Expanding Coverage
Despite the ECs interest in expanding the ETS, its coverage in terms of industries included for
Phase 2 is essentially the same as for Phase 1. The exception is for aviation. In December, 2006,
the EC proposed bringing greenhouse gas emissions from civil aviation into the ETS in two
phases. 50 As agreed to by the European Parliament in July 2008, all intra-EU and international
50
European Commission, Proposal for a Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council amending Directive
2003/87/EC so as to include aviation activities in the scheme for greenhouse gas emission allowance trading within the
Community (Brussels, December 12, 2006).
14
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
flights will be included under the ETS beginning in 2012. Emissions would be capped at 97% of
average 2004-2006 emissions with 85% of the allowances being allocated free to operators. The
cap would be reduced to 95% in 2013. The cap and auctioning of allowances would be reviewed
as a part of Phase 3 implementation.
Annex I of the Directive identifies three CO2 emitting sectors for inclusion under the ETS:
petrochemicals, ammonia, and aluminum. The ETS will also expand beyond CO2 to include
nitrous oxide (N2O) emissions from nitric, adipic, and glyoxalic acid production, and
perofluorocarbon (PFC) emissions from the aluminum sector. This would expand ETS covered
emissions by 4.6% over Phase 2 allowance allocations, or about 100 million metric tons.51 The
harmonization and codification of eligibility criteria for combustion installations is expected to
increase the coverage by a further 40-50 million metric tons.
To improve the cost-effectiveness of the ETS and reduce administrative costs, the Directive
provides that small installations may be subject to other control regimes (such as carbon taxes)
rather than included under the EU-ETS. Currently, the smallest 1,400 (10% of total installations
covered) installations emit only 0.14% of total emissions covered. The Directive provides that
Member States may opt to exclude installations that emit less than 25,000 metric tons annually
from the EU-ETS (paragraph 11).
51
European Commission, Proposal for a Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council amending Directive
2003/87/EC so as to improve and extend the greenhouse gas emission allowance trading system of the Community
(Brussels, January 23, 2008), p. 4.
52
As stated by CRS in 1992: For an economic incentive system to be effective, several preconditions are necessary.
Perhaps the most important is data about the emissions being controlled. Such data are important to levy any tax,
allocate any permits, and enforce any limit. CRS Issue Brief IB92125, Global Climate: Proposed Economic
Mechanisms for Reducing CO2, by Larry Parker (archived November 16, 1994), p. 9.
15
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
In the United States, Section 821 of the 1990 Clean Air Act Amendments requires electric
generating facilities affected by the acid rain provisions of Title IV to monitor carbon dioxide in
accordance with EPA regulations.53 This provision was enacted for the stated purpose of
establishing a national carbon dioxide monitoring system. 54 As promulgated by EPA, regulations
permit owners and operators of affected facilities to monitor their carbon dioxide emissions
through either continuous emission monitoring (CEM) or fuel analysis.55 The CEM regulations
for carbon dioxide are similar to those for the acid rain programs sulfur dioxide CEM
regulations. Those choosing fuel analysis must calculate mass emissions on a daily, quarterly, and
annual basis, based on amounts and types of fuel used. As suggested by the EU-ETS experience,
expanding equivalent data requirements to all facilities covered under a cap-and-trade program
would be the foundation for developing allocation systems, reduction targets, and enforcement
provisions.
Coverage
Despite economic analysis to the contrary, the EU decided to restrict Phase 1 ETS coverage to six
sectors that represented about 40%-45% of the EUs CO2 emissions.56 This restriction was
estimated to raise the cost of complying with Kyoto from 6 billion euro annually to 6.9 billion
euro (1999 euro) compared with a comprehensive trading program. A variety of practical,
political, and scientific reasons were given by the EC for the decision.57
The experience of the ETS up to now suggests that adding new sectors to an existing trading
program is a difficult process. As noted above, a stated goal of the EC is to expand the coverage
of the ETS. However, the experience of Phase 1 did not result in the addition of any new sector
until the last year of Phase 2 when aviation will be included. The EU will expand its coverage
with Phase 3, but the ETS will still cover fewer sectors emitting greenhouse gases than provided
under most U.S. proposals.
U.S. cap-and-trade proposals generally fall into one of two categories. Most bills are more
comprehensive than the ETS, covering 80% to 100% of the countrys greenhouse gas emissions.
At a minimum, they include the electric utility, transportation, and industrial sectors;
disagreement among the bills center on the agricultural sector and smaller commercial and
residential sources. In some cases discretion is provided EPA to exempt sources if serious data,
economic, or other considerations dictate such a resolution.
A second category of bills focuses on the electric utility industry, representing about 33% of U.S.
greenhouse gases and therefore less comprehensive than the ETS. Sometimes including additional
controls on non-greenhouse gas pollutants, such as mercury, these bills focus on the sources with
the most experience with emission trading and the best emissions data. Other sources could be
added as circumstances dictate.
53
Section 821, 1990 Clean Air Act Amendments (P.L. 101-549, 42 USC 7651k).
S.Rept. 101-952.
55
See 40 CFR 75.13, along with appendix G (for CEMs specifications) and appendix F (for fuel analysis specifications.
54
56
For more background, see CRS Report RL33581, Climate Change: The European Unions Emissions Trading
System (EU-ETS), by Larry Parker.
57
Ibid., p 3.
16
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
As noted, the EUs experience with the ETS suggests that adding sectors to an emission trading
scheme can be a slow and contentious process. If one believes that the electric utility sector is a
cost-effective place to start addressing greenhouse gas emissions and that there is sufficient time
to do the necessary groundwork to eventually add other sectors, then a phased-in approach may
be reasonable. If one believes that the economy as a whole needs to begin adjusting to a carbonconstrained environment to meet long term goals, then a more comprehensive approach may be
justified. The ETS experience suggests the process doesnt necessarily get any easier if you wait.
Allocation Schemes
Setting up a tradeable allowance system is a lot like setting up a new currency. 58 Allocating
allowances is essentially allocating money with the marketplace determining the exchange rate.
As noted above, the free allocation scheme used in the ETS has resulted in windfall profits
being received by allowance recipients. As stated quite forcefully by Deutsche Bank Research:
The most striking market outcome of emissions trading to date has been the power industrys
windfall profits, which have sparked controversy. We are all familiar with the background:
emissions allowances were handed out free of charge to those plant operators participating in
the emissions trading scheme. Nevertheless, in particular the producers of electricity
succeeded in marking up the market price of electricity to include the opportunity-cost value
of the allowances. This is correct from an accounting point of view, since the allowances do
have a value and could otherwise be sold. Moreover, emissions trading cannot work without
price signals.59
The free allocation of allowances in Phase 1 and 2 of the ETS incorporates two other mechanisms
that create perverse incentives and significant distortions in the emissions markets: new entrant
reserves and closure policy. Combined with an uncoordinated and spotty benchmarking approach
for both new and existing sources, the result is a greenhouse gas reduction scheme that is
influenced as much or more by national policy than by the emissions marketplace.
The expansion of auctions for Phase 3 of the ETS could simplify allocations and permit market
forces to influence compliance strategies more fully. Most countries did not employ auctions at
all during Phase 1 and auctions continue to be limited under Phase 2. No country combined an
auction with a reserve price to encourage development of new technology. The EC limited the
amount of auctioned allowances to 10% in Phase 2: a limit no country chose to meet. Efforts to
expand auctions met opposition from industry groups, but attracted support from environmental
groups and economists. The Phase 3 increased use of auctioning through 2020 will represent a
major development for the scheme.
Currently, all U.S. cap-and-trade proposals have some provisions for auctions, although the
amount involved is sometimes left to EPA discretion. Most specify a schedule that provides
increasing use of auctions from 2012 through the mid-2030s with a final target of 66%-100% of
total allowances auctioned. Funds would be used for a variety of purposes, including programs to
encourage new technologies. Some proposals include a reserve price on some auctions to create a
price floor for new technology.
58
59
Unlike a carbon tax which uses the existing currency system to control emissionsbe it euro or dollars.
Deutsche Bank Research, EU Emission Trading: Allocation Battles Intensifying (March 6, 2007), p. 2.
17
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
Like the situation in the ETS, most U.S. industry groups either oppose auctions outright or want
them to be supplemental to a base free allocation. Given the experience with the ETS where the
EC and individual governments have been unwilling or unable to move away from free
allocation, the Congress, like the EU, may ultimately be asked to consider specifying any auction
requirement if it wishes to incorporate market economics more fully into compliance decisions.
Maria Mansanet-Bataller, Angel Pardo, and Enric Valor, CO2 Prices, Energy and Weather, 28 The Energy Journal
3 (2007), pp. 73-92.
18
Climate Change and the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS): Looking to 2020
particularly with the inclusion of financial instruments such as options and futures contracts. The
concern is sufficient for the Directive to require the EC to examine the situation and the current
protections against such activities. Congress may ultimately be asked to consider whether the
Securities and Exchange Commission, Federal Energy Regulatory Commission, the Commodities
Futures Trading Commission, or other body should have enhanced regulatory and oversight
authority over such instruments. 61
61
For a discussion of regulation of allowances as a commodity and implications for a greenhouse gas emissions
market, see CRS Report RL34488, Regulating a Carbon Market: Issues Raised By the European Carbon and U.S.
Sulfur Dioxide Allowance Markets, by Mark Jickling and Larry Parker.
19
Executive Summary
Investments in the clean technology sector often combine capital intensity with new technologies. Securing project
finance can prove to be a critical step in the path to commercialization. Project finance succeeds best when you have
long-term off-take agreements with quality-credit counterparties (such as power purchase agreements) but commoditybased projects that sell into open markets (such as biofuels) can also benefit from the project finance model.
This primer provides an overview of project finance for renewable energy investors, with a focus on the pros and cons,
as well as a survey of key concepts and requirements, including tax incentives and monetization strategies in the
renewable energy sector, and other key structuring considerations in determining whether to project finance.
Key Points
Project finance has emerged as a leading way to finance large infrastructure projects that might otherwise be
too expensive or speculative to be carried on a corporate balance sheet.
The basic premise of project finance is that lenders loan money for the development of a project solely based
on the specific projects risks and future cash flows. As such, project finance is a method of financing in which
the lenders to a project have either no recourse or only limited recourse to the parent company that develops
or sponsors the project.
For equity investors, the appeal of project finance is that it can maximize equity returns, move significant
liabilities off balance sheet, protect key assets and monetize tax financing opportunities. A wide range of
commercial and legal issues must be addressed to secure adequate returns. Tight credit markets exacerbate
competition for long-term financing, so even small differences in deals can impact the availability of financing
or reduce leverage.
Project financing became particularly important to project development in emerging markets, with participants
often relying on guarantees, long-term off-take or purchase agreements, or other contractual relationships with
the host sovereign or its commercial appendages to ensure the long-term viability of individual projects. These
were typically backstopped by multilateral lending agencies that mitigated some of the political risks to which
the project lenders were exposed. Analogies to alternative energy projects help investors de-risk higher-risk
new technologies.
Austin
New York
Palo Alto
San Diego
San Francisco
Seattle
Shanghai
Washington, D.C.
Part I of the primer introduces project finance to those that may be less familiar with the concept, and asks questions
that will assist investors and developers in determining whether project finance is appropriate for their renewable
energy projects. Part II sets out the legal and contractual structure that will facilitate project financing. Part III
describes the process of obtaining equity investment and some of the important options and considerations that
companies may have in that process. Part IV provides a more in-depth look at what a typical renewable energy project
financing looks like, including fundamental structural components that characterize any project finance transaction.
Finally, Part V outlines key tax incentives currently available in the renewable energy industry, as well as monetization
strategies that may be useful for earlier-stage energy companies unable to directly utilize such tax incentives.
Given the breadth of the current renewable energy landscape, this primer focuses on a hypothetical solar generation
facility (Solar Project) as the primary case study with discussions of other renewable energy projects (wind power
and biofuel projects in particular) as appropriate. In general, once the contracts related to a project are negotiated
(which is described in Part II), the mechanical aspects of raising equity and project financing are likely to be similar
across various renewable technologies, although investor enthusiasm and financing prices and terms are likely to vary
significantly across technologies at any given time.
The basic premise of project finance is that lenders loan money for the development of a project solely based on the
specific projects risks and future cash flows. As such, project finance is a method of financing in which the lenders to
a project have either no recourse or only limited recourse to the parent company that develops or sponsors the
project (the Sponsor). Non-recourse refers to the lenders inability to access the capital or assets of the Sponsor to
repay the debt incurred by the special purpose entity that owns the project (the Project Company). In cases where
project financings are limited recourse as opposed to truly non-recourse, the Sponsors capital may be at risk only for
specific purposes and in specific (limited) amounts set forth in the project financing documentation.
Project financing has been used in various ways for many years, but in the 1970s and 1980s it emerged as a leading
way of financing large infrastructure projects that might otherwise be too expensive or speculative for any one
individual investor to carry on its corporate balance sheet. Project financing has been particularly important to project
development in emerging markets, with participants often relying on guarantees, long-term off-take or purchase
agreements, or other contractual relationships with the host sovereign or its commercial appendages to ensure the
long-term viability of individual projects. These were typically backstopped by multilateral lending agencies that
mitigated some of the political risks to which the project lenders (and, sometimes, equity investors) were exposed.
B.
As a general (if not universal) rule, lenders will not forgo recourse to a projects Sponsor unless there is a projected
revenue stream from the project that can be secured for purposes of ensuring repayment of the loans. In the case of
large wind and solar power projects, this revenue is typically generated from a power purchase agreement (PPA)
with the local utility, under which the project may be able to utilize the creditworthiness of the utility to reduce its
borrowing costs. While the wind power market has matured significantly in the past five years, leading to the
successful project financing of merchant projects in the absence of long-term PPAs, Solar Projects are generally not
yet able to be project financed in such a manner. In merchant power projects, lenders are able to receive assurance of
the projects ability to repay its debt by focusing on commodity hedging, collateral values, and the income to be
produced based on historical and forward-looking power price curves and fully developed markets. In non-power
generation contexts, the projects revenue stream may be a long-term operating agreement (e.g., in the case of toll
roads), a capacity purchase agreement (e.g., in the case of transmission lines), a production sharing agreement (e.g.,
in the case of oil field development), or a series of short-term and spot sales into commodity markets (e.g., in the case
of biofuels projects).
While project finance lenders clearly prefer a long-term contract that ensures a relatively consistent and guaranteed
revenue stream (including assured margins over the cost of inputs), in the context of some industries, lenders have
determined that sufficient revenues to support the projects debt are of a high enough probability that they will provide
debt financing without a long-term off-take agreement. Solar Projects, due to their peak period production, high marginal
costs, and lack of demonstrated merchant capabilities, are not at this time viewed as project financeable without PPAs
that cover all or substantially all of their output. Solar Projects lack of merchant viability is exacerbated by the fact that
the southwest United States (the region most appropriate for utility-scale solar power development) does not have a
www.wsgr.com
mature merchant power market that functions in the absence of long-term bilateral sales agreements. The dependence
of large-scale solar projects on the PPA model is not expected to change in the short to intermediate term.
C.
One of the primary benefits of project financing is that the debt is held at the level of the Project Company and not on
the corporate books of the Sponsor. When modeling projects and projected income, the internal rate of return of
Sponsors and other project-level equity investors can increase dramatically once a project is fully leveraged. Sponsors
are frequently able to recover development costs at the closing of the project financing and put their money into other
projects. Another benefit of project financing is the protection of key Sponsor assets, such as intellectual property, key
personnel, and investments in other projects and other assets, in the case of the Project Companys bankruptcy, debt
default, or foreclosure. Moreover, project financing allows for a wide variety of tax structuring opportunities, particularly
in the context of monetizing tax incentives (discussed further in Part V). On the other hand, project financing is
document-intensive, time-consuming, and expensive to consummate. It is not atypical that administrative and closing
costs, when factoring in lenders, consultants, and attorneys fees for all parties, equal several percentage points of the
amount of the loan commitment. Moreover, project financing imposes significant operating restrictions on each Project
Company, including its ability to make equity distributions to the Sponsor prior to the payment of operating expenses,
debt service, and a percentage sweep of additional cash flow (discussed further in Part IV). The result is that the
decision of whether to reinvest cash flow in the project does not rest solely with the Sponsor.
Given the pros and cons of project finance, the most relevant initial inquiry for an investor or developer may be when is
project financing possible or most appropriate? The following questions should be useful in determining if project
financing is a realistic opportunity for any given company:
-
Is there an individual project or group of projects of a sufficient size to make either a standalone or
portfolio project financing worthwhile? Typically lenders will be reluctant to provide project financing if the
total amount of debt is less than US$50 million and, preferably, US$100 million.
Will there be a revenue stream from the project large enough to support a highly leveraged debt financing?
This is a prerequisite for project financing.
Will the receipt of revenue be enforceable under contractual rights against a creditworthy party? This is
not necessarily a prerequisite for all project financings, but the absence of a contract, or questionable
creditworthiness of the purchaser, will prompt lender skepticism and necessitate thorough due diligence
regarding future revenue projections.
Will there be physical assets sufficient to ensure lender repayment in case of foreclosure? Lenders will
want to know that even if the Project Companys projected revenue stream does not materialize, they will
be able to foreclose on the projects assets sufficient in value to make themselves whole, either by selling
the project outright or operating it until the debt is repaid.
Is there a significant level of technology risk? While in many project financings, technology may be
relatively new or cutting edge, project finance lenders almost never want to be the first to finance an
untested technology. Demonstrated successful use in some context will often be necessary to secure
project financing.
Does the project have contractual relationships with reputable companies for services key to the success
of the project or the technology it employs? Lenders will be less likely to lend to a project the success of
which depends solely on a few talented individuals who may depart, leaving the project unable to meet its
potential.
Is the Sponsor ultimately willing to risk the project? In other words, once project financing is completed,
the Sponsor loses the ability to determine how the vast majority of the projects revenue is spent. In the
event a project becomes uneconomic and unable to service its debt, the only option besides refinancing
the debt may be to turn over the project to the lenders (voluntarily or involuntarily), with the corresponding
loss of the Sponsors investment in the project.
Is the Sponsor looking for a quick exit? Once project-financed, divestiture opportunities are complicated
by the requirement of lender consent, and potential purchasers will be thoroughly examined by lenders for
development and operational expertise as well as creditworthiness.
www.wsgr.com
Are Sponsors willing to grant rights of high-level oversight regarding the projects development and
operation to project finance lenders? In many cases the interests of the Sponsor and the lenders will be
aligned, and lenders will tend to defer to the Sponsors developmental expertise. On the other hand,
lenders must be viewed as additional project partners, with veto rights over many significant decisions.
Assuming project financing is a viable option, Part II provides a roadmap to structuring a project financing transaction.
Project Structure
The project finance structure revolves around the creation of the Project Company that holds all of the projects assets,
including all of its contractual rights and obligations. The Project Company is usually a single-member limited liability
company, although in some cases it may be a limited partnership.
In most cases, the equity interest in the Project Company will be held by at least one intermediate holding company,
usually a limited liability company (the Holdco), created for the purpose of pledging the Project Companys equity to the
lenders in the eventual project financing. While the Holdco will have a separate legal identity, typically it will not have any
business apart from holding the equity of the Project Company. This structure allows for most liability to be contained at
the bankruptcy-remote Project Company level, and thus insulates the Sponsor (including equity investors in the Sponsor)
and the Holdco from liability to either the Project Companys contractual counterparties (Counterparties) or to the
Holdcos lenders. In order to ensure that the Project Company is treated as a separate legal entity, it will be necessary to
have governance mechanisms at the Project Company level that are independent, including designated officers, at least
one independent director, and internal controls and procedures designed to preserve a legal entity distinct from the
Sponsor and the Holdco.
B.
As a general matter, all contracts related to the development, construction, ownership, and operation of the project will
be entered into by the Project Company (Project Agreements). If development-stage contracts have been executed
by the Sponsor or one of its affiliates, it is important that the contracts allow for their assignment to the Project
Company once the Project Company has been established for the purposes of pursuing project financing.
In addition to the external Project Agreements, there may be several intercompany agreements between the Project
Company and the Sponsor or its affiliates. These may include an Operation and Maintenance Agreement (O&M), an
Administrative Services Agreement (ASA), and a Technology License Agreement (TLA), often with affiliates of the
Sponsor created specifically for the purpose of providing administrative support, operation, and maintenance services
and holding the intellectual property for the benefit of one or more of the Sponsors projects. In other cases, unrelated
third parties may provide these services to the Project Company. If intercompany agreements are used, they should
be structured in such a manner as to track the material commercial terms that the Sponsor could obtain with an
unrelated third party providing the same services.
Intercompany agreements can also have a significant impact on the total return of a project to its investors, so their
economic terms must be carefully crafted. Assuming the O&M, ASA, and TLA are entered into with Sponsor affiliates,
they permit the affiliates to extract arms length fees for the provision of key services and technology to the Project
Company on a monthly or quarterly basis; these fees are frequently paid prior to repayment of debt. The
intercompany-agreement structure also allows the Sponsor, if the project fails following the project financing, to retain
all of its employees that provide services to the Project Company, thereby ensuring that key employees (and knowhow) will not be lost to lenders or a subsequent purchaser out of foreclosure. In such a scenario, the TLA will also
allow the Sponsor to retain ownership of its technology subject only to a license right on the part of the Project
Company which may no longer be affiliated with the Sponsor. These are especially critical points where the Sponsor
has multiple projects that may utilize the same technology, support equipment, and personnel. In addition, the O&M,
ASA, and TLA provide the Project Company's lenders contractual certainty (through the agreements themselves as
well as the corresponding consents to collateral assignment (discussed further in Part IV below)) that key services will
continue if the Project Company defaults, thereby increasing the likelihood of the efficient development, construction,
and operation of the project and the preservation of the value of the lenders' collateral.
There are many other Project Agreements that are typically executed during the course of developing and constructing
a renewable energy project. The Project Agreements may include one or more PPAs, which may have an income
www.wsgr.com
stream payable from an off-taker for energy payments, capacity payments, or both; an Engineering, Procurement, and
Construction Agreement (EPC Agreement); a Site Lease Agreement (if the projects land is not owned by the Project
Company itself); a Renewable Energy Credit Agreement (in states where applicable); an Interconnection Agreement
(for projects tied to the electricity grid); agreements for the provision of utility services; agreements for the provision of
feedstock commodities (in the case of biofuels) and the necessary price and supply hedging; agreements including
equity flip structures to take advantage of the federal tax incentives discussed in Part V below; and other Project
Agreements necessary or desirable to develop, construct, own, or operate the project. In some cases certain
byproducts of production may be sold in addition to the primary product (for example, steam as a byproduct of cogeneration power projects, high protein distillers grains as a byproduct of ethanol production, or carbon dioxide where
markets exist).
Equity
Contribution $
Operating or Shareholders
Agreement
Sponsor
Equity
Contribution $
Operating or Limited
Partnership
Agreement
Equity
Contribution $
Lenders
Operating or Limited
Partnership
Agreement
Loans $
Loan
Documentation
Project Company
aka The Borrower
Interconnection
Agreement
Interconnecting
Utility
Consent
Lenders
C.
PPA
Purchasing
Utility/
Offtaker
Consent
Lenders
EPC or
EPCM
Agreement
Contractor
Consent
Lenders
Supply
Contracts
REC
Purchase
Agreement
Equipment
Suppliers
Consent
REC
Purchaser
Consent
Lenders
Lenders
O&M
Agreement
O&M
Service
Provider
Consent
Lenders
Admin
Services
Agreement
Technology
License
Agreement
Admin
Services
Provider
Consent
Lenders
Technology
Provider
Consent
Lenders
In the process of negotiating the Project Agreements it will be necessary to consider key project finance principles to
prevent having to revisit contractual terms at the lenders behest in the course of financing the project. One overriding
concept is that lenders will own (and likely seek to immediately transfer) the Project Company in the case of
foreclosure, thus will insist on contractual rights and terms that ensure a seamless transition to the lender or
subsequent owner. To this end, the project lenders will require consents to collateral assignment (Consents) for their
benefit with some if not all of the Counterparties. Therefore, provisions that prevent assignment without Counterparty
consent should be omitted from Project Agreements. Inclusion of contractual language that obligates the Counterparty
to cooperate with the Project Company and its lenders in the course of the financing process will not only expedite the
process of negotiating the Consents but will also reduce the scope for Counterparty intransigence in the context of the
project financing.
The commercial terms of the PPA and the EPC Agreement, together with the market and technology risks, will largely
determine whether lenders view the project as financeable. Foremost among considerations related to the PPA will
be whether or not there is a guaranteed revenue stream (usually energy payments from the actual production of
power) from a creditworthy purchaser that will be sufficient to support the economics of the project, thereby ensuring
www.wsgr.com
prompt repayment of debt and mitigating the risk of default. The PPA term should also be sufficient in length to fully
amortize the contemplated project debt. In contrast to most smaller distributed generation projects, where an off-taker
pays for only the power that is produced, utility scale solar generation facilities may have take or pay PPAs where the
utility is still required to pay the Project Company even if a certain level of power is not purchased. In the case of Solar
Projects, utilities are less likely to deliver capacity payments because power is generally produced only during daylight
hours. However, distributed generation projects may benefit from more certain payments because the distributed
project produces all of the power for a given host.
If a project does not have a PPA or other off-take contract, demonstrated merchant operating histories of similarly
situated plants (more relevant in the context of wind projects) will be necessary to convince lenders of the reliability of
forecast ratios. Even with long-term PPAs, lenders will still look for additional data to support viability such as
meteorological wind data for wind power sites over the course of one to two years, often at installed hub-heights, or
long-term temperature and sun data for Solar Projects. The trend in biofuels project financings is also moving toward
contracted off-take arrangements with a creditworthy purchaser for all of a plants production. At least in the short and
intermediate terms, most project-financed Solar Projects will have PPAs for a significant portion, if not all, of their
generated power. While PPAs for large-scale CSP projects will generally be far more complex than those for smaller
distributed PV projects, in either case, the core economic terms will determine the lenders view of whether a project or
a portfolio of projects is viable from a revenue perspective and, accordingly, financeable on favorable terms.
To the extent a project is not fully constructed by the time project financing is sought, EPC Agreements will be an
integral part of the financing analysis and pricing. While larger developers may be able to finance an entire project on
balance sheet, and subsequently refinance the development to free up invested capital, most developers seek to
leverage their equity and use project finance to construct and operate their projects. Where construction risk is
present, lenders will generally seek corporate parent guarantees, performance bonds, or other forms of performance
surety that ensure that the performance of the contractor is as close to budget and schedule as possible. Warranties
of appropriate substance and duration as well as subsequent maintenance coverage regarding the EPC work and the
equipment purchased will be necessary to convince lenders that significant unbudgeted expenses will not be incurred
by the Project Company. With respect to an EPC contractor, lenders prefer a full wrap EPC agreement because
such an agreement provides a single point of contact with regard to the various risks such an agreement might contain
(warranties and schedule and performance guarantees, among other things). This is particularly the case with newer
and untested technology even if operationally superior to previous generation technology. Liquidated damage
coverage (pre-agreed payments made by the contractor) for schedule and performance delays, inefficiency, or
equipment failures also reassure lenders that a project has the necessary protection against delays or performance
defects that are within the EPC contractors control. How much of the risk an EPC contractor accepts for cost overruns
and design or installation defects, when viewed with other contractual terms, will affect the lenders view of whether a
project is financeable and at what cost. For example, a project that is not financeable at 80% debt due to certain offtake or technology risks may be financeable with 40%60% debt because the lenders are taking less risk with a higher
level of capital pre-paid into the project. Dedicating sufficient resources at the negotiation stage of PPA and EPC
Agreements to achieve commercial and contractual terms as favorable as possible will usually pay dividends at the
financing stage by saving not only money but also costly renegotiation and valuable time toward project completion.
Conduct an internal assessment of capital and budgeting strategies for the investment.
Sponsors and investors should conduct an internal evaluation of whether an equity investment would best serve their
respective strategic objectives. Salient considerations include:
-
Is the companys technology reliable enough to be considered financeable, and is there a realistic potential
pool of equity investors from which to draw?
Are there any gaps in the Sponsors existing organizational structure and operations that an equity
investor would want filled before engaging in substantive discussions and/or closing an equity round of
www.wsgr.com
financing? For example, given the complexity involved in successfully executing Solar Projects, equity
investors will look for experienced management with skill and connections within the industry, as well as
potentially requiring contractual commitments from relevant third parties in the supply chain and customer
base.
B.
How much capital investment is realistically required for the Solar Project? Has Sponsor management, on
the one hand, conducted a thorough analysis of the timing and amount of future capital needs and relevant
burn rates, and has the investor and its syndicate, on the other hand, assessed whether its proposed
financing will be sufficient to either execute the Solar Project or bridge the Sponsor towards its next round
of investment?
What type of investment is ideally suited for the particular Solar Project e.g., is the Sponsor seeking passive
investment, or an active strategic partner that will add value to the organization (as discussed in greater detail
below)?
How would an equity investment impact the Solar Projects existing grants, tax treatment, eligibility for
applicable federal and state incentive programs, and contractual obligations?
As equity investors become shareholders, and in many cases, directors of the Sponsor, how much control
is the Sponsor willing to give to the investor, and what level of control does the investor desire in order to
have an active voice within the organization?
Determine whether the investment will add value to the Solar Project.
Unless a Sponsor is seeking a purely passive equity investment, the Sponsor and its investor should conduct a
thorough assessment of the investors role in driving value to the enterprise by, among other things:
C.
Reviewing the investors existing portfolio companies to determine whether the investor has previously
invested in similar projects or has other relevant experience with alternative energy investments. It is
important to find investors who understand the longer time period required to execute and obtain a return
on investment from renewable energy projects;
Meeting with the investors key decision makers to assess how the investor will add value in addition to the
capital infusion e.g., through participation on the board of directors, introductions to potential customers,
assistance in financial forecasting and planning, and guidance in analyzing potential liquidity events; and
Assessing potential conflicts of interest that may arise to the extent that an investor has, for example, a
competitor as one of its portfolio companies.
Once an appropriate equity investor has been identified, the equity investment typically will proceed to the preparation
of a term sheet that identifies the key terms of the investment, as well as a diligence request and the execution of a
confidentiality agreement to facilitate the exchange of information to the investor for the investors due diligence
purposes. A term sheet is a helpful means of assessing whether the parties truly see eye-to-eye with each other on
the critical aspects of the investment before expending significant time and expense negotiating definitive documents,
and may include the following terms:
-
The identification of the relevant entity that will receive such funds (e.g., will the investment be made into a
special purpose vehicle solely created for the project (for example, a Project Company) or will the
investment be made into the Sponsor which may hold assets unrelated to the project);
The amount of the investment, as the Sponsor should ensure that it receives sufficient capital to minimize
future dilutive cram-down financings, but also not take in more capital than is needed as this also will
have dilutive effects to existing shareholders. Milestone-based investments may help serve to mitigate
Sponsor risk in terms of securing additional future financing, while helping investors stage their investment
to ensure that the Sponsor can meet specific financial and commercial targets before disbursing additional
funds; and
Whether the equity security will be common stock, which is typically issued to founders, optionees, and
angel investors, or preferred stock, which not only is senior to the common stock in preference but also
typically has additional terms and conditions that increase preferred stockholders return on investment
and control over the Sponsor such as:
www.wsgr.com
D.
Dividend rights;
A liquidation preference, which is the right to receive a preferential return on investment in the event
of a liquidity event such as a merger, asset sale, or change of control;
A redemption right, which is the right to redeem the equity securities at an agreed-upon point in the
future;
Anti-dilution rights, which protect an investor from the dilutive effect of future equity issuances; and
Protective provisions, which allow the preferred holders certain veto rights over key corporate actions.
Have candid discussions to ensure that expectations are aligned on key business issues, including:
-
The companys ability to execute its business plan, and the investors commitment to both the initial and
subsequent capital needs during the companys life cycle;
A realistic commercialization timeline, use of proceeds, and the expected internal rate of return of the
Solar Project; and
The appropriate liquidity event, be it an acquisition or an initial public offering, and how the investor can
add value to facilitate a liquidity event (e.g., by assisting in pre-public corporate governance compliance
required by Sarbanes-Oxley, or introductions to key strategic partners, customers, and potential acquirers
in the future).
In summary, both Sponsors and investors analyzing an equity investment should conduct a realistic assessment of the
companys capital needs, structure an investment that can add value to the company and its projects, and seek to
create a mutually beneficial working relationship where expectations on key business issues between the Sponsor and
the investor are aligned.
Currently the majority of renewable energy projects are financed through the syndicated commercial loan market.
Syndicated loans are loans in which a group of banks each take a portion of a larger loan and thus minimize the risk
that any one individual lender making the same loan would otherwise have. A syndicated loan transaction is usually
coordinated by one or more arranger banks whereas in club deals a handfull of lenders take equal roles in leading
the transaction and lending to the project. An alternative to the syndicated loan market is the private placement of debt
through 144A offerings, which are exempt from registration with the SEC if the purchasers are Qualified Institutional
Buyers as defined in the Securities Exchange Act of 1933. The issuer of 144A bonds could be either the Project
Company or the Sponsor.
Syndicated loan structures are often preferred to accessing the capital markets through 144A offerings, because
capital markets investors are generally less likely to assume construction risk and the disclosure documentation for a
144A offering is generally more extensive than that prepared in connection with syndicating a commercial loan. In
addition, amounts raised through a 144A issuance are all disbursed at closing, which leads to negative carry
implications. Moreover, private placements or corporate level offerings tend to be fixed rate, which, while providing
certainty, removes the upside potential of floating rates that are available pursuant to commercial bank loans. On the
other hand, 144A bond offerings are generally completed more quickly and inexpensively than a syndicated project
loan, the covenants contained in the governing documentation may be less restrictive, and the repayment period of
www.wsgr.com
private placement debt offerings is generally longer. Bonds can also pay interest at tax-exempt rates (lowering the
borrowers borrowing cost), be issued in relatively small amounts (making them ideal for smaller project financings)
and carry implied or explicit credit support from government instrumentalities (again reducing borrowing costs).
B.
Term B Loans
Several years ago, Term B loans emerged as a subset of the project lending market and were characterized by shorter
tenors and lower or delayed amortization, often with bullet payments due at maturity. Correspondingly, Term B loans
carried higher risk profiles and usually were rated non-investment grade. In addition, the terms and conditions of Term
B loans tended to be less onerous than traditional project debt that amortized over a longer period. As a result of the
subprime lending crisis and the resulting credit crunch, the Term B loan market all but disappeared and has yet to reemerge. For purposes of the following discussion, due to the considerations set forth above and the lull in the Term B
market, we assume that a traditional bank syndication model of project financing will be most beneficial to the Sponsor.
Although the terminology may differ from transaction to transaction, the documentation for such a project financing is
governed by a credit or financing agreement (Credit Agreement) and at a minimum will include an asset security and
equity pledge agreement, a mortgage, and various Consents.
C.
Loan Types
Depending on the development stage of the project, and within the project finance framework, the Sponsor may on
behalf of the Project Company seek construction loans, term loans, working capital loans and/or a letter of credit
facility. Construction loans, as the name implies, are utilized only for the period that the project is under construction.
The interest rate can be higher vis-a-vis a term loan (reflecting increased risk to the lenders during the construction
period) but more frequent drawdowns of construction loans are permitted and at the end of the construction loan
availability period, the construction loan usually converts to a term loan. Term loans are characterized by a set and
limited commitment or drawdown period and an extended amortization period. Term loans can have a lower interest
rate than construction loans, and have scheduled (quarterly or otherwise) repayment dates or set amortization
schedules. The conversion from a construction loan to a term loan often coincides with the definition of Substantial
Completion or Final Completion under the EPC Agreement, and a failure to achieve such conversion by a certain
date will cause a default under the construction loan and accelerate the debt due thereunder.
Working capital loans, which are used primarily for ordinary course expenses such as inventory purchases, are
generally sized smaller than construction or term loans and are subject to a maximum available amount tied to the
value of a Project Companys inventory and cash (often 80%). Working capital loans are usually revolving in nature,
meaning that amounts borrowed can be reborrowed once they are repaid. Letters of credit are made available on the
Project Companys behalf usually for the benefit of third parties under the Project Agreements for example, if a letter
of credit is required as credit support under a PPA, an EPC Agreement or for the provision of utility services. Draws by
a third party on an outstanding letter of credit will operate to reduce the amount of working capital loan availability.
The term of a project finance loan will vary depending on the term of the principal off-take agreement. To minimize risk
profile and lower borrowing costs, loans will ideally amortize in full prior to the end of the term of the PPA. The
borrowing costs of a renewable energy project will invariably depend on the risk profile determined by the
characteristics of the project itself, in particular the lenders view of the likelihood that the project will default on its
loans. In addition, exposure to merchant markets or other off-take risk will increase borrowing costs relative to projects
that have a long-term PPA, particularly one that is fixed price with take-or-pay terms. The reduced risks that come with
long-term PPAs prevent Sponsors from taking full advantage of arbitrage opportunities that may become available in
the spot market if power prices rise, as price risk is avoided for the producer. Recent trends have seen a wide swing in
loan terms and it is difficult to provide standard pricing terms, although as a general rule rates are higher and fees
have increased, while internal credit reviews have become more stringent and less forgiving of unmitigated project
risks or even minor holes or errors in Project Agreements. Typical lending fees for a project financing include the
following: (i) two percent (2%) to six percent (6%) of the aggregate loan commitment as an arranging or structuring fee,
(ii) one percent (1%) of the aggregate loan commitment as a syndication fee, (iii) $75,000 administrative agency fee to
be paid annually, (iv) $50,000 collateral agency fee to be paid annually, and (v) facility fees to each lender in the
syndicate in an amount between three-quarters of one percent (.75%) and one and one-half percent (1.5%) of each
lenders commitment. In addition, the Project Company will be required to pay the professional fees and administrative
expenses of each of the lenders in evaluating the transaction, negotiating the loan documents, and providing the loans.
Despite the non-recourse nature of pure project financing, in some transactions lenders will seek guarantees for
certain obligations of the Sponsor or its affiliates, either to ensure construction of the project or to ensure that the
Project Company is sufficiently capitalized to meet its debt service requirements. While by no means a requirement in
www.wsgr.com
all transactions, under certain market conditions, a guaranteed (or limited recourse) project finance structure may be
the only way to finance one or more projects or to obtain reasonably priced project debt.
D.
Security Package
1. Overview
Project finance requires the pledge of a comprehensive collateral security package to the lenders in exchange for the
making of loans. The collateral security package, in the absence of recourse to the Sponsor, serves as the basis for
the lenders securing repayment in the case of default. Specifically, all assets of the Project Company owned at the
time of the loan closing, in addition to those acquired post-closing, will be pledged to the lenders until the loans are
fully repaid. Included in the assets to be pledged will be all of the Project Companys personal property, accounts
receivable, contractual rights, and intellectual property. The Project Companys real property is pledged to the lenders
pursuant to a mortgage. A pledge of the equity interests in the Project Company is executed by the Holdco or any
other entities that directly hold equity interests.
As part of the collateral security package, the lenders will require a Consent from some or all of the Counterparties.
The Consent negotiation process can be time consuming and even contentious, especially if the interests of the
Sponsor and the Project Company on the one hand, and the Counterparty on the other, are not aligned. To
complicate matters, lenders may use the process of Consent negotiation to incorporate amendments to the relevant
Project Agreement, which are likely to benefit the Project Company as well as the lenders, but at which the
Counterparty may balk as a renegotiation of the fundamental business agreement embodied in the Project Agreement.
Even fundamental Consent terms such as the extension of cure periods for defaults for the benefit of the lenders in the
event the Project Company does not cure may be viewed as an unfavorable renegotiation from the perspective of a
Counterparty. In addition, some Counterparties are hesitant to enter into a contractual relationship with a large
financial institution as a putative future partner. The prospect of perceived bargaining asymmetry often complicates
what may be tedious three-way negotiations between the Counterparty, the Project Company, and the lenders, with
the Project Company likely playing the role of honest broker in order to facilitate prompt agreement and closure of the
financing.
2. Distribution of Project Revenues
Almost all project financed loans have what is referred to as the project waterfall. All revenues received by the
Project Company are placed in a master project revenue account, which serves as the top of the metaphorical
waterfall. As the money flows down the waterfall it is siphoned off into segregated secured accounts at each different
level as described in an Accounts or Disbursement Agreement, with any funds remaining at the bottom of the waterfall
being paid, assuming there are no defaults and that certain financial tests are met, to the equity owners of the Project
Company. Typically, the project waterfall is structured (roughly) in a manner as described below, with most
withdrawals from the waterfall occurring on a monthly or quarterly basis as appropriate:
-
The first level of payment would be in an amount necessary to pay costs incurred by the Project
Company (i.e., construction and/or operation and maintenance expenses depending on the projects
stage of development), including pre-approved reasonable amounts paid to the Sponsors affiliates
under the O&M, the ASA, and the TLA;
The second level of payment would be to the lenders to pay (i) loan fees and expenses, (ii) interest
payments, and (iii) principal payments (in this order);
The third level of payment will be used to fill an account segregated for the purposes of paying future
debt service in times of lower project revenues, although once this account has been filled to the level
of the required amount no amounts will be taken out at this level;
The fourth level of payment is often referred to as a cash sweep in which the lenders are repaid
outstanding principal with a certain percentage of the excess cash (generally one-third or half, which
increases in a default scenario) remaining after the operation of the three waterfall levels above;
The fifth level of the waterfall may operate to fill one or more reserve accounts, often designated for
future major maintenance or other purposes, but once the reserve account is filled with the required
amount no amounts will be taken out at this level;
The sixth level of the waterfall may be used to repay the holders of subordinated debt or bondholders,
if applicable; and
10
www.wsgr.com
The seventh level of the waterfall allows for cash remaining after amounts have been removed at the
higher levels to be paid to the equity holders of the Project Company in the form of an equity
distribution, assuming there are no defaults and that financial tests are met.
While every project waterfall will operate somewhat differently and many will have features unique to specific project and
financing arrangements, the waterfall operation outlined above is generally standard in project financing arrangements.
$
Project Revenues Account
Project Construction/Operating
Expenses
Distribution Account
E.
Operating Restrictions
Project finance lenders place restrictions and affirmative obligations on the Project Company that significantly impact
its day-to-day operation. While many of the affirmative obligations in particular may seem like ordinary course of
business operations, and the affirmative obligations and restrictions taken individually may not seem particularly
onerous, on a collective basis compliance with these obligations and restrictions requires time and effort from the
Sponsors employees. It is worth noting in connection with the time consuming nature of complying with the covenants
set forth in project financing documentation that there may be certain economies of scale, particularly where the
individual projects are smaller, to arranging project financing on a portfolio basis.
More specifically, project finance lenders will require that the Project Company (i) comply with all laws and regulations,
including permits, (ii) construct and operate the project in accordance with prudent industry standards, (iii) pay its debts
and obligations as they become due, (iv) use proceeds received and cash flow as set forth in the financing
documentation (including operation of the waterfall), (v) maintain pre-determined (and generally quite comprehensive)
insurance coverage, (vi) maintain books and records in accordance with GAAP, (vii) adopt and update budgets,
(viii) permit independent verification by the lenders representatives of performance tests, (ix) maintain in effect all
Project Agreements, (x) preserve title to all assets, (xi) update the financial model, (xii) maintain the liens granted
under the security documentation, and (xiii) enter into pre-approved hedging arrangements both for commodity inputs
for example, natural gas in the case of a power project or feedstock in the case of a biofuel plant and for
purposes of interest rate protection. This list is far from comprehensive in scope or detail. In addition, comprehensive
11
www.wsgr.com
reporting requirements will be set out in the Credit Agreement that obligate the Project Company to provide the lenders
with copies of everything from construction status reports to auditors letters to notices of certain adverse events.
Prohibitions placed on the Project Company by the financing documentation will likely include (i) incurring
indebtedness subject to certain exceptions, (ii) incurring liens subject to certain exceptions, (iii) making investments
subject to certain exceptions, (iii) changing the nature of the business, (iv) issuing equity securities, (v) disposing of
assets outside of the ordinary course of business, (vi) consolidating or merging, (viii) transacting with affiliates subject
to certain exceptions, (ix) opening bank accounts other than those secured under the financing documentation,
(x) creating subsidiaries, partnerships, or joint ventures, (xi) making certain tax elections, (xii) making certain ERISA
elections, (xiii) amending Project Agreements (including EPC change orders) subject to certain exceptions, (xiv)
entering into additional Project Agreements, (xv) suspending or abandoning the project, (xvi) entering into hedging
arrangements not approved by the lenders, (xvii) budgeting changes subject to certain tolerance bands, and (xviii)
making equity distributions outside of the waterfall framework and unless certain criteria are met, including achieving
certain cash available to debt service ratios on a historical and prospective basis (usually between 1.25:1 and 1.5:1).
While this list is not comprehensive, it should again be stressed that lenders will generally tend to be sensitive to the
financial interests of the project and will to some degree tailor a covenant package to the projects expected
construction and operation characteristics. It should also be noted that project finance lenders will often entertain
requests for waivers of obligations set forth in the financing documentation after the closing of the loans, as they are
incentivized to keep the loans performing and out of default.
F.
Potential Defaults
Event of Default is the legal term for the circumstance that allows project finance lenders to exercise their remedies
under the financing documentation, including acceleration of the outstanding debt and foreclosure. Events of Default
may include: (i) nonpayment of fees, interest, or principal due under the financing documentation (usually with a very
short grace period with respect to fees and interest only), (ii) breach of representation or warranty made in the
financing documentation (usually with a grace period if capable of being cured), (iii) non-performance of certain
covenants or obligations under the financing documentation (usually with a grace period if capable of being cured),
(iv) cross-defaults to other debt instruments, (v) non-appealable legal judgments rendered against the Project
Company, (vi) certain events related to ERISA, (vii) bankruptcy or insolvency, (viii) default under or termination of
Project Agreements, (ix) significant delays in construction schedule, (x) failure to obtain or maintain a necessary permit
or government approval, (xi) unenforceability of financing documentation, (xii) certain material environmental matters,
(xiii) loss of or damage to collateral, (xiv) abandonment of the project, and (xv) a change of control. Many Events of
Default have cure periods, which allow the Sponsor or Project Company to take action over the course of a certain
period (usually 30 days but may be less or more) to remedy the non-compliance if the Event of Default is capable of
being cured; for example, a default under another debt instrument may be cured by paying the amount due but a
final, non-appealable legal judgment against the Project Company would be incurable. In addition, during the course
of negotiating the Credit Agreement it will be important for the Project Companys representatives to qualify as many of
the Event of Default provisions with materiality and Material Adverse Effect standards as possible, providing the
Project Company more leeway to avoid an Event of Default and the potential loss of the project.
G.
Conditions to Closing
Project financing lenders will require that a lengthy list of conditions be satisfied in order to close the financing and fund
the loan. While many of the precedent conditions and required documents are shared with other forms of financing, it is
worth mentioning certain of the conditions that constitute particularly long lead time items that must be commenced
months prior to the close of the financing. Specifically, project finance lenders will generally require the delivery of the
following as conditions to closing the loan: (i) a report of an independent engineer that confirms the technology employed
by the project is commercially viable, the reasonableness of budgetary assumptions, the absence of serious
environmental issues, compliance with all necessary permits or approvals, and that financial projections are realistic; (ii) a
power or biofuels market report (if the project will have significant uncontracted off-take) setting forth expected market
conditions over the course of the loan; (iii) an environmental site assessment (at least a Phase I report concluding that
no further environmental investigation is necessary); (iv) an insurance report from the lenders insurance consultant;
(v) land surveys and site descriptions; (vi) a commodity management plan (in the case of biofuels facilities and other
projects where appropriate); (vii) evidence that the required equity component of the project has been contributed or will
otherwise be available when required; and (viii) copies of all third-party and government approvals and permits.
As a final note, depending on the projects funding requirements and the size of the equity contribution and project
finance commitments, it may be possible to include subordinated debt in the financing package. In the case of certain
renewable energy projects (e.g., biofuels production facilities), tax-exempt state bond financing may be available to
12
www.wsgr.com
close any gap between the raised and required equity in a project finance scenario. As a general rule, subordinated
debt will be more expensive than senior debt due to the subordinated lenders higher risk of non-payment. In almost
all circumstances, the subordinated debt will need to be in place prior to finalization of the senior project debt to avoid
the substantial costs that would be incurred to re-document the senior loan. If subordinated debt is employed, an
intercreditor agreement will be negotiated between the agent for the senior lenders and the trustee or agent for the
subordinated debtholders, pursuant to which the senior lenders will obtain standard terms of subordination to ensure
their senior lien and payment positions vis-a-vis the subordinated lenders and any unsecured creditors in the case of
any Event of Default by the Project Company or its bankruptcy or insolvency.
V. Tax Implications
A.
The U.S. federal government provides several income tax subsidies to encourage the development of renewable
energy projects. These tax benefits are currently necessary to make renewable energy projects economically
competitive with projects that produce energy from conventional sources, and can finance as much as approximately
60 percent of the capital cost of a project. The following is a brief discussion of some of the key federal income tax
incentives available to developers of, and investors in, renewable energy projects.
1. Production Tax Credits
A production tax credit (PTC) is available for the production and sale of electricity from certain renewable sources.
Renewable sources of energy that qualify for the PTC include wind, biomass, geothermal, municipal solid waste (either
landfill gas or trash), hydropower (in the case of newly installed turbines), and marine and hydrokinetic energy. To
qualify for the PTC, electricity from these sources must be produced at a facility that is placed in service before
(i) January 1, 2013 for a wind facility and (ii) January 1, 2014 for other qualifying facilities. The facility must be located
in the United States.
The PTC is available for 10 years following the date the qualified facility is placed in service. The amount of the credit
for each year is generally determined by multiplying the credit rate by the number of kilowatt hours of electricity
produced by the taxpayer from a qualified facility and sold to an unrelated party. The credit rate is adjusted for inflation
each year and varies based on the type of renewable resource (for 2009, the credit rate for most qualifying facilities
was 2.1 cents per kilowatt hour). The amount of the PTC is reduced by as much as 50 percent to the extent the
project benefits from nontaxable grants, tax-exempt bonds, other subsidized energy financing, or other federal credits.
2. Investment Tax Credit
Most renewable energy projects can qualify for the investment tax credit (ITC), which is based on the cost of the
qualifying property (unlike the PTC, which is based on the amount of electricity generated and sold). The ITC is equal
to the product of the energy percentage and the taxpayers tax basis in its energy property that is placed in service
during the taxable year. Energy property includes, among other things, equipment that uses solar energy to generate
electricity, to heat or cool (or provide hot water for use in) a structure, or to provide solar process heat. Certain fuel cell
power plants that are placed in service before January 1, 2017, also qualify for the ITC. The energy percentage is
30 percent for solar equipment and fuel cell equipment that is placed in service before January 1, 2017. For solar
equipment placed in service after 2016, the energy percentage is 10%, and the ITC is not available for fuel cell
property placed in service after 2016. To be placed in service, the property must be ready for use, which generally
requires that all tests have been completed, all licenses and permits have been obtained, and the project is
synchronized with the transmission system and is operational. Unlike the PTC, the ITC is not reduced by subsidized
energy financing received after 2008.
In 2009, Congress enacted legislation that allows a taxpayer to elect to claim either the ITC or the PTC for facilities
that qualify for the PTC. The ITC for these facilities is 30 percent of tax basis and the election is available for a facility
that is placed in service before the relevant PTC cutoff date: (i) January 1, 2013 for a wind facility, and (ii) January 1,
2014 for other qualifying facilities. In deciding which credit to claim for a renewable energy project that can qualify for
either credit, a Sponsor will consider a number of factors, including the estimated cost of the facility, the expected
power production from the facility over the 10-year PTC period and anticipated power prices (including prices under a
PPA that is in place).
13
www.wsgr.com
To qualify for the ITC, the energy property must satisfy several requirements. The property must be constructed or
acquired by the taxpayer and the original use of the property must commence with the taxpayer. In addition, the
property must be used within the United States and depreciation or amortization must be allowable with respect to the
property. The property must meet any performance and quality standards prescribed by the Internal Revenue Service
(IRS) after consultation with the Department of Energy (none have been proposed to date). The property must also
not be used (including under a lease) by a tax-exempt or governmental entity. Finally, the project must not include
property which is part of a facility the production from which is used to claim PTCs. The taxpayers depreciable basis
in the property is reduced by 50 percent of the amount of the ITC.
The ITC vests 20 percent per year over five years. If the property is disposed of or otherwise becomes ineligible for
the ITC prior to fully vesting, the unvested portion is recaptured.
3. Treasury Grants
A renewable energy project that qualifies for the ITC and that is placed in service in 2009 or 2010 can qualify for a
Department of the Treasury grant in lieu of the ITC (and the PTC). If construction on the project began in 2009 or
2010, the project can also qualify for a grant so long as it is placed in service by the relevant date on which the ITC
terminates. The amount of the grant is calculated in the same manner as the ITC for the qualifying property, but since
the grant is a cash payment from the Department of the Treasury (rather than a credit against federal income tax) a
taxpayer need not have a federal income tax liability to benefit from a grant. Property that is used (including under a
lease) by a tax-exempt or governmental entity may nevertheless qualify for a grant. The taxpayers depreciable basis
in the property is reduced by 50 percent of the amount of the grant.
Treasury grants are also subject to recapture, using the same schedule that is used for the ITC, but a sale or other
disposition of property with respect to which a grant was received is not a recapture event provided that (i) the sale is
to a person eligible to receive a grant and (ii) the buyer of the property agrees to be jointly liable with the seller of the
property for any recapture. An application must be filed for a grant not later than September 30, 2011.
4. Depreciation
Certain equipment used in renewable energy projects may qualify for accelerated depreciation. After the basis of the
property is reduced by 50 percent of the ITC (or Treasury grant), the remaining basis is generally depreciated over five
years following the date the project is placed in service. Bonus depreciation, which allowed a special 50 percent
depreciation deduction, expired for most property (including renewable energy projects) placed in service after 2009.
5. Qualifying Advanced Energy Project Credit
In 2009, Congress enacted a new credit equal to 30 percent of a taxpayer's qualified investment with respect to any
qualifying advanced energy project of the taxpayer. This credit is available only for manufacturing facilities, not for
renewables or energy efficiency installation projects. For the purposes of the credit, a "manufacturing facility" is a
facility that makes, or processes raw materials into, finished products (or accomplishes any intermediate state in that
process). A "qualifying advanced energy project" is a project that re-equips, expands, or establishes a manufacturing
facility to produce property that is designed to (i) be used to produce energy from solar, wind, geothermal, or other
renewable resources; (ii) manufacture fuel cells, microturbines, or an energy storage system for use with electric or
hybrid motor vehicles; (iii) manufacture electric grids to support transmission of intermittent sources of renewable
energy, including storage of such energy; (iv) manufacture carbon capture or sequestration equipment; (v) refine or
blend renewable fuels or produce energy-conservation technologies (including energy-conserving lighting technologies
and smart grid technologies); (vi) manufacture qualified plug-in electric drive motor vehicles, qualified plug-in electric
vehicles, or components designed specifically for such vehicles; or (vii) reduce greenhouse gas emissions (as
determined by the Treasury Department). The IRS must certify that the project is eligible for the credit and the project
cannot produce any property that is used in the refining or blending of any transportation fuel (other than renewable
fuels). A taxpayer's "qualified investment" is the basis of eligible property that the taxpayer places in service during the
taxable year and is part of a qualifying advanced energy project. Property is placed in service in the taxable year in
which it is placed in a condition or state of readiness and availability for its intended purpose. "Eligible property" means
any property of the taxpayer that is (i) necessary for the production of property designed for the uses listed above;
(ii) tangible personal property or other tangible property (not including a building or its structural components), but only
if such property is used as an integral part of the qualified advanced energy project; and (iii) with respect to which
depreciation (or amortization) is allowable. The basis of the property is reduced by the full amount of the credit, and
recapture rules apply to the credit.
14
www.wsgr.com
To claim this credit, among other things a taxpayer must file applications for a project with the Department of Energy
and the IRS and be awarded an amount of credit. A total of $2.3 billion of credits is authorized for awards. In January
2010, the federal government announced that the entire $2.3 billion available had been awarded to projects. However,
because some approved projects might never be completed (or qualify for a lesser amount of credit) and because of
the possibility that an additional several billion dollars of credit might be authorized for future awards, credits might
become available in the future. The techniques described below to monetize tax benefits may also be available for this
credit. Because this credit is awarded to a specific applicant, any monetization technique that involves the transfer of
the property to another person (or a change in tax status of the person awarded a credit) will require that the IRS
approve the transfer of the credit to the successor.
6. Cellulosic Biofuels
An income tax credit is available for a producer of cellulosic biofuels equal to $1.01 for each gallon of qualified fuel
produced. This credit is reduced by the amount of other ethanol credits (which will expire on December 31, 2010), so
that the sum of this credit and those other credits is $1.01 per gallon of qualified fuel produced. In addition, the owner
of a cellulosic biofuel plant placed in service in the United States before January 1, 2013 (or the construction of which
begins after December 20, 2006 and before January 1, 2013) may claim a depreciation deduction equal to 50 percent
of the cost of the plant for the year in which it is placed in service; the remaining 50 percent of the cost of the plant may
qualify for accelerated depreciation.
B.
Although not the focus of this discussion, many states and local municipalities also offer tax incentives, in various
forms (e.g., income tax credits, sales and use tax exemptions, property tax exemptions, and tax abatements), to
promote the development of projects utilizing a wide variety of renewable energy sources. Of course, in budgeting for
and deciding where to site a renewable energy project, Sponsors should also consider the impact of state and local
taxes (such as sales and use tax and property tax) on the proposed project.
An example of an available state income tax credit is the renewable energy property investment tax credit established
by North Carolina to encourage the development and expansion of renewable energy property in that state. This
income tax credit is equal to 35 percent of the cost of renewable energy property constructed, purchased or leased by
a taxpayer and placed in service in North Carolina, with limits of (i) $2.5 million of credit per installation for
nonresidential property and (ii) $1,400 to $10,500 of credit per installation (depending on the type of renewable energy
used) for residential property. If the property serves a single-family dwelling, the credit is taken for the taxable year in
which the property is placed in service; if the property is a multi-family dwelling or is non-residential, the credit is taken
in five equal installments beginning with the year the property is placed in service. Renewable energy property
includes biomass, solar, geothermal, wind, and hydroelectric. An example of a sales and use tax exemption is the
state of New York exemption for the sale and installation of residential solar-energy systems. The exemption applies
to the sale or use of a solar-energy system that utilizes solar radiation to produce energy designed to provide heating,
cooling, hot water, and/or electricity.
C.
For many reasons, a developer of a renewable energy project may not be able to benefit from the various tax
subsidies available to the project. Various strategies have developed that allow a developer to receive value for, or
monetize, the tax incentives the developer would not otherwise be able to utilize. These strategies generally involve
an institutional investor that can benefit from the tax incentives acquiring an equity interest in the project. Two of the
main strategies, the partnership flip and the sale-leaseback, are discussed below. These monetization structures
may also be used for the Treasury grant in lieu of the ITC, described above.
1. Partnership Flip
In a typical partnership flip transaction, an institutional investor will form a partnership with the developer, which will
own the Solar Project or other renewable energy project. The investor will receive an allocation of tax benefits and
cash distributions from the partnership until the investor achieves an agreed-upon after-tax return. Subject to some
limitations, the investor may make its investment in the partnership over time, which effectively allows the investor to
fund its investment in the partnership with reductions in future federal income tax liability.
In the initial stage of the project, the investor generally will receive a disproportionate allocation of the partnerships
income or loss and any tax credits (e.g., PTC, ITC) available to the partnership. When the investors target return is
achieved (the flip-point), the investors allocation of partnership items is reduced to a small portion.
15
www.wsgr.com
The partnership generally will distribute its available cash flow 100 percent to the developer until the developer
recoups its cash investment in the project, and cash would thereafter be distributed 100 percent to the investor until
the flip-point is reached. Following the flip-point, cash distributions would be made in accordance with partnership
allocations (e.g., 95% to the developer and 5% to the investor). The developer will typically have an option,
exercisable on or after the flip-point, to purchase the investors interest in the partnership at its then fair market value.
In late 2007, the IRS published safe harbor guidelines for wind partnership transactions under which it would treat the
investor as a partner in the partnership (rather than a purchaser of tax credits) and respect the disproportionate
allocation of PTCs to the investor. These guidelines were revised in late 2009. The revised guidelines provide that the
safe harbor guidelines are not intended to provide substantive rules and are not to be used as IRS audit guidelines.
Although the safe harbor applies only to wind transactions and the allocation of PTCs, the renewable energy industry
is generally following the safe-harbor guidelines in structuring partnership flip transactions for non-wind projects and for
tax incentives other than the PTC.
2. Sale-Leaseback
The sale-leaseback is another structure utilized to monetize various tax incentives. Although the sale-leaseback
generally may not be used to monetize PTCs, the technique has been used extensively to monetize ITCs in solar
projects. In a typical sale-leaseback transaction involving a solar project, the developer will install, operate, and
maintain the project and a customer will agree to purchase the power generated from the project under a long-term
PPA. The developer will incur all expenses related to the installation, operation, and maintenance of the solar
equipment.
To monetize the ITC and other tax benefits, the developer will sell the facility to an investor within three months after its
in-service date. The investor will lease the project back to the developer for a lease term approximating the term of the
PPA and the developer will typically use the PPA as collateral for its lease payment obligations. The developers
revenue from the PPA is utilized to make rental payments under the lease.
The investor is considered the owner of the project for tax purposes, and it therefore claims the ITC and other tax
benefits. The investor shares its tax savings with the developer in the form of reduced rents. The developer will
typically have an option, exercisable at the end of the lease term, to purchase the project from the investor at its then
fair market value.
For the sale-lease back structure to work, the lease must be structured as a true lease for tax purposes. There is an
extensive body of law addressing the characterization of transactions cast in the form of a lease. In general, under
IRS guidelines, a lease would be respected as a true lease if the lessee does not have an option to purchase the
property for an amount less than its fair market value, the lessor retains the risk that the property will decline in value
(e.g., the lessor does not have the right to require the lessee to purchase the asset at a fixed price), and at the end of
the lease, the leased asset is expected to have a significant residual value (e.g., 20% of its original cost) and a
significant remaining useful life (e.g., 20% of its originally estimated useful life). Case law has held that arrangements
that do not fully comply with the IRSs ruling guidelines nonetheless qualify as leases. Equity investors and lenders
may require that a lease of a renewable energy project qualify as a guideline lease, however.
3. Pass-through Lease
Pass-through leases, used extensively to monetize the rehabilitation tax credit, have been used recently to monetize
solar energy credits (and more recently Treasury grants). Typically, an entity (Owner) would acquire a solar energy
project from a developer at fair market value. The project would include not only the tangible solar assets but also the
contract rights to sell the energy to the off-taker or homeowner (or lease the solar equipment to the offtaker/homeowner). The Owner would be structured as a limited liability company owned 50.01% by the developer (or
an affiliate of the developer) and 49.99% by another limited liability company (Tenant). Tenant typically would be
owned 99.9% by the investor and 0.01% by the developer (or an affiliate). Owner would lease the project to the
Tenant under an arrangement that would qualify as a true lease for income tax purposes. Owner then elects to have
any available federal credits (or Treasury grants) pass though to its lessee, Tenant. (The legislation governing
Treasury grants also permits this election for Treasury grants.) Under the election, the lessees cost basis in the
property (for claiming the credit) is the appraised value of the property, which is not necessarily limited to the lessors
cost basis in the property. The basis of the property is not adjusted for the amount of the credit/Treasury grant, but the
lessee is required to include in income 50% of the amount of the credit/Treasury grant ratably over a 5-year period.
The effect of the election is to bifurcate the credit/Treasury grant from the depreciation, since the investor owns more
than 99% of the lessee, but indirectly owns approximately 50% of the Owner, the entity that will claim depreciation.
16
www.wsgr.com
Thus, this structure is usually proposed by investors who value the credit/grant but place less importance on
depreciation. Developers would typically prefer a partnership flip or sale-leaseback structure, because, among other
things, those structures monetize nearly all of the accelerated depreciation (which developers often cannot use).
In addition to being allocated nearly all tax credits/grants, investors in pass-though structures typically received a fixed
annual equity distribution from the Tenant entity in the range of 2-5% of their invested capital. The economics and
cash flows of these deals are harder to generalize than the cash flows in a sale leaseback (where the investor gets
everything) or flip (where the investor gets nearly everything prior to the flip) and extensive modeling is usually
required to ensure the economics of the deal meet expectations and are consistent with the legal structure.
VI. Conclusion
Companies that are in the business of developing renewable energy projects confront a host of complex and inter-related
commercial and legal issues that must be successfully navigated to ensure a projects success and realize potential
investor returns. Regardless of whether project finance is employed, it is important for Sponsors to assemble a team of
professional advisors that can not only assist in executing a debt or equity transaction, but also analyze the various
options that may exist in the course of developing projects. The currently tight credit environment, which is characterized
by a lack of liquidity in the marketplace and a general risk aversion on the part of lenders, serves only to heighten
competition for available debt. However, in such an environment, the right combination of business model, project scale,
contractual structure, and equity support will still be attractive to project lenders for long-term debt commitments.
Determining whether to pursue project financing in the course of developing renewable projects is one of the most
fundamental decisions that developers must make. An affirmative decision will dictate the legal and contractual
structure of the projects, place certain operational limitations on how the projects operate, and limit the developers
discretion regarding the use of much of the cash flow from the project. On the other hand, a successful project
financing can maximize equity returns through increased project leverage, remove significant liabilities from the
Sponsors balance sheet, capitalize on tax financing opportunities, and protect key Sponsor assets. In order to take
full advantage of project financing opportunities, it is vital that companies invest the time and resources during the
initial development stages to obtain the best possible terms and conditions in commercial agreements which serve as
the foundation to project financing on successful terms.
August 2010
17
www.wsgr.com